The URL can be used to link to this page

2004-112 T TOWN OF QUEENSBURY 4W 742 Bay Road,Queensbury,NY 12804-5902 (518) 761-8201 Community Development- Building &Codes (518) 761-8256 CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY Permit Number. P20040112 Date Issued: Tuesday, November 30, 2004 This is to certify that work requested to be done as shown by Permit Number P20040112 has been completed. Tax Map Number. 523400-296-016-0001-016-002-0000 Location: 17 CRONIN Rd Owner. LLC JBJ QUEENSBURY LLC Applicant: SOCIAL SECURITY BUILDING This structure maybe occupied as a: By Order of Town Board Commercial Alteration TOWN OF QUEENSBURY Director of Building&Code Enforcement 7- TOWN-OF QIJEENSBURY 742 Bay Road,Queensbury,NY 12804-5902 (518)761-8201 Community Development-Building&`Codes (518) 761-8256 BUILDING PERMIT Permit Number: P20040112 Application Number: A20040112 Tax Map No: 523400-296-016-0001-016-002-0000 Permission is hereby granted to: SOCIAT, SECT TRTTY BI J LDTNG For property located at: 17 CRONIN Rd in the Town of Queensbury,to construct or place at the above location in accordance withapplication together with plot plans and other information hereto filed and approved and in compliance with the NYS Uniform Building Codes and the Queensbury Zoning Ordinance. Type of Construction Value Owner Address: LLC JBJ QUEENSBURY LLC 2850 CLOVER St Commercial Alteration $216,541.00 PITTSFORD,NY 14534-0000 Total Value $216,541.00 Contractor or Builder's Name /Address Electrical Inspection Agency Plans&Specifications 2004-112 SOCIAL SECURITY ADMINISTRATION BUILDING 9530 SQ FT COMMERCIAL INTERIOR ALTERATION $1,023.60 PERMIT FEE PAID-THIS PERMIT EXPIRES: Thursday,May 05, 2005 (If a longer period is required,an application for an extension must be made to the code Enforcement Officer of the Town of Queensbury before the expiration date.) Dated at the T n of Q eens ty, May 05, 2004 SIGNED BY for the Town of Queensbury. Director of Building&Code Enforcement Building Permit Application Town of Queensbury—Dept of Community Development,742 Bay Road,Queensbury,NY (518)761-8256 A permit must be obtained before beginning construction. Permit File No. �- No inspection will be made until applicant has received a Fee Paid valid building permit. All applicants' spaces on this Roo.Fee Paid $ application must be completed and must appear on the Reviewed By: application form. Applicant: f1G � �d Owner: � J4 �y1'yG� Address: AV IOeX' Address: 9_6 0_Q T� /VY� 1�� 1��r�Ft'�r l� A4Y Phone# Phone# Property Location: Lot Number: / House Number Subdivision Name: Tax Map Number: /New Building: residence /commercial 'Estimated Market Value of Construction: $ 0,211 y tt Addition: residence"ence al If an Addition,what will use of new addition be? Alteration: residenceo No change to exterior size: om'1 o Other work(describe Check OccupancyWormation 1' Floor 2° Floor Other floor Total Below sq.it. sq ft. . sq.ft. Square Feet o Single family dwelling o Two family dwelling o Townhouse o Multifamily dwelling / #of units _W Office 3C? o Mercantile o Manufactutin a 1 car detached garage 0 2 car detached garage 0 3 car detached garage G 1 car attached garage a 2 car attached garage O 3 car attached garage a Storage building- commercial a Storage building- residential a Other What is the proposed height of the structure feet 'inches Will any second-hand or ungraded lumber be used? If so,for what? Type of Heating System: electric/ oil gas ood forc�htbaseboard/other: Number of Ftr,evlaces to be installed AIX Number of Woodsteves to be installed List below the person(s)responsible for supervision of work as regards to building codes: Name Address 'Phone Number Builder Plumber Mason Electrician Declaration please sign below after you have carefully read the statement: To the best of my knowledge the statements contained in this application,together with the plans and specifications submitted;are a true and complete statement of all proposed work to be done on the described premises and that all provisions of the Building Code,the Ironing Ordinance and all other laws pertaining to the proposed work shall be complied with,whether specified or noted,and that such work is authorized by the owner. Further,it is understood that Vwe shall submit,prior to a Certitl a of Occupancy or Certificate of Compliance being issued,as requested by the Zoning Administrator or D ctor f Building and Codes,an As Bullt Survey bya licensed surveyor;drawn to scale,showing actual location of all ne co on. Signature: owner,owner's agen architect, ntractor Town of Queensbury Fire Marshal's Office 742 Bay Road Queensbury, NY 12804 Phone (518) 761-8205 Fax(518) 745-4437 Fire Marshal's Inspection Report Request SCHEDULE Received: Permit# 0 INSPECTION ON: Name: c�G i �S C`',1 �`� AM PM NYTIME Location: APPROVED N/A YES NO COMMENTS EXIT ACCESS EXIT ENCLOSURE EXIT DISCHARGE SEIN AISLE WIDTHCONDARY AISLE WIDTH (� I� cT5 EXIT SIGN—NORMAL J ( � EXIT SIGN-BATTERY EMERGENCY LIGHTING FIRE EXTINGUISHER HUNG FIRE EXTINGUISHER INSPECTION FIRE EXTINGUISHER HYDRO FIRE ALARM SYSTEM FIRE ALARM -FAN SHUTDOWN FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM FIRE SUPPRESSION-KITCHEN FIRE SUPPRESSION—GAS ISLAND HOOD INSTALLATION INTERIOR FINISHES STORAGE COMPRESSED GAS CLEARANCE TO SPRINKLERS CLEARANCE TO ELECTRICAL ELECTRIC WIRING ENCLOSED COMBUSTIBLE WASTE VEHICLE IMPACT PROTECTION FIRE LANE F.D.SIGNAGE—UTILITY ROOMS NO SMOKING SIGNS MAXIMUM OCCUPANCY SIGN EMERGENCY EVAC PLAN ,r OK THIS DATE OR CO NOT OK r _ sY CO M DEVIC HRIS JIWORDILETTERS2001IF IRE MARS HA LI NS PECTIO NRE PORT11022001 WHITE—BUILDING DEPARTMENT COPY YELLOW—OCCUPANT COPY Commercial Final Inspection Report /a LJ Office No.: (518) 761-8256 Date Inspection request received: Z 0 / Queensbury Building&Code Enforcement Arrive: ,7� am/pm Depart: am/pm 742 Bay Road,Queensbury,NY 12804 Inspector's Initials: r NAME: `�G G, f Seer,i j �v, �l PERMIT#: LOCATION: ) `7 C% DATE: COMI ENTS: Y N NA Chimney/"B"Vent/Direct Vent Location Plumbing Vent Through Roof 6"/Roof Complete Exterior Finish Grade Complete 6"in 10' or Equivalent Interior/Exterior Guardrails 42 in.Platform/Decks Interior/Exterior Ballisters 4 in. Spacing Platform/Decks Stair Handrail 34 in.—38 in./Step Risers 7"/Treads 11" Vestibules For Exit doors>3000 s . ft. All Doors 36 in.w/Lever Handles/Panic Hardware, if required Exits At Grade Or Platform 36 (w)x 44"(1)/Canopy or Equiv. Gas Valve Shut-off Exposed&Regulator(18")Above Grade Floor Bathroom Watertight/Other Floors Oka Relief Valve,Heat Trap/Water Temp.110 Degrees Maximum Boiler/Furnace Enclosure 1 hr. or Fire Extinguishing System Fresh Air Supply for Occupancy/Ventilation Combustion Low Water Shut Off For Boilers Gas Furnace Shut Off Within 30 ft. or Within Line Of Site Oil Furnace Shut Off at Entrance to Furnace Area Stoclaoom/Storage/Receiving/Shipping Room(2 hr.), 1 '/z doors > 10%> 1000 s . ft. 3/a Hour Corridor Doors&Closers Firewalls/Fire Separation,2 Hour, 3 Hour Complete/Fire Dampers/Fire Doors Ceiling Fire Stopping, 3,000 s . ft.Wood Frame Attic Access 30"x 20"x 30"(h), Crawl Space Access 18"x 24" Smoke Vents Or Fan,if required Elevator Operation and Si a e/Shaft Sealed Handicapped Bathroom Grab Bars/Sinks/Toilets Handicapped Bath/Parking Lot Si na e Public Toilet Room Handicapped Accessible Handicapped Service Counters, 34 in., Checkout 36" Handicapped Ram /Handrails Continuous/12 in.Beyond Active Listening System and Signage Assembly Space Final Electrical Site Plan/Variance required Final Survey,New Structure/Flood Plain certification,if req. As-built Septic System Layout Required or On File Building Number or Tenant Address on Building or Driveway 4,Water Fountain or Cooler f I Building Access All Sides b 2 ' veable Surface 20' wide �� /tom<l ka To Issue Temp. or ermanent C/O Okay To Issue C/C Last printed 6/3/2003 9:27 ARIL:\PamW\Building&Codes\Commercial Final Inspection Report.doc Town of Queensbury Fire Marshal's Office 742 Bay Road Queensbury, NY 12804 Phone (518) 761-8205 Fax(518) 745-4437 Fire Marshal's Inspection Report Request SCHEDULE 1VZ)� � 04 Permit#��-I f�� INSPECTION ON: Received' `f" Name: A� =C PM ANYTIME Location: �'"' APPROVED N/A YES NO COMMENTS EXIT ACCESS l EXIT ENCLOSURE EXIT DISCHARGE MAIN AISLE WIDTH 1 SECONDARY AISLE WIDTHN, _L� I l�) �AOC Ya ea EXIT SIGN-NORMAL EXIT SIGN-BATTERY EMERGENCY LIGHTING FIRE EXTINGUISHER HUNG � �u ��_I/�A C3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER � "� INSPECTION FIRE EXTINGUISHER HYDRO I FIRE ALARM SYSTEM ' FIRE ALARM -FAN SHUTDOWN ?t FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM FIRE SUPPRESSION-KITCHEN I FIRE SUPPRESSION-GAS �� X t � ISLAND (JVV` 1 3 HOOD INSTALLATION INTERIOR FINISHES STORAGE clue e li COMPRESSED GAS CLEARANCE TO SPRINKLERS CLEARANCE TO ELECTRICAL ELECTRIC WIRING ENCLOSED COMBUSTIBLE WASTE VEHICLE IMPACT PROTECTION FIRE LANE F.D.SIGNAGE-UTILITY ROOMS NO SMOKING SIGNS MAXIMUM OCCUPANCY SIGN EMERGENCY EVAC PLAN OK THI DATE OK F R CO NOT OK � r jjgPECTED-IBY COMDEV/CHRISJAfVORDILETTERS20011FIREMARSHALINSPEC NREPORT11022001 WHITE-BUILDING DEPARTMENT COPY YELLOW-OCCUPANT COPY i Commercial Final Inspection Report Office No.: (518)761-8256 Date Inspection request received: 3 o Queensbury Building&Code Enforcement Arrive: �'6J am/pm Depart: am/pm 742 Bay Road,Queensbury,NY 12804 Inspector's Initials: 'fit NAME: pC�_ .U,�J�' y . PERMIT#: �— LOCATION: 1�1 •�, DATE: l/ 0 r G f COMMENTS: Y N NA Chimney/"B"Vent/Direct Vent Location Plumbing Vent Through Roof 6"/Roof Complete Exterior Finish Grade Complete 6"in 10' or Equivalent Interior/Exterior Guardrails 42 in.Platform/Decks Interior/Exterior Ballisters 4 in. Spacing Platform/Decks Stair Handrail 34 in.—38 in./Step Risers 7"/Treads 11" Vestibules For Exit doors>3000 s . ft. vt� �`/ •�Gt�"�• All Doors 36 in.w/Lever Handles/Panic Hardware, if required SA Exits At Grade Or Platform 36 (w)x 44"(1)/Canopy or Equiv. Gas Valve Shut-off Exposed&Regulator 18" Above Grade Floor Bathroom Watertight/Other Floors Oka Relief Valve,Heat Trap/Water Temp. 110 Degrees Maximum zi Boiler/Furnace Enclosure 1 hr. or Fire Extinguishing System Fresh Air Supply for Occupancy/Ventilation Combustion Low Water Shut Off For Boilers Gas Furnace Shut Off Within 30 ft.or Within Line Of Site Oil Furnace Shut Off at Entrance to Furnace Area Stockroom/Storage/Receiving/Shipping Room(2 hr.), 1 '/Z doors > 10%> 1000 s . ft. 3/4 Hour Corridor Doors&Closers Firewalls/Fire Separation, 2 Hour, 3 Hour Complete 1 re Dampers/Fire Doors Ceiling Fire Stopping, 3,000 s . ft.Wood Frame Attic Access 30"x 20"x 30"(h),Crawl Space Access "x 24" Smoke Vents Or Fan,if required Elevator Operation and Si a e/Shaft Seale Handicapped Bathroom Grab Bars/Sinks/ oilets Handicapped Bath/Parking Lot Signag CIYA rld (llJ Public Toilet Room Handicapped Acces able Handicapped Service Counters, 34 in.vtheckout 3611 Handicapped Ram /Handrails Con 'nuous/12 in.Beyond c J Active Listening System and Sign e Assembly Space Zfif �• -��^K Final Electrical / / Site Plan/Variance required �� I/rc Final Survey,New Structure loud Plain certification,if reg. As-built Septic System Lay6ut Required or On File Building Number or Tenant Address on Building or Driveway Water Fountain or Cooler Building Access All Sides by le Surface 20'wide Okay To Issue Temp. or permaneut Okay To Issue C/C Last printed 6/3/2003 9:27 AML:\PamW\Building&Codes\Commercial Final Inspection Report.doc MIDDLE DEPARTMENT INSPECTION AGENCY, INC. that the electrical wiring to the electrical equipment listed below has been examined and is approved as being in accord with the National Electrical Code, applicable governmental, utility and Agency rules in effect on the date noted below and is issued subject to the following conditions. Owner: Social Security Admin. Date: 11 /19/2004 Occupant: Unknown Location: 17 Cronin Rd. Non—Residential Occupancy: Queensbury, Warren Co. NY I✓� Applicant Ambrose Electric V 790 Watervliet Shaker Rd Latham, NY 12110 Raymond A. Novak - Equipment: 10 — Switches; 62 — Receptacles; 50 — Fixtures; 4 — Emergency i Lights; 4 — Exit Lights; 2 — Exit/Emergency Combo. ; 8 — Power Poles to Cubicles This certificate applies to the electrical wiring to the electrical equipment listed immediately null and void. This certificate applies only to the use,occupancy and above and the installation inspected as of the above noted date based on a visual ownership as indicated herein. Upon a change in the use,occupancy or ownership inspection. No warranty is expressed or implied as to the mechanical safety, effi- of the property indicated above, this certificate shall be immediately null and void.. ciency or fitness of the equipment for any particular purpose. This certificate shall In the event that this certificate becomes invalid based upon the above conditions, be valid for a period of one year from the above noted date. Should the electrical this certificate may be revalidated upon reinspection by Middle Department system to which this certificate applies be altered in any way,including but not limit- Inspection Agency, Inc. An application for inspection must be submitted to Middle ed to,the introduction of additional electrical equipment and/or the replacement of Department Inspection Agency, Inc, to initiate the inspection and revalidation any of the components installed as of the aayb�ovne�n,�yot�edry�dyal�e�this certificat�e,%syh�all;�beq�, pro�cye�ss�A,fee will be charged for this service. 06/02/2004 08:50 518-486-4487 NYSDOS CODES PAGE 01/01 Ct]oes-DIVISION NEW YORK STATE DEPARTMENT OF STATE >� 1 Division of Code Enforcement and Administration 41 State Street Albany, New York 12231 Phone no. (518) 474-4073 �Fax� (518) 486-4487 DEPARTMENT OF STATE Facsimile Transmlysion Sheet DATE: Tune 1, 2004 p2� TO: Pledy DeBonet, Social Security Administration FAQ;: 212 264 2959 FROM: Cheryl A.- Fischer, P. Assistant.Director for Code ntcrpretation NOTE: l:landicap access to a raised piatfozml at reception.area in office Thus is in?-esponse to your question regarding whether h.atldieap access is required to a raised platform at a receptions area in your office. It is our opinion that handicap access is required. ,Building Code of New York State(BCNYS) section 1.104.4, multilevel buildings and facilities, states that at least one accessible route shall connect each accessible level, including mezzanines, in multistory buildings and facilities. This section is applicable to the platform,the employee space and does not allow for one reception desk not on the platform. to satisfy the requirements. BCNYS Section 1109.12.3,point of sales and seridee counter3, states that where counters are provided for sales or di.stributi.ou of goods or services, at least one of each type provided shall be accessible. This section is app.l.icable to the height of the counter for custorizer use and .requires one,not all counters to be accessible. CC: David )lati.n, CEO, Town of Queensbury fax: 745-4437 Number of sheets (including cover sheet) 1 If there is a problem or question, call (518)474-4073 **Please Nntc!This fax and any of its contents may conatin pcpattment of state privileged or confidential information, This fax is intended solely for the rise of the individual or entity to which it is addressed. Tf you arc not the intended recipient of this fax,you are hcrcbv notified tllu any dissemination,disirftbon,copying,or action taken in relation to the contents of and amichmerim to this fax are strictly prohibited. and may be unlawful, If you have received this fax in ermr,notify the sender immediately.and permanently destroy the original.and any copy of this fax. Rough Plumbing / Insulation Inspection Report Office No. (518) 761-8256 Date Inspection re uest re 'ved: /.7 is Queensbury Building& Code Enforcement Arrive: rt: s am 742 Bay Road, Queensbury,NY 12804 Inspector's Init' s: - i NAME: c t„ B u, PERMIT #: LOCATION: — INSPECT ON: Alez TYPE OF STRUCTURE: Y N N/A PVC: R-1, R-2,R-3,R4 Drain/Vents Cast Iron, o e r ' en Comm. r PlumbingVent/Vents in Place : 0u Nail Plates 1•i,� it o wvV- ��c{J7 1 i/ inch min. Drain Size Washing Machine Drain 2 inch min. Head or Air Supply Test Jf Drain and Vents 5 PSI or 10 feet above highest connection for 15 minutes Cleanout every 100 feet/change of direction WatErpu ly Piping Cer •ommercial er, CPVC,Pex One and Two-Family Insulation/Residential Check/Commercial Check Proper Vent,Attic Vent Duct/Rot Water Piping Insulation If required unheated spaces Combustion Air Supply for Furnace Duct work sealed properly/No duct tape COMMENTS: L;\SueHemingway\Building.Codes.Inspection.FQRMS\Rough Plumbing Insulation Report.doc November l7,2003 Framing /Firestopping Inspection Report [ Y l Office No. (518)761-8256 Date Inspection request received: Queensbury Building&Code Enforcement Arrive: - m 742 Bay Road, Queensbury,NY 12804 Inspector's Initia s- LI NAME: ` . 1 (� PERMIT#: D T LOCATION: INSPECT ON: TYPE OF STRUCTUR Y N/A COMMENTS raming Jack Studs/Headers Bracing/Bridging Joist hangers Jack Posts/Main Beams Exterior sheeting nailed properly 12"O.C. Headroom 6 ft. 8 in. Stairwells 36 in. or more Headroom 6 ft. 8 in. Notches/Holes/Bearing Walls Metal Strapping for Notches Top Plate 1 %2(w) 16 gauge (8) 16D nails each side Draft stopping 1,000 sq. ft. floor trusses Anchor Bolts 6 ft. or less on center Ice and snow shield 24 inches from wall Fire separation 1, 2, 3 hour Fire wall 2, 3,4 hour Firestopping Penetration sealed 16 inch insulation in cavity min. Garage Fire Separation House side '/Z inch or 5/8 inch Type X Garage side 5/8 inch Type X Ceiling/wall Windows Habitable Space/Bedrooms 24 in. (H) 20 in. (W) 5.7 sf above/below grade 5.0 sf grade L:\SueHemingway\Building.Codes.Inspection.FORMS\Framing Firestopping Inspection Report.doc January 28,2003 Rough Plumbing / Insulation Inspection Report p � Office No. (518) 761-8256 Date;Inspection request-received: Queensbury Building&Code Enforcement Arrive: am/pm Depart: am/pm 742 Bay Road, Queensbury,NY 12804 Inspector's Initials: NAME: 3() u3ISPERMIT #: Z LOCATION: u C INSPECT ON: TYPE OF STRUCTURE: Y N N/A PVC: R-1,R-2,R-3,R4 Drain/Vents Cast Iron Copper Drain/Vent/Comm. Plum ' Vent/Vents in Place ou Plumbing/Nail Plates 1 % inch min..Drain Size Washing Machine Drain 2 inch min. Head or Air Supply Test Drain and Vents 5 PSI or 10 feet above highest connection for 15 minutes Cleanout every 100 feet/change of direction Water Supply Piping Cooper Commercial Cooper, CPVC,Pex One and Two-Family Insulation/Residential Check/Commercial Check Proper Vent,Attic Vent Duct/Hot Water Piping Insulation If required unheated spaces Combustion Air Supply for Furnace Duct work sealed properly/No duct tape COMMENTS: L;\SueHemingway\Building.Codes.Inspection.FORMS\Rough Plumbing Insulation Report.doc November 17,2003 MAY-04-2004 11:37 SOCIAL SECURITY 212 264 2959 P.01 41AI USA. � SOCIAL SECURITY ADMINISTRATION MANAGEMENT AND OPERATIONS SUPPORT FIELD SERVICES TEAM REGION II , NEW YORK 26 FEDERAL PLAYA RM 4040 NEW YORK , NY 10278 FACSIMILE TRANSMITTAL SHEET TO: FROM: Paul Marchand Hedy DeBoner OFFICE: DATE: 05/04/04 FAX NUMBER- # OF PAGES INCLUDING COVER: 518-383-5562 5 PHONE NUMBER.: SENDER'S PHONE NUMBER, 51 S-3S3.5561 (212)264-2904 RE: SENDER'S FAX NUMBER: (212)264-2959 NOTES/COMMENTS: Paul, Please refer to the materials FAXed to ine by Charles Rush of the New Yctk State Codes Division. M=-Rush WAS vetp helpful,and was open to having you or MY.Hatin call him• uiaaay ssau�ca suope}aadza �,4peua��u aa�ip cq uatg asnea pue simai leraoe pe4e prom aeq]saiauie}�aoun pue ss�su ...r.....1.......�,......................G........ .............,............+..�.1..............�...G f...-...........G....-�,.............G..........,.......................f........... ------- G..•..........f�...., ....,.............,...•...G...-....�,........". MAY-04-2004 11:37 SOCIAL SECURITY 212 264 2959 P.02 NEW YORX STATE DEPARTMENT OF STATE CODES DWISION 41 STATE STMET ALBANY, NY 12231 . PHONE (518) 474-4073 FAX (518) 486-4457- TO: DATE: J f VROM: CHARLSS E. RUSH, JR., R.A. Senior Bullding Construction Engtneut CQdR'$ �]Y]570T1- SWO of DEPARTMENT OF STATE Naw York' Codes Division +41 State St. Albaffy, NY 12231-0001 NOTE: F$x: (St9) d86.4d8T y. (518) 474-4073 httpdMronM,doB.sWtQ.rlyus A-CW C " MAIJ�21" ate' ' r *Enclosed is the malerlal you requested. Please Iet me know if I can be of further assisrance.* NL]UBER, OF SHEETS (INCLUDING COVER SHEET) IF THM 1S A PROBLEM OR QUES'77ON, CALL. (518) 474-4073. **Please]Tote; This fax and an , of its contents may roritain Department of State�iYlleg"a or confidential information. Twin fax is intended solely for ib�e use of the individual or entily to wbkb it is addressed. If you tare mi the intended recipient or ibis fax, you are hereby notified that any dlsseminlition, distn-+ution; copyipg, or action taken in relation to the contents of and aumchments to this fax are strictly prohibited aad may be unlamm. 1f yov have 1rece3ved this fax in error, notiify the sender immediately and permanertly destroy Abe original and.any copy of this fax. . MAY-04-2004 11:37 SOCIAL SECURITY 212 264 2959 P.M 1909�•1'It19.1d.1 ACCESSIBUTY i 11098 starage.%ft fixed or built-in storage elements txceptlon:Where the ease of 4x sctlfng.space is less sucb as cabinets, Aelvdt',.medicine cabinets,closets, and brae 5,0M,squArb feet(465 ms),only-one check-out drawers are provided in-riquiredaccessible spaces,at)cast *-Ii is required.to be accessible., one of each We shall contain storage space complying i TABfLE1160:M.2 with ICCl,ANSI•A117.1. At3CESS19L•E CHECK-OUT'A1SLES 11092.1 LoclGm. Whem- lockgra are ftovided in Tn'1'ALIC41 KWdUTAISLO' -fANfMUM'r4UMWAOF accdssi83e sOP FI FpNOTtDl)paces,at!mast Ave pet`ct nt but not less than ACCEMBLE C"EC¢:- M AISLES EACH OUNC116N one of each type shall be accessible, 1 to A 1 11,094.2 Shelving and display units- Self service Ste 8 z Shelves*and display units ii mircaritile occupancies and shelvi"in stack'areas'of librmics shall be located on an 9 to is 8 accessible routs.Such shelving and display units shall Over i5 3,plt+s 20%of additional melt$ . not be required to comply with reach-range provisiots, 11994,23 point of was and Bert ice counters-Where 11094;3 Coot books and foithing sbel*e&Where coat counters ass provided for sales or distribution of goods hooks or folding shelves are provided in inaccessible or aehices,at least one of each type provided shall be toilet zvorns,.toilet compartments,or in dressing,fitting accakble.Where iu6h ebueters airs dispersed through- or loci-=rooms,at least one of..eagh type shall toe pro- out 12i0building&f' cillty;tBe Nccessible'•counters shall vided in accessible toilet rooms, toilet compamncnts, also be dispersed. and dtessigg,f:ttirig tind'16t lace roams, 110902A Vaud service lines.Food service lines shall 1109,.9 Dttectablt warniags.,.PassWger transit platform be accessible.Where self-service shelves tie provided, edges bordding a•drop-off and not prottttcd by platfbpn at leAt 50 percent,but not'less than-she.of each type screens or guards.shall have a deteetabie warning, provided shall be 20eossible- F7tceptioe:Detdadble waYriings are not required at bus 1109A25 Queue and veining liw. Queue and wait- stops. ins lies servicing accessible'counters or check-out Ka 11091d0 .Assembly area mm'Ung.Assembly areas in every aisles shall be ac;:&Iiblb.' occ 1psmcy shall comply WithSe4ion 1108.2 fof.aacdssible 1109.13 (Controls, operatlxg mechanisms se " and hard- Mating and awistive hart Ming devices. warn. Gonttols, opersting tttpchanisms and. hazdWaxe 1109.1.1, Seating at tables,;counters and work surfae". intended.For ep the occupant,by occupant,including switches Where slating at fixed or,built-in tables,Count= or work that contiol ligbting,and venti)IaAon, and electrical conve- stufaeea is provided in accessible spaces,at least 5 percent niernce outlets,in accessible spaces,Wong accessible ri Les of Ute SaAth%.buf sot less thav'one,dill!be accessible; or U pMT�of accessible elements shah be accessible. 1109.114 DisperAon-Accessible fixed orbuilt-in seat. 1109.13.1 Operable windows. Where operable win- ifta at tbbW,povnters er wavk surfaces s11 ou be diftK4- dews are prrovided in r ms; that sM regtired to be sited.throughout the space or facility containing such elements. Ftcccers'bla in accordance witb Secrions 1167.5A through IX09.1� Customer service facili4es. Customer service 1107-Sti4 and 5. ttions 1107.6.1 and 1.107.6.2, at least one wiindow in each Mzh shall be accessible and eadb facilities shall provide for accessible features in,accordance required operable wiz,dow shall be acee96ib1e. with-Sbetion0109:12.1 through 11093M. 1109.12.1 Dressing,fitting and locker roorw. Where Exci!ptlori: Accessible windows are not required in dressing rooms,fitting rooms;or locker ro.Ms are pro- bath)m'i or kitchens. vided,at-least 5 percent,,bat not leas than one,of each 1109.14 Itecm0oeat facilities. Recmdonal facilltics type of use in each cluster provided shall bee accessible: shall be provided with acewible features in accordance 1109.12.2 Check-out aisles. Where check-out aisles with Section 1109.14.1 through 11Q9.14.3. ere,provided,accessible check-out aisles shall be pro-. 110944.1-Fitdlities strving a single building, It1 vided in accordance wi6 ;I b).e 11.09.12.2. %erB check out aisles nerve difl'arent fetrttions, at least one group �-2 and R-3 occupancies where reereatiorisl faesiitie accessible cbe6k-'out *% shall ba providcd for each are provided serving a single bailding contain+- function.Whore check-out aisles are dispersed through- ing Typo A ar'lype R units,.25 percent but nqt less than out the building or facility,.accessible check-aw aisles one of each type of recreations!facility shall be accessi- shall also be dispersed.Traffic comml.devices:Security blo. Every recmational facility of'each type on a ;SitC. devisee and turns lea located in, accessible check-out shall be, considered to determine the coral number of aisles or lanes shall be accessible, each type which are required to be accessible, 245 SUILINNG CODE OF NEWYORK STATE MRY-04-2004 11:38 SOCIAL SECURITY 212 264 2959 P.04 arhCC1~S3r91LrrY 11ed.i d--i 1tre.i3,2 h•. ,current and ongoing research into the use and applica- ing or tables,ere located, and two such seats,dr.tables = :troll of truncated domes W a suitable detectable-warn- are required by this Becton to be accessible,the intent s; ..ar)g surface for various applications, including interior of this section is-to regolre that one acre ssibla seat or and exterior locations.ICG Al17.1 require's that the typo table Lie located In.two of the four areas. of detectable*amino surface utilized must be standard tltt`oughout a building, facllityt elte'or complex of build- 130BA2 Customer service feaiAtles, Customer service facili- '`5 'lri0. If dKerent types of-detectable warning surfaces ties shell provide fior.accessible•feawres in accordance with Seo- isre-utllized,theirvaefuiness Is diminished.The:different tiotis 1108.12.1 through 1108.IZS. `:`rftesbiages they would convey to a person With a vision r 4IMPalrmertt would not be consistent, and may be coat- `a''tbls section introdubos five subsections which address fusing and easily misinterpreted, ac cesslbiliity of dressing rooms,counters and windows. It is anticipated that Futuna applications of detectable check-out aisles. food servile, queues and waiting warnings will be considered when additional research lines,etc.Theme types of alements are brafidly teemed and documentation Of their usefulness and suitability is °customer service facillties,"and are intended to permit available.One issue;among many,Is the durability of a usage by physically disabled persons, Detectable-warning surface.in an exterior applicators •and the patential diMcuity that truncated domes may 11f1S.i2.i xlt jag,ftttisiag and locker rotirtrs.Where dressing ' :presertt,'to ,a person in a wboalchair, as well as to roams,fitting norm or locker zooms are providW, at least 5 1 s� 13+Drldisabled persons, who may have to negotiate the percent.but floe less than one,of each type of usain each cluster SEiltlece. provided shall be aecegsible. . >. -v This section establishes a reasonable rninimurn thresh- :'"'IMIO AsMubly arcs serldng. A-saembly *rag with fixed old for aomssible dressing, fitting and flicker rooms. ;�lfesring in every occupancy shall c*mply with Section 1107.2 This section does not require that dressing, fitting and for•acteeatble seating and assistive lisietting dmiCms. locker rooms,be provided, but when such.faciiitlos are : M7hLs -is a cross referance do-the assembly seating re- provided,atleast$pertant are required.to be-eccessl- ii'. ',quirerhents In Section 11 D7.2, The cross reference is ble, This section also requiroa an appropriate distribu- ', .!placed here to clarify-that wheelchair seating is required Lion of accessible facilities based an distinct and differ- •: ,fit any occupancy that includes fixed seating, not just ent functions of each group of facilities provided. For ' ;r wp A structures, - example,a deportment store may have one group of fit - , _-Gm rooms sawing the rnensweer department and a y n r separate group of fitting rooms serving the.womet n's ;.11M.11 'Soffing at tables, couotem cad work surfnceg: `„rear department. This section would not permit the 14- 1ii#fiera stating at fixed or built-in tables,counters or work Sur- cation of all accaselble fitting rooms in one department l is provided inaccessible spaces,at]cut S percent of the and-no accessible fitting rooms in the other department. meaning,bur not lees than one,shall-be aceaesible, This may result in a number of accessible fitting rooms 1 ,;'+tz►lidany occupancies such as librad6s, classrooms, res- greater than,b percent of the total number of ail fitting .' tauraft and oar public spaces are equipped with roams 9n the facility.For example;if there are two dress- y'_''.fixed-seating, tgbleo or both.This section requires that ing rooms in each of three different departments In a re- tell store,a total of three acc,�►ssitfle fitting rooms would I,.,.:•.stt ieast 5 percent,but not less than one,be accessible. 9 quire- be required: one in each of the three areas. Where The threshold of 8 percentis 6onsisteritwith the re anent for accessible seating in dining areas as specified amenities such as coat hooks, shelves or benches are F• ih'Seaton 1 i t]T.2,5,1. Fixed or built seating that is provided in Inaccessible dressing;rooms.they must also ' be provided in accessible d►essi ,part of an indiwiduai work station to not required to be ac- rtg rooms tree Section .: vessible(aee Section 1103,2.3). 1108,8) `1-IMI,11t Persion.Acceasible fixed otbzilt-in seating Rtta- 1108-12.2 Chtck-out skies.Where check-out aisles are pro- ¢'isles.edunkers or Voric surfaecs*all be,disti-lbuted throughout videxl,accessible check--out aisles shall be provided in accat- 'r�••tbe spartG or facility containing such elements. dance with Friable 11D8,12.2. Where check-out aisles Serve different functions,at least one accessible check-out-aisle shall An appropriate cl!Wbudort of'seating and tables is re- be provided for each f mctiod:When check-cut aisles are disc r,dwired and is Intended to be consistent withthe distrtbu- pensed throog+aut the building of facility,acrosdble check-out tion of all such seating and tables in the facility. For ex- aisles sbal] also be dispersed. Traffic coma] devices, security ample,a library may contain several separate areas In devices and turnstile*located in aecasible check-out aisles or which fixed seating or tables are in telled.•This provl- lanes shall be accessible. sign would prohibit the location of all accessible seating Exception:Where the area of the selling space is Iess than --and tables in a single specific area of the facility. How- 5,1100 square feet(�FbS m2),only onccheck-out claim is co- ever;this shoutd•not be construed to mean that every separate area in which fixed seating or tables are pro. quired to be accessible. aided is required to Contain an accessible seat or table. oThis section establishes the regraired number of acces- For example,if there are four areas in which fixed seat sible check-out sisles,such as are typically found in su- ,2M INMRNATIONAL BUiLOING 000MCORWENTARY 71-3T P Y• MAY-94-2004 11.39 SOCIAL SECURITY 212 264 2959 P..05 rA1'ILr ACCE.SSISIL' J � perMarksts, drugstores, discount retail stores, etc. 1102.17.4 Food SeMee Ham Food service lines shall be ace''. Where security devices such as turnstiles and automati- sible. Where self-service shelves are provided-at least S0J cafly activated gates are provided, they are'required to cetit, but not less tbari one, of eaab type provided shark: be accessible,The required number of check-out aisles accessible. are set forth in Table 1108.12.2, in other than small -1�All lines that provide access to feed service"must mee stores (selling space lass than 5,000 square feet (464 the accessible route provisions in ICd A117.1. Whey mm),if check-out aisles serve different functions or are self-service shelves are utilized, such as in a cafeteria;' dispersed,at least one check-out aisle 61:each function at least half of each types must be on an accessible rCJWt' " Sign- and each dispersed location merit be accessible:Sign- and witfrin reach ranges. age is required it'i accordande with Section 1109.i. 1108.12.5 Queue pnd VMIHug Iiittea.Queue and waiting link TABLE 1108.12.2 servicing accessible countctn or check-out aisles shall be occe: ACcreSSIBLE CHECKOUT AISLES INC. TOTAL.CH90K-Oi rr AMLES MINIMUM NUMBER OP ACCESSIBL8 OF EACH FUNCTION CHECK-OUT AISLES EACH FUNCTION -To if patrons must form a line for ssrvice, then the wafllhjg I to 4. t line must meet the accessible routd provisions of ICC:^ Al17,1. Special attention must be paid to turns aroUhd' S to S 2 Obstructions or dividers.Accessfbfewaiting lines aa$'rb. 9 to 15 quired at Coca Ions where amessible counters,vv ndbWs•, aver l5 3, sus 20°�of additional aisles or check-out aisles are provided,such as Ranks, tlblce! counters,fast food establishments and similar facilities:•= A separate waiting line for the disabled is not a vlAii This table establishes the minimum required number of alternative: accessible checkout aisles based on ihe"tatal number provided.Where more than 15 total check-out aisles are 1108.13 Controls, operating medwaisms and hardwarn,,� provides(, the intent of Table 1108,12.2 is to be applied Controls,op&T4ng mechanisms and.hardware intended for,'op14. as though it reed"3 files 1 for each addttionai 5 over 15, mflon by the occupant,including switches that control lightin j�;l e or a fraction themof.1 For example,where.15 check-out and ventilation,and electrical convenience outlets,in acccskpl'' aisles are provided,three accessible chedS-out aisles 'spaces, along accessible routes or as parse of acemssible ale= i are required, Where 16 total check-out alsias'are pro- meats shall be:accessible, vided,four accessible check-out aisles are required. This section requires that any controls fnienaw r? tcr,i�e z' utlized by the occupants of the space be accam-siblei' 1108.123Point oissaka and service eoureArs.Where counters whan such controls are located in an accessible spade;,1 are provided for sales or distribution of,goods or services, at along accessible routes or as part of an accessible-ere+ least CueOfeachtypeprovided-shall be accessible.Where such meet, for example, the switch controlling the general` counters are dispersed throughout the building or facility,titre ae- lighting of a room,th-ai Is required to be accessible also cessible counters shall also be dispersed. must be accessible. This is also true of tha Occult W: outlets that are looted in the room. Thermastats;th-a +Wherever sales ceservice counters or windows are pro- are intended to be adjustable by the:occupants musf 0d ed,at least one window or a portion of counter is•re- also be accessible.Another exampfe would be the bVbm.. quired to be accessible. For example,most hotel,regis- ton or switch that activates an automatic hand dryer ii';I: ' tration and check-out functions occur at a,counter.The toilet room:If the frxture IS mounted such that the outlet ' intent bf this secNon Is to require that one portion of the for the air is at an aacl siWlNle height,the purpose le deb-. counter area be accessible. Aeressibillty is accom- feated if the switch to activate the device'fs inbccessh• plished by providing a lower counter height td accom- ble. mtxdate a,person using a wheelchair and locating that Any cantrdis that are ibt:ated in an accessible room-or. 4 counter on an accessible route.This Is not necessarily along an accessible route that are natintendsd to be utP-•"? intended,to require that multiple lower counter heights sized by the occupants are not required to be acceasi-' ,1 be provided based ori-the different types of services that ale. This would include such controls as thermostats are offered. For example,this is not intended to require that are intended to be ad ustable only by authorited two separate,lower counter heights:one for hotel regis- pef sonnet. Another example would be the controls re tration•and one for Check-out.One lower counter height striated to use by.authorizes! personnel for a public ad- can be provided at which both ftncbons are accom- dress system in a meeting room. plished; In the above described situation, dispersion of the accessible counters would be requited if the coun- 1108.13.1 Operable windows, Where operable windows are, ters thernselves were dispersed in separate looatlons. provided in rooms that art required to be accessible in aceor- ' 1�.32 2000 INTERNATIONAL BUII..t]ING CODEV COMMENTARY ' TOTAL P.65 MARCHAND • JONES ARCHITECTS PO BOX 1198 1763 ROUTE 9 CLIFTON PARK NY 12065 518.383.5561 David Hatin,Director Building and Code Enforcement Town of Queensbury 742 Bay Road Queensbury,NY 12804 May 4,2004 Re:Alterations to District Social Security Administration Office 17 Cronin Road,Queensbury,NY Dear Mr.Hatin, In reference to your letter dated March 30, 2004 concerning the building permit application for the above referenced project,we offer the following response to the items enumerated: 1. The multi-purpose conference room divider is specified in Section 10650, Operable Partitions, of the Technical specifications. Under paragraph 2.7, we specify a Pass Door located in the center of the parfition with a friction latch and flush pulls for panic operation.The pass door to be 36"wide. ' � S, �` ; �.rS�� !/V_ J 2. Storage Room Plan SKI is attached. 3. Revised Partial Floor Plan SK2 is attached. 4. Platform is deleted per attached SK4. However, the Social Security Administration is protesting this change based on their conversation with Charles Rush of the NYS Dept. of State Codes Division. Attached is a fax transmission from Mr.Rush. 5. Revised Break Room Cabinet Elevation 1/A8, SK3 is attached. 6. Per the Technical Specifications the following materials are specified: • Operable partition:panel finish to be class"A"fire rated material. Wall covering: Class "A" fire rated; Smoke developed 25; Flame spread 15, Class 1; Fire Propagation Class 0. • Carpet tile:Radiant Panel per ASTM E-648,Class 1; Smoke Density per ASTM E-662,450 or less. • Vinyl Composition Tile: Radiant Panel per ASTM E-648, Class 1; Smoke Density per ASTM E-662, 450 or less. • Ceiling Panels: Class"A"fire rated. • Paint: All paints, stains and varnishes to be water based and, when applied at normal film thickness, will — develop a Class"A"flame spread rating. See attached report from Sherwin-Williams. Sincer y, r Paul Ali ,(&RA 04/22/2004 09:39 518-456-1018 EMCO CONSTRUCTION PAGE 02/02 IffLA 101 Prospect Avenue Imam Cleveland,CH 4411S Emeo Construction 2050 Western Ave GUilderland,NY 12084 Emco Construction- In answer to your request for flame spread information.Most conventional paint systems,when applied at normal film tWokness,will develop a Class A flame spread rating over a non-combustible,previously uncoated substrate.Substrates themselves can contribute significantly to the overall flame spread rating of the substrate and the subsequent coatings,As a guide, the non-combustible substrates; cement, asbestos board and plaster have a flamespread rating of zero.Drywall will contribute to a flame spread by a factor of approxi_materly 10. On a substrate ihat bums readily, such as a wood surface,that has not been treeted to resist burning, standard coatings do nothing to prevent the substrate from burning.Wood will contribute significantly to the flame spread of the coating.Products that we have tested were tested in accordanoe with AS'l`M E94-91a.Products that have not beta tooted are estimated flame spread ratings based on formula similarities to pmdcuts that were tested_ P'RQ=T M TIQN FLAW,SFRFAn gD0XE12 NFyiM ProM"200 Interior Latex Flat Extra White Class A Class A ProNiarg 200 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Extra White Class A Class A WoodClassicag Waterborne Polyurethane Vazmish Gloss Clear Class A Class A (NT) I trust this informatio is satisfactory,and if further information is necessary,please let mo know. Sherwin-Williams Tim Hugen, National Sales Manager (NT)denSdo the product has not been tested,and is an estimated flame xriresd ratite based on formula similari�3tes to u�durts that were tested. tl MI f 1 � rrn "' Un N Q O r� O m m z D� z Lo D3A 15 zrn� D N`6 �A --------- w MIK ED O = IS" Q n z1 0 I s-roRAc� ALTERATIONS TO co STORAGE ROOM PLAN SOCIAL SECURITY ADMINISTRATION MARCHAND • JONES ARCHITECTS j g o DISTRICT OFFICE, 17 CRONI N ROAD pO BOX 1198 • ROUTE 9 • MN pa • NEW YORX 12M • 518 383 5561 OUEENSBURY, NEW YORK E...� w ►� "" N n r• W ' co 0 0 TFF� I A 1'—a' PLEX15LA55 PUSH B ABOVE GOMBI U a = HARD CYi x S MIN. z INTERVIEW R m 105 103 � O 102 102 � O 1 1 O 4'-0" 101 -- MIN. I O �i�' . COPIER � � 0 2 t La y PUSH BUTTON —OFFICE VIEWING COMBINATION ENTRY er HARDWARE SCHEDULE WINDOW - REINSTALL Q SALVAGED UNIT �-- � 0 O m � coo O X W � gauntw mu no mm FEI AR CALLED O❑O ODO 04= ICT MANAGER NORTHi/`E4•=�'-o• 106 ��so, aoo4 MWM NUMM EE a SK2 nl ci ________ _—______ ________ _—___—__ _______ ___ ________ ______—_ ________ ________ _______ ADA COMPLIANT SINK, FAUCET AND INSULATION PER SPEC. 5ECT. 1526OF 67 -------- -------- -------- -------- �`. OPEN Y 10 Vol (n REVISED CABINET ALTERATIONS TO � o Socx mcumy aDmiNum oN MARCHAND • JONES • ARCHITECTS ELEVATION f/N COIN b DISTRICT OWCE,ENSBUR , NEW YO ROAD PO BOX 1198 • WE 9 • CUFfON PARK • NEW YORK 12065 • 518 30 5%1 OUEENSBURY, NEW YORK •a . Q fEl t• � r Z Ill v � m w > D 3 6 3 cl Ornrn 3z >1 (� z )w� ' �N3 cl o r � m > — m N -o 0 �z mm m C F' z r A6 - a O � z � V _ LE 13-5 Li TERA nONS TO cn N SOCIAL SECURITY ADMINSMA11ON MARCHAND • JONES ARCHITECTS N FLOOR PLAN DISTRICT OMC RY N IORK AD PO BOX 1198 • ROUM 9 • WHON PARK • NEW YORK 12M • 518 M 5561 $ OUEENSBU , MARCHAN-D -,, , ONES ARCHIT `EC'T .S y PO :BOX 1198 1 763 ROUTE 9 CLIFTON.. PARK NY 12065 518.383.5.561 Social Securitv Administration -Alterations to District Office 17 Cronin Road Queensbury,New York March 26,2004 ADDENDUM NO. 1 This addendum contains changes to the requirements of the Contract Documents. These changes are to be. incorporated:into the.Contract Documents and shall apply to the work with the same meaning and force as if it had been included in the original Contract Documents. GENERAL: 1. Electrical,Plumbing and Mechanical:except where,construction drawings show ceiling replacement,each respective Contractor shall provide removal and reinstallation of lay-in ceiling tiles as required for construction.Electrical;Plumbing and Mechanical: except where construction.draaings show ceiling replacement,each respective Contractor shall provide removal and reinstallation of lay-in ceiling tiles as . required for construction. 2. Electrical Contractor to-provide material and labor to pull-all Data and Communications cable.Final connections to be made by others. Contact Bob Guzzo at Creative Communications. tel. 518=782-1300 for additional information. 3. 'Electrical'Contractor to.provide pull for;telephone cable. 4.. Electrical Contractor to make all final connections to energize workstation panels.' _ 5.. For carpet tile information,contact Mark Reynolds at Landmark flooring Concepts.tel. 518-459-3030. CHANGES TO THE DRAWINGS 1. Drawing No.A2: Clarification: VCT flooring.in existing storage room and break room to remain.Remove VCT in.cxisting reception area only. Patch existing concrete floor as required for smooth transition to VCT before installation of carpet.tile. -2. Drawing No.A3: Change new partitions around Mail,Sorting 107 to Type 2A 17 Cronin Road Addendum No. 1 Cont. Page 2 C 3. Drawing No.A3: Change new partitions around District Manager to Type 2 4. Drawing No.A4: Change new partition separating Corridor 110 from Storage 112 to Type IA. 5. Drawing No.A6,Partition Types 1/A6: Delete Type 1 partition as shown. Substitute Type 1 and Type lA as shown on attached ADD 1. Attach gypsum wallboard to bottom chord of existing wood trusses(Storage 112 only)in accordance with the attached Table 719.1(3)from the Building Code of New York State. 6. Drawing No.A6,Partition Types 1/A6: Delete Tv pe 2 partition as shown. Substitute Type 2 and Type 2A as shown on attached ADD2. 7. Drawing No.A6, Section 2/A6: Support head of Operable Partition as shown on attached ADD3. $. Drawing No. E4: Provide single lamp porcelain lamp holders adjacent to Mechanical Unit F-7. Provide located in Utility Room. Label switch plate power wiring back to"house"panel. 4. Drawing No. 112: Change label of F-5 to f-7 and labeling for respective thermostat. CHANGES TO THE SPECIFICATIONS 1. Add Section 01030,ALTERNATES(attached to this addendum). 2. Add Section 01010,ALLOWANCES (attached to this addendum). END OF ADDENDUM Please fax a copy of this page to Marchand Jones Architects( 518 383 5562 1 acknowledging receipt of this addendum: Received by Date 17 Cronin Road ,. SECTION 01020-ALLOWANCES PART 1-- GENERAL t. 1:1 : RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract; including General and Supplementary Conditions,and- other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 121 SUMMARY A., This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances_ B.. Related.Sections: 1. Section 01035"Modification Procedures"contains requirements that,relate to this Section. 1.3 ALLOWANCE NO. 1 A. Include in the Contract a Lump Sum amount.of $11'500:00 for moving furniture, filing. cabinets and equipment as required for construction operations. B: Maintain a complete record of materials used and obtain daily verification from HSBC personnel of all labor expended,in this work. C. The expenditures covered by this Allowance are for materials, equipment rental,. and actual wages plus direct labor costs only. Do not include Contractor's or Subcontractor's.indirect expense. 1.4 CONTRACT SUM ADJUSTMENT. . A. At Project Closeout, submit to the Owner a detailed accounting:of cost incurred under this Allowance. 1. . If.the total amount is greater than the.Lump Sum Allowance, the difference will be added to the. Contract.by Change Order. 2. If the'total-amount is less than the Lump Sum.Allowance; the difference will be credited to the Owner by'Change Order. PART 2- PRODUCTS-(not applicable) PART 3- EXECUTION (not.applicable) END OF SECTION 01020 ALLOWANCES'.. 01020- 1 11 Cronin Road SECTION 01030-ALTERNATES PART 1 -GENERAL: 1.1. RELATED-DOCUMENTS A: Drawings and general provisions rof the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions.and other Division.1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative.and procedural requirements-governing Alternates. 1.3 . DEFINITIONS A: Definition: -An alternate is an amount proposed-by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount,if the Owner decides to.accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed., or in the products, materials,. equipment, systems, or installation methods.described in the Contract Documents: B. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate:the Alternate into the Work.. No other adjustments are made to.the Contract Sum. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: 'Modify or adjust affected.'adjacent Work as necessary to, completely and fully integrate that Work into the Project. B: Include as.part of each alternate, miscellaneous devicesi accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required,for.A.complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Alternate., C: Notification: 1. Immediately-following'the award of the Contract; notify each party.involved, in"writing,.of:: the status.of each alternate: 2, Indicate whether- alternates-. have been accepted;, rejected, or deferred for later, consideration. 3: Include a complete description of-.negotiated modifications to alternates. D. Execute accepted alternates under the'same conditions as other Work of this Contract. E. Schedule: 1. A.''Schedule-of Alternates" is included at the end"of this Section. . 2. Specification. Sections referenced in the Schedule contain-'requirements for materials: necessary to achieve th"e Work-described under each alternate: PART 2- PRODUCTS.-.(Not Applicable) ALTERNATES.. 17 Cronin Road _. PART 3- EXECUTION i 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1 1. Paint walls and all other previously painted surfaces such as doors and frames in the existing front and rear entrance lobbies including connecting corridor and alcoves. 2. Provide new vinyl base in the existing front and rear entrance lobbies including connecting corridor and alcoves. ALTERNATES 01030-2 17 Cronin Road BLOCKING BETWEEN BOTTOM..CHORD5. EXISTING ROOF TRU95 2 LAYERS 5/5".GYM PER TABLE -714.1 (5) BUILDING CODE OF 2'-0" N.T.S. NEW YORK STATE . 5 1/2" SOUND ATTENUATION BATT INSULATION SUSP. CEILING 5/5" GYPSUM WALL- 50ARD EACH SIDE 3-5/8" METAL STUDS.® I6" O.G. EXI5T'G.CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB 1 I TYPE I: A5 SHOWN 51MILAR TO TYPE I DELETE SOUND ATTENUATION GATT INSULATION ADD1 3/26/04 17 CRONIN _ROAD FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED,CONSTRUCTION,• TABLE 719.1(3) TABLE,719.1(3)-(Continued), MINIMUM PROTECTION FOR FLOOR AND ROOF SYSTEMS°.Q ' y. THICKNESS OF FLOOR OR MINIMUM THICKNESS FLOOR OR ROOF. ITEM ROOF SLAB OF CEILING CONSTRUCTION NUMBER CEILING CONSTRUCTION. (Inches) (Inches) 4 3. 2.. 1 . '4,: 3 2 1. { hour, hour hour hour hour hour hour hour 21:Wood joists,floor , trusses and flat or pi tched spaced a maximum trusses s Base layers/g"Type X gypsum wallboard" spaced a maximum_ applied at right angles to joist or truss 24"on 24"on center.with'iZ"- center.with 11/4"Type S or Type W drywall wood structural panels with exterior glue with 24"omcenter.Face layer 5/8"Type-X. applied at right angles gypsum wallboard or veneer base applied at right to top of joist or top 21-1.1 angles to joist or truss through base layer with — — — Varies — — — 11i4 chord of trusses with 17/8"Type S or Type W drywall screws 12"on 8d nails.The wood center at joints,and intermediate joist or thus: structural panel thick.- Face layer Type G drywall screws placed 2"back ness shall not be less on either side of face layer end joints,12"on. than nominal center. 'iZ"less than required by Chapter 23. 22.Steel joists,floor trusses and flat or pitched roof trusses Baselayer s/s"Type X gypsum board'applied at spaced a maximum 24"on center with 2" right angles to steel framing 24"on center with wood structural anels 1"Type S drywall screws spaced 24"on center. with exterior glue Facelayer s%8"Type X gypsum board applied at applied at right angles right angles to steel framing attached through to top of joist or top. 22-1.1 base layer with 15/9"Type S drywall screws 12" — - — Varies — — — 1-1/4 chord of trusses'with on center at end joints and intermediate joints No.8 screws.The and 1'/."Type G drywall screws 12 inches on, wood structural panel. center placed 2"back on either side of face layer thickness shall not be ` end joints.-Joints of the face;layer are offset 24" less than nominal', from the joints of the base layer. or less than required by Chapter 22. (Continued) BUILDING CODE OF NEW YORK STATE 127` a 2'-0" N.T.5. EA 51DE ISI UJm 5USP. CEILING 3 5/&" METAL STUDS ® 16" O.C. 3. [&' SOUND ATTENUATION BATT INSULATION 5/8"' GYPSUM WALL BOARD EACH SIDE EACH SIDE V15T'G CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB Z� TYPE 2: AS SHOWN ® SIMILAR TO TYPE 2 DELETE SOUND. ATTENUATION.GATT INSULATION ADD2 tyro �`3/26/04 17 CRONIN ROAD = EXISTING ROOF TRUSS CONT. 2 X 10 .56 VIA. HANGER RODS BY OPERABLE PARTITION I - I MANUFACTURER ® 24" O.G. I I - SUSPENDED CEILING OPERABLE PARTITION ADD3 3/26/04 17= CRONIN ROAD ti F TOWN OF Q UEENSB URY 742 Bay Road, Queensbury, NY. 12804-5902 May 5, 2004 Hedy DeBoner Social Security Administration Management and Operations Field Services Team Region 2 r 26 Federal Plaza Room 4040 New York, NY 10278 Dear Hedy: Regarding the information you requested, attached please find Code Sections 1104.4 and 1104.5 which requires accessible routes within buildings that have multiple levels, including mezzanines and other floors. It is my understanding that this Section requires that the raised platform area be accessible by occupants�of the Social Security Building. As I stated to you, if the raised platform are a necessity to your operation, then you should fax a copy of these Code Sections as well as a copy of the plans to State Codes Division for an interpretation of these Code Sections to see if the raised platform is, indeed, required to be accessible. I would ask that you kindly copy me on any correspondence you send to Codes Division, so I'm aware of the information being provided to them, if contacted by State Codes Division. If you require any additional information, please don't hesitate to contact me. Sincerely, Town of Quee sbury David Hati , Director Building and Code Enforcement DH/mg L:\Maria\MARIAG\DeBoner.doc §1104 ACCESSIBLE ROUTE §1104.1 Site arrival points. Accessible routes within the site shall be provided from public transportation stops, accessible parking and accessible passenger loading zones, and public streets or sidewalks to the accessible building entrance served. §1104.2 Within a site. At least one accessible route shall connect accessible buildings, accessible facilities, accessible elements, and accessible spaces that are on the same site. EXCEPTION: An accessible route is not required between accessible facilities that have, as the only means of access between them a vehicular way not providing for pedestrian access. §1104.3 Connected spaces. When a building, or portion of a building, is required to be accessible, an accessible route shall be provided to each portion of the building, to accessible building entrances, connecting accessible pedestrian walkways and the public way. Where only one accessible route is provided, the accessible route shall not pass through kitchens, storage rooms, restrooms, closets or similar spaces. EXCEPTION: A single accessible route is permitted. to pass through a kitchen or storage room in an accessible dwelling unit. §1104.4 Multilevel buildings and facilities. At least one accessible route shall connect each accessible level, including mezzanines, in multistory buildings and facilities. EXCEPTIONS: 1. An accessible route is not required to floors above and-below accessible levels that have an aggregate area of not more than 3, 000 square feet (278.7 m2) . This exception shall not apply to: 1.1. Multiple tenant facilities of Group M occupancies containing five or more tenant spaces; 1.2. Levels containing offices of health care providers (Group B or Group I) ; or 1.3. Passenger transportation facilities and airports (Group A-3 or Group B) . 2. In Group A, I, R and S occupancies, levels that do not contain accessible elements or other spaces required by §1107 or §1108 are not required to be served by an accessible route from an accessible level. §1104.5 Location. Accessible routes shall coincide with or be located in the same area as a general circulation path. Where the circulation path is interior, the accessible route shall also be interior. EXCEPTION: Accessible routes from parking garages contained within and serving Type B dwelling units are not required to be interior. TOWN OF QUEENSBURY 742 Bay Road, Queensbury, NY. .12804-5902 March 30, 2004 Paul Marchand 1763 Route 9 P.O. Box 1198 Clifton Park, NY 12065 Dear Paul: Before a building.permit can be issued by this Office, for the renovations to the existing Social Security Building at 17 Cronin Road, the following items must be addressed. 1. The multi-purpose conference room that has a divider in it shows no exit from the north room that would be created by the divider being stretched across the existing room. 2. We need a layout of the storage room if this is to be used for file storage, to assure that it is handicapped accessible. 3. Door 103 does not have a 12 inch clearance on the door handle side of the door for accessibility. 4. The raised platform at the reception area is not allowed unless it is provided with a handicapped ramp at 'a one on twelve pitch, with the appropriate handrails. 5. The conference room sink needs to be handicapped accessible. 6. All interior finishes in this building must be Class B or C finish. There is no note on the plans.regarding flame spread rating for paints and varnishes to be used. Once the above items have been satisfactorily addressed on a set of plans, a building permit will be issued. Sincerely, T of Queen ury David Hatin, irector Building and Code Enforcement DH/mg L:\Maria\MARIAG \Social.Security.doc 1 DRAFT COPY (3/21/03) . CHECKLIST NYS BUILDING'CODE (BC) Building: NYS FIRE CODE(FC) NYS PLUMBING CODE (PC) Location: NYS MECHANICAL CODE (MC) NYS FUEL GAS CODE (FGC) Date: NYS ENERGY CODE (ECC) Publication Date: May 2002 Reviewer: ok- COMMERCIAL& MULTIPLE DWELLING OCCUPANCIES No. Topic Code Page Required Actual Section No. or Allowed 1 Jurisdiction BC-101.2 1 2 Flood Plain BC-1603.1.E 285 3 Separated or Non-Separated BC-302.3 18 Occupancies* 4 Occupancy BC-302 17 T 5 Type of Construction BC-Table 601 81 6 No. of Sleeping Units/Level BC-202 14& No. of Units-Total 31 No. of Occupants BC-Table 1003.2.2.2 201 7 Covered Malls BC-402 33 Hi-Rise (75'Rule) BC403 36- Atriums BG-404 37 8 Basement Definition BC-502.1 71 (See page 8 of this check list) Legend: NR= Not Required NS = Not Shown NA= Not Applicable Ado J/ U A �r CA,!e es �(JdL+- � �vY rGlOi� lil6lJl Note: Non-separate K�upancies impos the most restrictive requirements JAM Page 1 of 10 No. Topic Code Page Required Actual Section No. or Allowed 9. Heights & Building Areas Maximum Tabular Area BC-Table 503 72 Maximum Tabular Height BC-Table 503 72 Maximum Stories BC-Table 503 72 Mezzanines BC-505 73 10. Sprinkler System (water) BC-903 168 Basement Sprinkler BC-903.2.10.1 170 Water Source Sprinkler BC-903.3.5 172 Water Source Site FC-508.1 31 11. Frontage&SRrinkler Credits Area Modifications (ca/c.) BC-506 74 Height Modifications BC-504 73 12. Height&Area Summary: Ht/Area Ht/Area Tabular Area BC-Table 503 72 Frontage Credit BC-506 74 Sprinkler Credit BC-506.3 75 Total Allowable Area Max Aggregate Area BC-503.3 73 (Allowable Area/Fir. x No. of Stories up to 3 maximum) 13. Fire Apparatus Road FC-503.1 29 (150' rule) �, „� Q FC S®E.S" 31 14. Exterior Walls Distance Separation* BC-Table 602 82 Exterior Wall Openings BC-Table 704.8 87 Parapets BC-704.11 88 Exterior Wall Coverings' BC-Table 1405.2 257 Exterior Wall Finishes BC-Table 1406.2 261 Combustible *Distance separations are doubled if fire fighting water-is not available (FC-508.1.3). NOTES; JAM Page 2 of 10 No. Topic Code Page Required Actual Section No. or Allowed 15. Fire Rated Construction lncider)tal Use Areas BC-Table 302.1.1 17 Accessory Occupancy BC-302.2 18 4 K_ Mixed Occupancy :BC-Table 302.3.3 19 Control Areas BC-414.2 52 Fire Walls BC-705 89 Fire Barrier BC-706 91 Shaft Enclosure BC-707 92 Fire Partition (Tenant Sep.) BC-708 95 Smoke Barriers BC-709 96 Opening Protectives BC Table 714.2 101 Fire Blocking BC-716 107 Draft Stonpping BC-716.3 108 16. Space ttr ces.$-CA- wi �C- /ZOB 25� Min. Rm. Dimensions '�r�' BC-1207.1 251 rr�� Min. Ceiling Height BC-1207.2 251 17. Ventilation (Nat. or Mech.) BC-1202.1 249 18. Light(Nat. or Mech.) BC-1204.1 250 19. Exits Remo"e0 Occupancy Load BC Table 1003.2.2.2 201 One Exit Permitted BC Table1005.2.2 224 Stair Enclosure BC-1005.12 224 Emergency Egress BC-1009.1 235 Distance of Travel BC-Table 1-004.2.4 .220 Aisle Width BC-1004.3.1.1 221 Corridor Width BC-1004.3.2.2 221 i r �03 c�Q afi G Capacity of Exits (calc.). BC-Table 1003.2.3 202 Corridor Wall Fire Rating BC-Table1004.3.2.1 222 c Corridor Dead End BC-1004.3.2.3 222 Door Width BC-1 003.3.1.1 208 Door Swing BC-1003.3.1.2 208 Panic Hardware BC-1003.3.1.9 213 20. Stairs Riser BC-1003.3.3.3 213 Tread BC-1003.3.3.3 213 Width BC-1003.3.3.1 213 Headroom BC-1003.3.3.2 213 Vertical Rise BC-1003.3.3.E 215 Handrails BC-1003.3.3.11 215 Gv s U 16D3;3,2.iz- ,tar l��u �iSe /2 � ( �3 8C /cK�3.3,3(o ars JAM Page 3 of 10 No Topic Code Page Required Actual Section No. or Allowed 21. Structural Snow, oading—Ground BC Fig 1608.2 296 Snow Loading—Roof(cafe.) ASCE 7-98 Drifting Snow BC-1608.7 295 Ponding BC-1608.3.5 295 Floor Loading BC Table 1607.1 291 Balcony Loading BC-Table 1607.1 291 Wind Loading (talc.) BC-1609 297 Roof Walls Windows Seismic Loading (talc.) BC-1614 315 Foundation Depth BC-1805.2 398 . Interior Finishes BC-Table 803.4 161 23. Swimming Pools BC-3109 629 24. Sun Rooms BC Appendix 1 693 25. Electrical Exit Lights or Signs BC-1003.2.10 203 Emergency Lights BC-1003.2.11.2 - 204 Emergency Power BC-2702 611 General Lighting-Exits-Stairs -BC-1003.2.11 204 26. HC ACCESS Exempt Buildings BC-1104.4 238 Parking BC-Table 1106.1 239 Route BC-1104.1 . 238. Entrance BC-1105.1 239 #of Sleeping Rooms BC-Table-1.107.6.1.1 241 #of Dwelling Units BC-1107.6.2 241 Toilet Facilities BC-1109.2 244 Service Counters BC-1109.12.3 246 Areas of Refuge BC-1003.2.13.5 207 Signage Supplemental HC Req'mts Appendix E 681 27. SPECIAL INSPECTIONS BC-1704 379 Notes: Pvosj Pufur" lit c cJ1a Fi TCr �h/�f Jut �ou JAM Page 4 of 10 No. Topic Code Page Required Actual Section No. or Allowed 28. Fire Protection Equipment Centrjl Station Monitoring FC-901.9 52 Sprinkler Systems FC-903 55 Other Extingushing Syst. FC-904 59 Kitchen Hood Extinguisher FC-609.8 41 Standpipe Systems FC-905 62 Fire Extingushers FC-906 64 Fire Alarm Systems &SD FC-907.2 66 Fire Alarm Boxes+7avef FC-907.4.1 -70?.9 72,73 Smoke Detection FC-907.2.10 68 Hi-Rise Fire Safety FC-907.2.12 69 Visible Alarms FC-Table 907.10.1.2 73 Smoke Control FC-909 75 Smoke Vents FC-910 82 Fire Pumps FC-913 . 85 "'�Ser-etiV3 FC-9o�.Z,lu, ► s� 29. Plumbing Code Fixture Count PC-Table 403.1 21 ,jk,,, � �►,., S��t�Si,,* Water Spp1v Service Pipe Size _ PC-603 33 Fixture Pipe Size PC-603.1 33 Pipe Material PC-Table 605.4 36 Labor Law Art. 10-A UFPBC-904.6 12,340 Pipe Insulation See Energy Code Backflow Prevention PC-Table 608.1 41 Sprinkler System PC-608.16.4 44 Lawn Irrigation PC-608.16.5 44 Pipe Freezing PC-305.6 14 Sanitary Drainage Drain Pipe Size PC-Table 709.1 54 Drain Pipe Material PC-702 47 Labor Law Art. 10-A UFPBC-904.6 12,340 Vent Size PC-Table 910.4 63 Pipe Hangers PC-Table 308.5 17 Air Admittance Valves PC-917 67 Notes: JAM Page 5 of 10 No. Topic Code Page Required Actual Section No. or Allowed 30. Mechanical Code Ventilation Rates MC-Table 403.3 24 Propane Below Grade MC-502.8.10.1 31 Dryer Exhaust MC-504' 33 Kitchen Exhaust MC-506 34 Kitchen Hoods MG-507 37 Kitchen Make-Up Air MC-508 39 Chimney Termination MG-Table 511.2 41 Air Plenums MC-602 47 Fire&Smoke Dampers MC-607.5.1 52 Combustion Air MC-701 55 Confined Spaces-Def. MC-202 5 31. Fuel Gas Code Appliance Location FGC-303 18 Combustion Air FGC-304 19 Clearance to Combust. FGC-Table 308.2 25 Pipe Material FGC-403 46. Shut Off Valves FGC-409 53 Chimney Termination FGC-Fig. 503.5.4 63 Gas Vent Termination FGC-Fig. 503.6.6 65 Exit Terminal Location FGC-503.8 68 Clothes Dryer Exhaust FGC-613 96 Unvented Room Heaters FGC-620 99 32. Energy Code Prescriptive Method ECCC-Table 602.1(1) 50 High Truss Credit ECCC-602.1.2 51 Pipe Insulation-Heating ECCC-Table 503.3.3.1 44 Duct Insulation-Heating ECCC=Table 503.3.3.3 45 Pipe Insulation-Hot Water ECCC-Table 504.2 47 HWH Heat Trap ECCC-504.7 47 COMcheck Computer Software Compliance Report Required Notes: e- + SNOW jel� JAM �D �� ,tJ �DCS�D Page 6 of 10 Lij �Lj . O LEI` rn lo lo ------------ N 3 - O. � zz M . LJ c W N n n � z z All coVM REVISED ALTERATIONS To . u ± g `PARTIAL U SOCIAL sEcuRmr ADMINISTRATION MARCHAND JONES ARCHITECTS N b FLOOR PLAN DISTRICT OFFICE, V CRONIN ROAD PO eoz 1.198 .karrE.9 curra+ Pnmc NEVrasac 12065 518 383 5561 OUEENSBURY,-NEW.YORK r' V'c C-•c _ 12' "'MIN CLEAR POR:F -4 URNITURE ELEVATION THRU:PLATFORM oa QccY Z 020 —Cc 71> U� - - - -J - -M W .ELEVATION THRU RAMP a a co in IF . 7777 m„m,u. fr W _ PRO=MUM. • . .. 0403AI .ELEVATION FROM,FEI AREA JUNE 15.'"" MVANG "MOM -SO j 5 rn r. Z x D v pcl z �n CAP DETAIL .ALTERATIONS TO SOCIAL SECUfW ADMINISTRa110N MARCHAND JONES ARCHITECTS � DISTRICT OFFICE 7 C O, 1 R NIN ROAD ., b QUEENSBURY, NEW,YORK . PO eoz 1198 ROUTE 9 WrIO r PARK NEW YORK 12065 518. 3B 5561 i ' TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR: SOCIAL SECURITY ADMINSTRATION ALTERATIONS TO DISTRICT OFFICE - 17 CRONIN ROAD QUEENSBURY, NEW YORK MARCH 18, 2004 MAR 2 3 2004 _ iFB.IdSBURY - BUILDING pi�D - BRED AR A y�l c � a HE StNA", PREPARED BY NLNRCHAND JONES ARCHITECT_S Unauthorized alterations or additions to this document is a violation of Section 7209 of the New York State Education Law TABLE'OF CONTENTS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS TO: SOCIAL SECURITY ADMINISTRATION DISTRICT OFFICE 17 CRONIN ROAD - QUEENSBURY, NEW YORK March 18, 2004 . DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01010 Summary of Work . Section 01035 Modification Procedures Section 01045 Cutting and Patching Section 01300 Submittals Section 01400 Quality Control Section 01421 Reference Standards and Definitions Section 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls _ Section 01631 Substitutions Section 01700 Contract Closeout Section 01740 Warranties DIVISION 2-SITE WORK Section 02070 Selective Demolition —� DIVISION 6-WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06100 Rough Carpentry Section 06402 Interior Architectural Woodwork DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS _ Section 08110 Steel Door Frames Section 08211 Flush Wood Doors Section 08711 Door Hardware Section 08800 Glazing - DIVISION 9-FINISHES Section 09255 Gypsum Board Assemblies - 1 - 17 Cronin Road Section 09511 Acoustical Panel ceilings Section 09681 Carpet Tile Section 09900 Painting Section 09950 Wall Coverings DIVISION 10- SPECIALTIES Section 10650 Operable Partitions DIVISION 15—PLUMBING-Refer to Table of Contents bound with Division 15, Plumbing Sections. DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL-Refer to Table of Contents bound with Division 15, Mechanical Sections. DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL-Refer to Table of Contents bound with Division 16, Electrical Sections. i - I - 2 - 17 Cronin Road SECTION 01010-SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and.Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION A. The Project consists of alterations and addition to the District Office of the Social Security Administration located on 17 Cronin Road in the town of Queensbury, New York. B. The extent of work is shown on the Drawings and in these Specifications 1.3 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. The District Office will remain in operation during the entire construction period. B. Unless otherwise permitted, the Contractor shall carry on all his construction operations during non- - - operating hours and in such a way as to interfere as little as passible with the District Office operations and the work of other contractors. 1.4 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of the building prior to Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not. interfere with completion of the Work. 1. Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 2. A Certificate of Substantial Completion will be executed for each specific portion of the.Work to be j occupied prior to occupancy. i 1.5 PRODUCTS PURCHASED BY THE OWNER _ A. Furniture systems indicated on the drawings will be ordered by the Owner and will be fumished and installed by others. The Contractor is responsible for: a. Coordinating with the Owner deliveries to avoid delays in construction. b. Providing electrical power and provisions for data and communications as indicated on the drawings. -_f C. The cost of equipment, including freight and applicable taxes will be billed directly to and paid for by the owner. SUMMARY OF WORK 01010- 1 L 17 Cronin Road PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01010 i SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-2 17 Cronin Road SECTION 01035 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS. A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY. A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing contract modifications. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Submittals"for requirements for the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Division 1 Section "Product Substitutions" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract. i 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. The Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes,-in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time. 1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: The Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that will require adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. i 1. Proposal requests issued by the Architect are for information only: Do not consider them as an instruction either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 20 days of receipt of a proposal request, submit an estimate of cost necessary to execute the change to the Architect for the Owner's review. a. Include a list of quantities of products required and unit•costs, with the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested,furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable. taxes, delivery charges; equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. C. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work will have on the Contract Time. B. Contractor Initiated Proposals: When latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract,the Contractor may propose changes,by submitting a request for a change to the Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the; proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed -- change on the Contract Sum and Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the'total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested,furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01035- 1 17 Cronin Road 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Comply with requirements in Section "Product Substitutions" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for a product or system specified. 5. The Owner reserves the right to establish the actual quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measurement, or count. 1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: When the Owner and the Contractor disagree on the terms of a Proposal Request, the Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Form G714. The Construction Change Directive instructs the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. The Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of the change in the Work. 2. It also designates the method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. B. Documentation 1. Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 2. After completion of the change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. 1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. Upon the Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, the Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of the Owner and the Contractor on AIA Form G701. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Applicable) -jEND OF SECTION 01035 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01035-2 17 Cronin Road - SECTION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section- 1. Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching i individual parts of the Work. 2. Requirements of this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to Division 15 and Division 16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations. I - 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE f A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Operational and Safety Limitations: 1. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in 1 reducing their capacity to perform as intended. 2. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or-safety. C. Visual Requirements: 1. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. 2. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. 3. Remove and replace construction cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Use materials identical to existing materials. B. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match,existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible if identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used. C. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials. I CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045- 1 17 Cronin Road f PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is to be performed before cutting. B. If unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered,-take corrective action before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: 1. Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. 2. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining - construction. 1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. 2. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. 3. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 4. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. S. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a Carborundum saw or a diamond-core drill. 6. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections where cutting and patching requires excavating and backfilling. 7. Comply with requirements of applicable Sections of Divisions 15 and 16 for bypassing, cutting, and - capping of conduit and piping. C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances. 1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation. 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Where removal of walls or partitions extends one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. I a. Provide an even surface of uniform color and appearance. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045-2 17 Cronin Road I b. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. 4. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch after the area has received primer and second coat. 5. Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. B. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. C. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. D. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. END OF SECTION 01045 _l CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045-3 17 Cronin Road SECTION 01300-SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings.and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of the Work-, including the following: 1. Shop Drawings. 2. Product Data. 3. Samples. B. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division 1 Sections and other Contract Documents for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Permits. 2. Insurance certificates. 3. List of subcontractors. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: f1. Division 1 Section "Quality Control" specifies requirements for submittal of inspection and test _ reports. 2. Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout" specifies requirements for submittal of Project Record Documents and warranties at project closeout. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: j 1. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 2. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay... 3. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. . 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. The Architect reserves the right'to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until all related submittals are received. 5. Processing: To avoid delay in installation as a result of the time required to process submittals, - allow sufficient time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals. a. Allow 2 weeks for initial review. Allow additional time if the Architect must delay processing to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. b. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial submittal. c., Allow 2 weeks for reprocessing each submittal.. SUBMITTALS 01300-1 17 Cronin Road d. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing. B. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block. 1. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on the label or beside the title block on Shop Drawings to record the Contractor's review and approval markings and the action taken. 2. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken. a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of the Architect. d. Name and address of the Contractor. e. Name and address of the subcontractor. f. Name and address of the supplier. g. Name of the manufacturer. h. Number and.title of appropriate Specification Section. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. C. Submittal Transmittal: 1. Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. 2. Transmit each submittal from the Contractor to the Architect using a transmittal form. 3. The Architect will not accept submittals received from sources other than the Contractor. 4. On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including variations and limitations. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale. 1. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. 2. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop- Drawings. 3. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not a Shop Drawing. B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information: 1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number. 3. Compliance with specified standards. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 6. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-112 by 11 inches but no larger than 36 by 48 inches. 7. Initial Submittal: a. Submit one correctable, translucent, reproducible print and two blue- or black-line print for the Architect's review. b. The Architect will return the reproducible print. 8. Final Submittal a. Submit one correctable, translucent, reproducible print and two blue- or black-line print for the Architect's review. SUBMITTALS 01300-2 17 Cronin Road b. The Architect will return the reproducible print. C. Distribute prints made from the reproducible to all entities concerned, including one for the - Job Site. d. Retain 2 additional prints where required for maintenance manuals. 9. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken. 1.5 PRODUCT DATA A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. B. Product Data includes printed information, such,as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams, and performance curves. 1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes information on several products that are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information: a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations. b.. Compliance with trade association standards. c.-. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. d. Application of testing agency labels and seals. e.- Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. f. Notation of coordination requirements. 2. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has been confirmed. 3. Submittals: J a. Submit 5 copies of each required submittal. b. Submit 6 copies where required for maintenance manuals. C. The Architect.will retain one and will return the others marked with action taken and corrections or modifications required. I 4. Distribution: - Furnish copies of final ' submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, -- manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction activities. Show i distribution on transmittal forms. a. Do not proceed with.installation until a copy of Product Data is in the Installer's possession. `j b. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction. i I 1.6 SAMPLES i A. Submit full-size, fully fabricated.Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the material or product proposed. B. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color,texture, and pattern. C. Mount or display Samples in the manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated. D. Prepare Samples to include the following: 1. Specification Section number and reference. 2. Generic description of the Sample. SUBMITTALS 01300-3 - 17 Cronin Road 3. Sample source. 4. Product name or name of the manufacturer. 5. Compliance with recognized standards. 6. Availability and delivery time. E. Submit Samples for review of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture. Submit Samples for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the material or product represented, submit at least 3 multiple units that show approximate limits of the variations. 2. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics. 3. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as the Owner's property, are the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site prior to Substantial Completion. F. Preliminary Submittals: 1. Submit a full set of choices where Samples are submitted for selection of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices. 2. The Architect will review and return preliminary submittals with the Architect's notation, indicating selection and other action. 3. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed,the submittal may serve as the final submittal. G. Final Submittals: 1. Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and similar characteristics, submit 3 sets. 2. The Architect will return two sets marked with the action taken. 3. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout the course of construction. H. Distribution of Samples: 1. Prepare and distribute additional sets to subcontractors, manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers, installers, and others as required for performance of the Work. 2. Show distribution on transmittal forms. I. Field samples are full-size examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish materials and to establish the Project standard. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE SUBMITTALS A. Submit quality-control submittals, including design data, certifications, manufacturer's instructions, manufacturer's field reports, and other quality-control submittals as required under other Sections of the Specifications. B. Certifications: 1. Where other Sections of the Specifications require certification that a product, material, or installation complies with specified requirements, submit a notarized certification from the manufacturer certifying compliance with specified requirements. 2. Signature: Certification shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of the company. SUBMITTALS 01300-4 17 Cronin Road 1.8 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Except for submittals for the record or information, where no action and return is required, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly. B. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility. C. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform, action stamp. The Architect will mark the stamp appropriately to indicate the action taken. D. Other Action: Where a submittal is for information or record purposes or special processing or other activity,the Architect will return the submittal marked "Action Not Required." PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01300 f SUBMITTALS 01300-5 17 Cronin Road SECTION 01400=QUALITY CONTROL PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and.general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other.Division 1-Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative'and procedural requirements for quality-control services. B. Quality-control services include inspections,tests, and related actions, including reports, performed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. They do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements. . D. Requirements of this Section relate to.customized fabrication and.installation procedures, not production of standard products. 1. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified inspections, tests, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements. - 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Retesting: a. The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of inspections, tests, or other quality-control services prove .unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test was Contractor's or the Owner's responsibility. - b. The cost of retesting construction, revised or replaced by the Contractor, is the Contractor's responsibility where required tests. performed on original construction indicated noncompliance with Contract Document requirements. 4 B. Associated Services: 1. Coo erate.with agencies Peformin9.required inspections, tests, and similar services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. 2. Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. 3. Auxiliary services required include, but are not limited to,the following: QUALITY CONTROL 01400- 1 17 Cronin Road a. Provide access to the Work. b. Furnish incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests. C. Take adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assist the agency in taking samples. d. Provide facilities for storage and curing of test samples. e. Deliver samples to testing laboratories. f. Provide security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project Site. C. Duties of the Testing Agency: 1. The independent agency engaged to perform inspections, sampling, and testing of materials and construction specified in individual Sections shall cooperate with the Architect and the Contractor in performance of the agency's duties. 2. The testing agency shall provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests. 3. The agency shall notify the Architect and the Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 4. The agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 5. The agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor. D. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. 2. Coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests. 3. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples, and similar activities. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. The independent testing agency shall submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar service to the Architect. B. If the Contractor is responsible for the service, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each - inspection,test, or similar service through the Contractor. 1. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority, when the authority so directs. 2. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test, or similar service include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Date of issue. b. Project title and number. C. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. d. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. e. Names of individuals making the inspection or test. f. Designation of the Work and test method. g. Identification of product and Specification Section. h. Complete inspection or test data. i. Test results and an interpretation of test results. j. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing. k. Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work complies with Contract Document requirements. I. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. M. Recommendations on retesting. QUALITY CONTROL 01400-2 17 Cronin Road PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: 1. Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 2. Comply with Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section"Cutting and Patching." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities, and protect repaired construction. C. Repair and protection is Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection,testing, or similar services. END OF SECTION 01400 _I i I i QUALITY CONTROL 01400-3 17 Cronin Road i SECTION 01421 - REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Indicated": 1. The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings; or to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. 2. Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to help the user locate the reference. Location is not limited. C. "Directed": Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted"mean directed by the Architect, requested by the Architect, and similar phrases. D. "Approved": The term "approved," when used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. E. "Regulations": The term "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": The term "furnish" means to supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": The term "install" describes operations at the Project site including the actual unloading, temporary storage, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. 1. "Installer": 1. An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application, or similar operations. 2. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform. 3. The term "experienced,"when used with the term "installer,"means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with the special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Trades: Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized. individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01421 - 1 17 Cronin Road "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons !, of the corresponding generic name. J. "Project site" is the space available to the Contractor for performing construction activities, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the Project. The extent of the Project site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built. K. "Testing Agencies": A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests. 1.3 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION A. Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the 16- division format and CSI/CSC's"MasterFormat" numbering system. B. Specification Content: These Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: a. Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. b. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. C. Words implied, but not stated, shall be interpolated as the sense requires. d. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. a. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. b. At certain locations in the Section Text, subjective language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor or by others when so noted. C. The words "shall," "shall be," or"shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 1.4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents. C. Conflicting Requirements: 1. Where compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. 2. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. D. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01421 -2 17 Cronin Road 1. The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. 2. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. 3. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate,for the context of the requirements. 4. Refer uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. E. Copies of Standards: -- 1. Each entity engaged in construction on the Project must be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. 2. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 3. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source and make them available on request. F. Abbreviations and Names: 1. Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. 2. Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in the Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards-producing organization, authorities having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the text provision. 3. Refer to Gale Research's "Encyclopedia of.Associations" or Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S.,"which are available in most libraries. 1.5 GOVERNING REGULATIONS/AUTHORITIES -- A. Obtain copies of regulations, interpretations, and other information directly from authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, - certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices; receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01421 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01421 -3 17 Cronin Road f � I SECTION 01500-CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS. PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for construction facilities and temporary controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection. B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Water service and distribution. 2. Temporary electric power and light. C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Temporary dust partitions. 2. Waste disposal services. 3. Rodent and pest control. 4. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities. D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Temporary fire protection. 2. Barricades, warning signs, and lights. 3. Environmental protection. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Building code requirements. 2. Health and safety regulations. 3. Utility company regulations. 4. Police,fire department, and rescue squad rules. 5. Environmental protection regulations. B. Standards: _ 1. Comply with NFPA 241 Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations," ANSI A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition," and NECA Electrical Design Library"Temporary Electrical Facilities." 2. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with NFPA 70"National Electric Code." C. Inspections: CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500- 1 17 Cronin Road 1. Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. 2. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditions of Use: 1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. 2. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. 3. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress. 4. Take necessary fire-prevention measures. 5. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on-site. _ I PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: 1. Provide new materials. 2. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition. 3. Provide materials suitable for use intended. B. Lumber and Plywood: 1. Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry." 2. For fences and vision barriers, provide minimum 3/8-inch-thick exterior plywood. 3. For safety barriers, sidewalk bridges, and similar uses, provide minimum 5/8-inch- thick exterior plywood. 4. For temporary enclosures and dust partitions, provide 2 x 4 studs @ 24" o.c. and minimum 1/2" thick CDX plywood 4'-0" high. Above the plywood, provide translucent nylon reinforced laminated polyethylene or polyvinyl chloride fire retardant tarpaulins. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. General: 1. Provide new equipment. 2. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition. 3. Provide equipment suitable for use intended. B. Electrical Outlets: 1. Provide properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 120-Volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. - 2. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot — light for connection of power tools and equipment. C. Electrical Power Cords: 1. Provide grounded extension cords. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500'-2 17 Cronin Road 2. Use hard-service cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic. 3. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. 4. Do not exceed safe length-voltage ratio. D. Tarpaulins: 1. Provide waterproof, fire-resistant, UL-labeled tarpaulins with flame-spread rating of 15 or less. 2. For temporary enclosures, provide translucent, nylon-reinforced; _laminated polyethylene or polyvinyl chloride,fire-retardant tarpaulins. E. Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities. F. First Aid Supplies: Comply with governing regulations. G. Fire Extinguishers: 1. Provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class A fire extinguishers for temporary offices and similar spaces. 2. In other locations, provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class ABC, dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for the exposures.- 3. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. 1. Locate facilities where.they will serve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance.of the Work and with Bank operations.. 2. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. i 1. Maintain and modify as required. 2. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove prior to Substantial Completion. B. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: 1. For temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with construction activities included under individual Sections, comply with dewatering, requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections. 2. Where feasible, utilize the same facilities. 3. Maintain the site, excavations, and constructionftee of water. C. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction; in progress and completed,from exposure,foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. CONSTRUCTION.FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-3 17 Cronin Road _i 1. Where heat is needed and the permanent building enclosure is not complete, provide temporary enclosures where there is no other provision for containment of heat. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects. - 2. Install tarpaulins securely,with incombustible wood framing and other materials. Close openings of 25 sq. ft.or less with plywood or similar materials. 3. Close openings through floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with load-bearing,wood-framed construction. ! 4. Where temporary wood or plywood enclosure exceeds 100 sq. ft. in area, use UL-labeled, fire- retardant-treated material for framing and main sheathing. D. Sanitary facilities include temporary toilets,wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. 1. Comply with regulations and health codes for the type, number, location, operation, and - maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 2. Install where facilities will best serve the Projects needs. 3. Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. 4. Provide covered waste containers for used material. 5. Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide containerized, tap-dispenser, bottled-water drinking-water units, including paper supply - E. Toilets: 1. Install self-contained toilet units. 2. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. 3. Use of pit-type privies will not be permitted. F. Collection and Disposal of Waste: 1. Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere daily. _ 2. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material and debris. 3. Enforce requirements strictly. 4. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. - 5. Dispose of material lawfully. 3.3 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Temporary Fire Protection: 1. Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire- protection facilities of the types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. 2. Comply with NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers" and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction,Alterations, and Demolition Operations." - 3. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell. 4. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. 5. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants,temporary fire-protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for fighting fires. 6. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas. - 7. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition. B. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erection of structurally adequate barricades. C. Environmental Protection: CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500.-4 17 Cronin Road 1. Provide protection, operate temporary.facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods _ that comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air, waterways, and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted or that other undesirable effects might result. _- 2. Avoid use of tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. 3. Restrict use of noise-making tools and equipment to hours that will, minimize complaints from -, persons or firms near the site. 3.4 OPERATION,TERMINATION,AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: 1. Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. 2. Limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and - abuse. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. C. Termination and Removal: 1. Unless the Architect requests that it be maintained longer, remove each temporary facility when the - need has ended; when replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility,_ or no later than Substantial Completion. 2. -Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of _ interference with the temporary facility. 3. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace .construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 4. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the Contractor's property. 5. At Substantial Completion, clean.and renovate permanent facilities used during the construction period. END OF SECTION 01500 --I E I ' i i f i _ CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-5 17 Cronin Road _1 it SECTION 01631 -SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1.-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and _- other Division 1 Specification'Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY l A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for'handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract. 1.3 PRODUCT SELECTION A. Proprietary Specification Requirements: -Where Specifications name , only a single product or manufacturer, provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. B. Semiproprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name 2 or more products or manufacturers, provide 1 of the products indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. C. Where Specifications specify products or manufacturers by name, accompanied by the term orequal" or "or approved equal," comply with the Contract Document provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. _ D. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use:of a brand or trade name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements. E. Compliance with Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where Specifications only require compliance with an imposed code, standard, or regulation, select a product that complies with the standards, codes, or - regulations specified. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions .in this Article do not change or modify the meaning. of other terms used in the Contract i Documents. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of.construction required by the Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are considered to be _! requests for substitutions. The following are not considered to be requests for substitutions:- - 1. Substitutions requested during the bidding period, and accepted by Addendum prior to award of the Contract, are included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to requirements specified in - this Section for substitutions. 2. Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect. 3. Specified options of products and construction methods included in the Contract Documents. 4. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities. SUBSTITUTIONS 01631 - 1 17 Cronin Road j PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Conditions: After Award of Contract, the Architect will receive and consider the Contractor's request for - substitution when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect. If the following conditions are not satisfied, the Architect will return the requests without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1. Extensive revisions to the Contract Documents are not required. 2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of the Contract Documents. 3. The request is submitted within 15 calendar days after Award of Contract, fully documented, and properly submitted. 4. The Contractor agrees to coordinate the proposed changes with related work and to be responsible for all costs resulting from the proposed changes. 5. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The Architect will not consider the request if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly. 6. The request is directly related to an "or-equal" clause or similar language in the Contract Documents. 7. The requested substitution offers the Owner a substantial advantage, in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities the Owner must assume. The Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the Owner, and similar considerations. 8. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provides the required warranty.B. The Contractor's submittal and the Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples - for construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents do not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor do they constitute approval. PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01631 SUBSTITUTIONS 01631 -2 - 17 Cronin Road k . SECTION 01700.-CONTRACT,CLOSEOUT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.11. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section: 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project record document submittal. 3. Operation and maintenance manual submittal. 4. Submittal of warranties. 5. Final cleaning. B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in -- Divisions 2 through 16. i 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List exceptions in.the request. -- 1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. a. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. b. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete. 2. Advise the Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, maintenance agreements,final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and'similar releases. 5. Submit record drawings and maintenance manuals. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. 7. Complete startup testing of systems and instruction of the Owners operation and maintenance personnel. 8. Discontinue and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleanup requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred,.exposed finishes. B. 'Inspection Procedures: ' 1. On receipt of a request for inspection,the Architect will either proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700- 1 17 Cronin Road 2. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. 3. The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work is substantially complete. 4. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance. 1.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE - A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, complete the following. 1. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously - submitted and accepted. Include insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required. - 2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum. 3. Submit a certified copy of the Architect's inspection list of items to be completed or corrected. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.B. Reinspection Procedure: The Architect will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except for items whose completion is delayed under circumstances acceptable to the Architect. 1. Upon completion of reinspection,the Architect will prepare a certificate of final acceptance. 2. if the Work is incomplete, the Architect will advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance. - 3. If necessary, reinspection will be repeated. 1.5 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. 2. Protect record documents from deterioration and loss in a secure,fire-resistant location. 3. Provide access to record documents for the Architect's reference during normal working hours. B. Record Drawings: 1. Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 2. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. 3. Mark which drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately. 4. Where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. 5. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. 6. Provide 2 complete sets of reproducible Record Drawings, with all changes and deviations from the Contract Documents outline and noted"As Built". 7. Note related change-order numbers where applicable. C. Maintenance Manuals: - 1. Organize operation and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. CONTRACT 'RA T CLOSEOUT 01700-2 17 Cronin Road i r-, 2. Bind, properly indexed data in individual, heavy-duty, 2-inch, 3-ring, vinyl-covered binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. 3. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. 4. Include the following types of information: - a. Emergency instructions. b. Spare parts list. C. Copies of warranties. d. . Wiring diagrams. -- e. Recommended "tum-around" cycles. f. Inspection procedures. g. Shop Drawings and Product Data. h. Fixture lamping schedule. i PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) i PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Operation and Maintenance Instructions: 1. Arrange for each Installer of equipment that requires regular maintenance to meet with the Owner's - personnel'to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. 2. Provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives if installers are not experienced in operation - and maintenance procedures. 3. Include a detailed review of the following items: ~ a. Maintenance manuals. b. Record documents. C. Spare parts and materials. I d. Tools. e. Lubricants. f. Fuels. g. Identification systems. h. Control sequences. i. Hazards. j. Cleaning. k. Warranties and bonds. I. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. General: 1. The General Conditions require general cleaning during construction. 2. Regular site cleaning is included in Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary -� Controls." B. Cleaning: 1. Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. 2. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. CONTRACT-CLOSEOUT 01700-3 17 Cronin Road 3. Comply with manufacturers instructions. 4. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion. a. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. b. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. C. Remove glazing compounds and other substances that are noticeable vision-obscuring materials. d. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains,films, and similar foreign substances. f. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Leave concrete floors broom clean. h. Vacuum carpeted surfaces. i. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. j. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. k. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. I. Clean light fixtures and lamps. C. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work during construction. D. Compliance: 1. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. 2. Do not bum waste materials: 3. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owners property. 4. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. 5. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 01700 - I CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-4 17 Cronin Road SECTION 01740-WARRANTIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1'.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,'including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY . A. - This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for warranties required by the Contract Documents,-including.manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout"specifies contract closeout procedures. 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections; for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. 3. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. C. Disclaimers and Limitations: 1. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations,on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products. I 2. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Standard product warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for _ particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner. B. Special warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner. 1.4 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged-warranted construction, remove and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted construction. B. Reinstatement of Warranty: 1. ' When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate.the warranty by written endorsement. 2. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for I � depreciation. C. Replacement Cost: WARRANTIES 01740- 1 17 Cronin Road i 1. Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. D. Owner's Recourse: 1. Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies,otherwise available under the law. 2. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. 3. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selection to _ products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. E. Where the Contract Documents require a special warranty, or similar commitment on the Work or part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work, until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. Prepare warranties on the Contractor's letterhead in accordance with the sample form attached. B. If the Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect. i C. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the-Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the - Architect within 15 days of completion of that designated portion of the Work. D. When special warranties are required, prepare a written document utilizing the appropriate form, ready for- execution by the Contractor, orby the Contractor, subcontractor,supplier, or manufacturer. 1. Submit a draft to the Owner, through the Architect,for approval prior to final execution. 2. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01740 WARRANTIES 01740-2 17 Cronin Road i CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY PROJECT OWNER CONTRACTOR CONTRACT DATED STATE OF COUNTY OF being duly swom, says: 1. That he resides at 2. That he is of (Title) (Name of Company) 3. That in this capacity he knows the terms of the above contract; 4. That under the terms of the Contract and all Change Orders thereto, he warrants that all work has been accomplished in accordance with the Contract Documents, and that such work is free of defective workmanship and materials; 5. That under the terms of the Contract, he agrees to repair at his own cost and expense all work that may prove defective within a period of one year from 19 ; 6. That he will pay the cost of repairs of all damage to other work resulting from defects in his work, as well as the cost of replacing other work that the Contractor disturbs in making good defects in his own work; 7. That he agrees remedy defects promptly upon notice by the Owner, with the understanding that all corrective work shall be done at the convenience of the Owner. Contractor *By Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 19 (Notary Public) *A principal officer, if a corporation; a partner, if a partnership; the proprietor, if a sole ownership. WARRANTIES 01740- 3 17 Cronin Road SECTION 02070'-SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions_ and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: j 1. Demolition, removal, and subsequent offsite disposal of selected portions of a building indicated on the Drawings and as required.to accommodate new construction. - 2. Selective removal, storage, and subsequent re-installation of items indicated on the Drawings. B. Related Sections: 1. Renovation construction work and patching are included within the respective sections of specifications. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions .of the Contract and Division 1. ! Specification Sections, for information only, unless otherwise indicated. B. Proposed dust-control measures. C. Proposed noise-control measures., D. Schedule of selective demolition activities indicating the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. - 2. Interruption of utility services. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4.' Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy .of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. 5. Locations of temporary partitions and means of egress. E. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. - F. Record drawings at Project closeout according to Division 1 Section"Contract Closeout." 1. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE i SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070- 1 17 Cronin Road A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Engage an experienced firm that has successfully completed selective j demolition Work similar to that indicated for this Project. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before starting selective demolition. 2. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of buildings to be selectively demolished. B. Protections: Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection as indicated in Part 3 of this Section. C. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted. D. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work. L_ E. Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. F. Maintain fire protection services during selective demolition operations. G. Environmental Controls: Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. 1.6 SCHEDULING A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on-site operations. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Existing Special Warranty: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials. 1. Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials. PART EXECU TION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-2 17 Cronin Road I I i -! B. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with the intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of the conflict. Promptly submit a written report to the Architect. . C. Survey the condition of the building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural — deficiency. or unplanned collapse of any portion of.the structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition. D. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect-hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES A. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities, except when authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2.- Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to -- governing,authorities. 3. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during - changeover. B. Utility Requirements: 1. Refer to Division 15 and .16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and sealing or - capping utility services. 2. Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing. 3.3 PREPARATION - A. Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition operations. B. Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. i 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or.other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. .2. -Provide alternate .routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing - regulations. - C. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area. 1. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain and are exposed during selective demolition operations. 3. Cover and protect furniture,furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. - D. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. 1. Construct dustproof partitions of not less than nominal 4-inch studs, 5/8-inch gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and 1/2-inch fire-retardant plywood on the demolition side. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-3 T 17 Cronin Road r- 2. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors.- 3. Protect air-handling equipment. E. Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent movement,settlement, or collapse of building to be selectively demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Use water mist,temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the spread of dust and dirt. 1. Comply with governing environmental protection regulations. 2. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution. B. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Retum adjacent areas to condition existing before start of selective demolition. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. B. Use methods required to complete Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically,from higher to lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb,square, and true to dimensions required. a. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. b. To minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. c. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Flame cutting is not permitted. 5. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly - dispose of off-site. 6. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 7. Locate selective demolition equipment throughout the structure and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 8. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. On-site storage or sale of removed items is prohibited. - 9. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing before start of selective demolition operations. — C. Demolish,concrete and masonry in small sections. 1. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven masonry saw or hand tools. 2. Do not use power-driven impact tools. - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION __ 02070-4 17 Cronin Road 3.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS A. Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to adjacent construction by selective demolition operations. B. Patching is specified in Division 1 Section"Cutting and Patching." C. Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials. D. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining construction to remain in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing. E. Patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space where demolished walls or partitions extend one finished area into another. Provide a flush and even surface of uniform color and appearance. 1. Closely match texture and finish of existing adjacent surface. 2. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances. 3. Where patching smooth painted surfaces, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch after the surface has received primer and second coat. 4. Inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation,where feasible. 3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: _ 1. Promptly dispose of demolished materials. 2. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 3. Burning of demolished materials on-site is not permitted. B. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.8 CLEANING A. Sweep the areas of Selective Demolition broom clean on completion of selective demolition operation. B. Change filters on air-handling equipment on completion of selective demolition operations. END OF SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-5 17 Cronin Road SECTION 06100- ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood furring, grounds, nailers, and blocking. 2. Wood framing. 3. Plywood sub-floor. 4. Steel support angles for low partitions. _ ! 5. Plywood sheathing for low partition 6. Taping and finishing plywood joints. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according,to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for the following products: 1. Taping and finishing materials. 2. Fire-retardant treatment materials. i 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility for Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Obtain each type of fire-retardant-treated wood product from one source and by a single producer J 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Keep materials under cover and dry. - I B. Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. C. Stack lumber and provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.. D. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterbome chemicals, place spacers between each _ bundle to provide air circulation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ROUGH CARPENTRY . 06100- 1 - = 17 Cronin Road A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, Interior Type: a. Baxter: J. H. Baxter Co. b. Chemical Specialties, Inc. C. Continental Wood Preservers, Inc. d. Hickson Corp. e. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc 2.2 LUMBER, GENERAL A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review. B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NELMA- Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NLGA- National Lumber Grades Authority (Canadian). 3. RIS-Redwood Inspection Service. 4. SPIB-Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB-West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association. C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency -- evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. D. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated,they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. - 1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. - 2. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. 3. E. Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER i A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including bucks, hailers, - blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar members. B. Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the ALSC National Grading Rule (NGR) provisions of the inspection agency indicated. C. Provide No. 3 or Standard grade lumber of any species: D. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown. E. Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. — 2.4 PLYWOOD SHEATHING ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-2 17 Cronin Road r A. Provide fire-retardant treated plywood panels with grade designation APA A-C, in thickness indicated.on the Drawings. B. Joint Finishing Materials: 1. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the recommendations of both the manufacturers of panel products and of joint treatment materials for the application indicated. 2. Joint Tape: As recommended by the tape manufacturer for the application indicated. 3. Drying-Type Joint Compounds: . Factory-packaged vinyl-based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. a. Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product. - b. - Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and face flanges.of trim accessories. C. Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: 1. Nails,Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105. 2. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. 3. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. -' 4. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. 5. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated,flat washers. B. Support Angles: Rolled shapes ASTM A36. - PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry and that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb,true to line, cut, and fitted. C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction. 1. Scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. - 2. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated; complying with the following: --, 1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven staples, P-nails, and allied fasteners. 2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. 3. "Table 2305.2--Fastening Schedule" of the BOCA National Building Code. - E. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-3 17 Cronin Road F. Make tight connections between members. 1. Install fasteners without splitting wood. 2. Predrill as required. 3.2 PLYWOOD SHEATHING A. Screw attach panels to framing. B. Set screws deep enough to allow surface to be filled smooth C. Butt joints tightly over studs. 3.3 FINISHING OF PLYWOOD JOINTS I- A. Apply joint treatment at plywood joints, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare work for decoration.B. Apply joint tape at joints between plywood panels. C. Prefill open joints,fastener heads, and other depressions. D. Finish joints by applying the specified joint compounds in 3 coats, (not including prefill), and sand between coats and after last coat. -- 3.4 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS,AND BLOCKING A. Install wood grounds, nailers, and blocking where shown and where required for screeding or attaching - other work. 1. Form to shapes shown and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. 2. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach to substrates to support applied loading. C. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION 06100 I ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-4 17 Cronin Road — SECTION 06402- INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior standing and running trim. 2. Plastic-Laminate countertops. -1 3. Cabinets. 4. Shelving. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section 'Rough Carpentry"for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 2.. Division 9 Section "Painting"for field finishing of interior architectural woodwork. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories, and finishing materials and processes. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. C. Samples for Verification: Plastic-laminate-clad panel products, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include .lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 A. Installer Qualifications: _An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402- 1 17.Cronin Road i C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards"for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction,finishes, and other requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent.damage, soilage, and deterioration. - B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. C. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in"Project Conditions"Article. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until temperature and relative humidity are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: 1. Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction,verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. - 3. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Species for-Opaque Finish: Poplar. C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: 1. NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 2. Nominal thickness: 0.050 inches. 3. Manufacturer. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative laminates by Wilsonart International. _ D. Plastic Laminate Cores: Particleboard ANSI A208.1. E. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Solvent-based contact cement, of type recommended by the Plastic Laminate manufacturer for applicable substrates and laminates. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-2 17 Cronin Road - i I 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: 1. Select material,type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. 2. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. 3. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. 2.3 .FABRICATION, GENERAL . A. Interior Woodwork: Provide interior woodwork complying with AWI Quality Standards, Custom grade. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. 9 C. Complete fabrication, including assembly,to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. 1. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. t 2. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing,trimming, and,fitting. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 4. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. 2.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300. B. Grade: Custom. C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. 2.5 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for high-pressure decorative laminate countertops. B. Grade: Custom. C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS . D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected from manufacturer's full range of available selections. E. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces . F. Core Material: Particleboard. 1 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-3 17 Cronin Road i i PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average'prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved. B. Install woodwork level, plumb,true, and straight. { 1. Shim as required with concealed shims. 2. Install level and plumb(including tops)to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. 1. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. 2. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with - woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. E. Standing and Running Trim: 1. Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available)to greatest extent possible. 2. Do not use pieces less than 60 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. 3. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 4. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches. F. Counters: 1. Support counters as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Install counters with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. .. 4. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant. specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." G. Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before installation of woodwork.H. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK .. 06402-4 17 Cronin Road 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible,to eliminate functional and visual defects. 1. Where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. 2. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore. damaged or soiled areas. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner that ensures is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 06402 i I 1 _J J INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-5 17 Cronin Road SECTION 08110-STEEL DOOR FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes interior steel door frames. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 . _! Specification Sections. -� B. Product Data for each type of door frame specified, including details of construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, profiles, and finishes. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide door frames complying with ANSI/SDI 100 "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" and as specified. —i 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE, AND HANDLING I A. Deliver frames cardboard-wrapped-or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. B. Inspect frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect;,otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. C. Store door frames at building site under cover. - 1. Place units on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. 2. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS f A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Steel Door Frames: 'a. Amweld Building Products, Inc. b. Ceco Door Products. c. Copco Door Co. STEEL DOOR FRAMES ' 08110- 1 17 Cronin Road d. Curries Co. e. Fenestra Corp. f. Kewanee Corp. g. Mesker Door, Inc. h. Pioneer Industries. i. Republic Builders Products. j. Steelcraft. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial-quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 569. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Carbon steel complying with ASTM A 366, commercial quality, or ASTM A 620, drawing quality, special killed.C. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.0478-inch-thick steel sheet. D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. 2.3 FRAMES A. Provide metal frames for doors, according to ANSI/SDI 100, and of types and styles as shown on Drawings and schedules. 1. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fabricate interior frames of minimum 0.0478-inch-thick cold-rolled steel sheet,factory primed. 3. Fabricate all frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded comers. Knockdown frames will not be allowed. B. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of _ single-door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double-door frames. C. Plaster Guards: Provide minimum 0.0179-inch- thick steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off - interior of openings. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Fabricate steel door frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or buckle. 2. Comply with ANSI/SDI 100 requirements. B. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117"Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames." C. Hardware Preparation: 1. Prepare frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. 2. Comply with applicable requirements of SDI 107 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. 3. Reinforce door frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface- applied hardware may be done at Project site. -- STEEL DOOR FRAMES 08110-2 17 Cronin Road 4. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to the Door and Hardware.Institute's (DHI) "Recommended Locations for.Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel - Doors and Frames." 2.5 FINISHES,GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's"Metal Finishes Manual"for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. B. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1,"for steel sheet finishes. C. Apply primers to frames after fabrication. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install steel door frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified. i B. Placing Frames: 1. Comply with provisions of SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. _ 1 2. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. 3. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 4. Place frames before constructing enclosing walls. i END OF SECTION 08110 i i i i STEEL DOOR FRAMES 08110-3 - 17 Cronin Road SECTION 08211 -FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2.. Solid-core doors with plastic-laminate faces. - 3. Shop priming flush wood doors. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork"for wood door frames,and trim. 2. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork"for wood door frames. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product'Data: For each type of door, include details of core and edge construction. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate location, size, and hand of each.door. _ 2. Show elevation of each kind of door. 3. Show construction details not covered in Product Data. C. Samples for Verification: As follows: 1. Comer sections of doors approximately 8 by 10 inches with door faces and edgings. 2. Comer sections of plastic-laminate-dad doors, 8 by 10 inches, for each color, texture, and pattern selected. } 1.4, QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Quality Standard: Comply with the following standard: 1. AWI Quality Standard: AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grade of door, core, construction, finish, and other requirements. C. Fire-Rated Wood.Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing P 9 9 Y P according to NFPA 252. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1 17 Cronin Road r- 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect doors during transit,storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. B. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. C. Individually package doors in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. t individual opening numbers used on Shop Drawings. Use removable tags or D. Mark each door with p g P 9 concealed markings.. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during the - remainder of the construction period to comply with requirements of the AWI quality.standard for Project's geographical location. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Door manufacturer's warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.B. Door Manufacturers Warranty: 1. Submit written agreement on door manufacturers standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace doors that develop the following defects during the Warranty period: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding tolerances in the AWI quality standard. 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time after the date of Substantial Completion: i a. Solid-Core Exterior Doors: Two years. b. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS - 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Flush Wood Doors: a. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. b. Eggers Industries;Architectural Door Division. C. Weyerhaeuser Co. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -2 17 Cronin Road � i -:' 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL ,A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Comply with the.following requirements: 1. AWI Grade: Custom. - 2. Faces: Any closed-grain hardwood of mill option. 3 2.3 SOLID-CORE DOORS A. Particleboard Cores: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking at particleboard-core doors as follows: a. 5-inch top-rail blocking, at doors indicated to have closers. b. 5-inch bottom-rail blocking;at doors indicated to have kick plates. c. 5-inch midrail blocking-, at doors indicated to have exit devices. B. Fire-Rated Doors: Comply with the following requirements: _ 1. Construction: Construction'and core specified above for type of face.indicated or manufacturer's j standard mineral-core construction as required to provide fire rating indicated. 2. Blocking: For mineral-core doors, provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated and as follows: a. 5-inch top-rail blocking. b. 5-inch bottom-rail blocking, at doors indicated to have kick plates. C. 4-1/2-by-1 0-inch lock blocks. . d. 5-inch midrail blocking, at doors indicated to have exit devices. e. As necessary to eliminate need for through-bolting hardware. - 3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide manufacturer's standard laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance and with outer.stile matching face veneer. 2.4 FABRICATION —, A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. 2. Comply with requirements of NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. 1. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. 2. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI Al15-W series standards, and hardware templates. 3. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and j alignment before factory machining. 2.5 SHOP PRIMING FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -3 17 Cronin Road A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime exposed portions of doors for paint finish with one coat of wood primer specified in Division 9 Section 'Painting." PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION i A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. r 3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08211 i I i i FLUSH WOOD DOORS - 08211.-4 17 Cronin Road SECTION 08711 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general`provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Commercial door hardware for swinging doors. - S. Related Sections include the following: -- 1. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames". 2 Division 8 Section "aurninum Entrances and Storefronts" for entrance door hardware, except as noted in this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS I f A. Product data: include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles,and finishes. B. Door Hardware Schedule: 1. . . .Prepared by or under the supervision.of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door- hardware,as well as.procedures and diagrams, 2. Coordinate the final Door lardware Schedule with doors; frames, and related work to ensure proper size,thickness,.hand,function, and finish of door hardware_ 3. Organization: a. Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. b. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of - Part 3: 4. 1 . Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style,function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item, C. Fastenings and other pertinent information. - d. Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced.to Drawings, both on floor plans and- in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g, Door and frame sizes and materials. -- h.. Description of each electrKed door hardware function, including location, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems. 5. Submittal Sequence: DOOR HARDWARE 08711 - 1 17 Cronin Road a. Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is cnTcal in the Project construction schedule. - b. Jnclude Product Data, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. C> Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. D. Qualification Data: 1. For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurances Article. - 2. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified € Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier with warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity and who is or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant, available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor,Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. _ C. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by the Door and Hardware Institute as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consufting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. E. I;tegulafory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following: 1. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)i '.Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (AD.AAG)," ANSI.A117-1; as follows: a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping,tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist. b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements indicated: 1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 Ibf applied perpendicular to door. 2) Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 Ibf applied parallel to door at latch. 3) Fire doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. a Thresholds. Not more than V2 inch high. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. 2. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors: a. Latches,Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key,tool, or special knowledge for operation. - DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -2 17 Cronin Road - I__ b. Door Closers: Not more than 30 Ibf to set door in motion and not more than 15 Ibf to open door to minimum required width. C. Thresholds: Not more than 'U2 inch high. F. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by.a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. S. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and _ include,basic installation instructions with each item or package. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and .installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. - 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shali'not.deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and-shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties'made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special.Warranty: Written warranty,-executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials_ or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include,. but are not limited to,the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware. . 3. Oeterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. - C. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise.indicated. 11 Warranty Period for Manual Closers: 6years from date of Substantial-Compfetion. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Toots and instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed.for Owner's continued adtustment; maintenance;and removal and replacement of door hardware. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -3 17 Cronin Road A: -General: Provide door hardware for each door to-comply with requirements in this Section, and the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.2 HINGES AND PIVOTS A. Manufacturers: Subjectto compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Hinges: a. Hager Companies(HAG). b: McKinney Products Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (MCK). C. Stanfey Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works(SCH). B. Standards: Comply with the following: i. Butts and Hinges: tRMA M66.1. 2. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA Al56.7. C. Template Requirements: Provide only tempfate-produced units. 2.3 LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of SARdENT Manufacturing Company. 2.4 CLOSERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Surface-Mounted Closers:. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(LCN). - 2._ Conceated Closers:`tON C osers :an ingersoii-Rand Company(LCIN). _ 2.5 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation. 2. Bums Manufacturing Incorporated. 3. Glynn-Johnson; an TngersoTf-Rand Company. _ 4. Ives: H. B. Ives. 2.6 THRESHOLDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP). 2. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc..(PEM). 3. Reese Enterprises, Tnc..(RE). 4. Zero lntemationat, Inc. (ZRO). 2.7 FABRICATION — DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -4 1.7 Cronin Road - I A. Base Metals: 1. Produce .door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition,temper, and hardness. 2. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that-of.specified.door hardware .units .and BHMA All 56.18 for finishes. 3. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different,from specified standard. B. Fasteners: T. Provide-door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine,wood, and sheet metal screws. 2. Provide.screws.according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. - 4. Concealed Fasteners: a. For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. b: Do not use through bolts for installation where boft Bead or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. G. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, .provide sleeves for - each through bolt. 5. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications: a. Strike plates io frames. b. Closers to doors and frames. 6. Steei-through Bolts: For the following fire-rated apprcafions, unless door blocking is provided. -J a. Surface hinges to doors. b. Closers to doors and frames- C. Surface-mounted exit devices. 2.8 FINISHES -' A. Provide matching finishes for hardware units at each door or opening, to the greatest extent possible, except as noted otherwise.B. The finish designations used in the hardware Schedule are the industry-recognized standard commercial finishes, except as noted otherwise. C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a,strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.. Examine doors and frames, with installer present, for compliance with requirements-for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. DOOR HARDWARE 0871175 - 17 Cronin.Road I� B_ .Examine roughing-in.for electrical power systems to.verify actual.locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's"Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHl WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural.Hardware for-Wood Hush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Where cutting and fhting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be L_ painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections: Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. _ D. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. 1. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. 3. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: �— 1. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. 2: Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended'. - 3. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take _ at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch,measured to the leading edge.of.1bB door. B. Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer shall perform the following: 1. Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. 2. Consuft with and instruct Owners personnel on recommended maintenance procedures. -3_ Replace door hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of door hardware units. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware instaffation. _ DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -6 17 Cronin Road �- i B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.5 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE , _ A. The following Manufacturers' product designations are used in the Hardware Schedule to designate minimum requirements: 1. Hinges:Stanley 2. Sliding Door hardware: Stanley 3. Locksets and Latchsets: Sargent 10-Line 4. Electric Strikes: Von Duprin 5. Push Button Key Pad: Locknetics 6. Closers: LCN 7. Silencers:Glyn,-Johnson 8. Wall Bumpers: Ives 9. Floor Stops: Ives 10. Push and Kick Plates: Ives B. Provide one complete set of Door Hardware for each door in the following Groups: GROUP Door 101 1 1/2.Pair Hinges FBB179 4Y2 x 4'/2 US 26D 1 Only Lockset 10G37xLLx32D (classroom function) 1 Only Electric Strike 6211 24V DC Continuous Duty Fail Safe US32D 1 Only Push Button Key Pad PRO78+ HW(24V DC) STD 1 Only Closer P1461-3077 Alum 1 Only Floor Stop 435 B26D 2 Only Silencers GJ 64 GROUP.2 Doors 103, 105 1 1/2 Pair Hinges FBB179 4'/z x 4'/z US 26D 1 Only Lockset 10G37xLLx32D (classroom function) 1 Only Electric Strike: Von Duprin 6211 24V DC Continuous Duty Fail Safe U832D 1 Only Push Button Key Pad: .Locknetics PRO78+ HW(24V DC) STD 1 Only Closer P1461-3077 Alum 1 Only Wall Bumper 407 S32D 2 Only Silencers GJ 64 GROUP 3 Doors 102, 106, 107 1 1/2 Pair Hinges FBB179 4Y2 x 4'/2 US.26D 1 Only Lockset 10G05xLLx32D (office function) 1 Only Wall Bumper 407 S32D 1 Only 3 Only Silencers GJ 64 DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -7 17 Cronin Road i GROUP 4 Door110 1 1/2 Pair Hinges FBB179 4'/2 x 4Y2 US 26D 1 Only Lockset 10G37xLLx32D (classroom function) 1 Only Wall Bumper 407 S32D 3 Only Silencers GJ 64 GROUP 5 Door111 1 1/2 Pair Hinges FBB179 4'/2 x 4Y2 US 26D - 1 Only Lockset 10G05xLLx32D (office function) 1 Only Floor Stop 435 B26D 3 Only Silencers GJ 64 GROUP 6 Door 112 1 1/2 Pair Hinges FBB179 4'/2 x 4Y2 US 26D 1 Only Lockset 10G04xLLx32D (storage room function) 1 Only Wall Bumper 407 S32D 3 Only Silencers GJ 64 GROUP 7 Doors 114 1 Only Sliding Door Hardware 40-3856 (Series 1700) END OF SECTION 08711 DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -8 17 Cronin Road SECTION 08800-GLAZING --' PART 1 - GENERAL, 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and.general..provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes, glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in - other Sections-where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Reception Counter Glazing. 2. Door Vision Panels I 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Samples: 1. Submit 12-inch- square Samples for each type of glass indicated and 12-inch- long Samples for sealants. --' 2. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system. C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their I. capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses; names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. D. PreconstrUction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer indicating_ glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE - A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material,.design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record"of -' successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain each type of glass indicated from one primary-glass manufacturer. C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated. ' D. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1. GLAZING 08800- 1 17 Cronin Road i E. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: GANA'S"Glazing Manual" and "Laminated Glass Design Guide." 2. SIGMA Publications: SIGMA TM-3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. f B. For insulating-glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating- glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PRIMARY ANNEALED GLASS A. Annealed Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select), Gass 1 (Clear), Condition A(uncoated surfaces). 2.2 HEAT-TREATED ANNEALED GLASS A. Fabrication Process: By vertical (tong-held) or horizontal (roller-hearth) process, at manufacturer's option, except provide horizontal process where indicated as tongless or free of tong.marks. B. Heat-Treated Annealed Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent glass, flat); Quality q3 (glazing select); class 1 (Clear), Condition A (uncoated surfaces), kind FT(fully tempered). i C. Thickness: as indicated on drawings. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other _ materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing — sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this characteristic. B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied, chemically curing sealant. 2.4 GLAZING TAPES GLAZING 08800-2 17 Cronin Road A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent;.nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod - as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application-indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C'1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 806:3 tape,for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. - 2.5 GLAZING GASKETS. A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to j maintain watertight seal: 1. . EPDM,ASTM C 864. B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned EPDM gaskets complying with ASTM C 509,Type II, black; and of profile.and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide..products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, j requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers,-,and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks:' Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. j E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). - 2.7 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with _- edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product.manufacturer and referenced glazing standard,to comply with system performance requirements. - PART 3-'EXECUTION f 3.1 EXAMINATION _! A. Examine framing glazing,with Installer present,for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at comers. 2. Minimum required face or edge clearances. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. I GLAZING 08800- 3 17 Cronin Road 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Glass Handling: 1. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. _ 2. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. 3. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass-lites. _ G. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows: 1. Locate spacers.directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. 2. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 3. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. 4. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. - I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern,draw,,bow, and similar characteristics. J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. K. Square cut,wedge-shaped gaskets at comers and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal comer joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) GLAZING 08800-4 17 Cronin Road �I L A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at comers. C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place. D. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. 1. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. 2. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. —i 3.5 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep.systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. i 3.6 PROTECTION AND CLEANING f A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. -1 B. Do not apply markers to glass surface. - C. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. f D. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with _i glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. E. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. F. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by . glass manufacturer. -� END OF SECTION 08800 i GLAZING 08800-5 17 Cronin Road SECTION 09255 -GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Nonload-bearing steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies. 2. Gypsum board assemblies attached to steel framing. 3. Sound Attenuation Blankets. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of product specified. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. B. Single-Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other panel products from a single manufacturer. C. Single-Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. C. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. D. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal comer beads and trim. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255- 1 17Cronin Road A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations,whichever are more stringent. B. Room Temperatures: 1. For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F. 2. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F for 48 hours before application and continuously after until dry. 3. Do not exceed 95 deg F when using temporary heat sources. C. Ventilation: 1. Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. 2. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1 Steel Framing and Furring: a. National Gypsum Co.;Gold Bond Building Products Division. b. United States Gypsum Co. 2. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. Domtar Gypsum. b. Georgia-Pacific Corp. C. National Gypsum Co.;Gold Bond Building Products Division. - d. United States Gypsum Co. 3. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Owens Coming. 2.2 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. General: Provide steel framing members complying with the following requirements: 1. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G 40 hot-dip galvanized coating. B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3/16-inch- wide minimum lip (return), and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth: 1. Thickness: 22 gauge minimum. -- 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. C. Deflection Track: Manufacturer's top runner complying with the requirements of ASTM C 645 and with 2- inch-deep flanges. D. Fasteners for Metal Framing: GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES09255.-.2 17Cronin Road L _ L 1. Provide fasteners of type, material,size, corrosion resistance, holding power,.and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved. 2. Comply with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated. --, 2.3 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available that will minimize end- to-end butt joints in each area indicated to receive gypsum board application. B. Widths: Provide gypsum board in widths of 48 inches. - C. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows.: 1. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type: Type X where required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies. 3. Edges: Tapered. 4. Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKETS A. Provide 3'/2" unfaced fiberglass batts. 1. Width: To fit stud spacing. 2. Length: 96". B. Comply with ASTM C 665,Type 1.. 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Comerbead, edge trim, and control joints complying. with - ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below: 1. Material: Formed metal, steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip process or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047: j a. Comerbead on outside comers, unless otherwise indicated. b. LC-bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use LC-beads for edge trim, unless otherwise indicated. c. L-bead with face flange only; face flange formed to.receive joint compound. Use L-bead Where indicated. i 2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS j A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application indicated. B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. C. Setting-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged, job-mixed, chemical-hardening powder products formulated for uses indicated. 1.. Where setting-type joint compounds are indicated as a taping compound only or for taping and filling only, use formulation that is compatible with other joint compounds applied over it. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES W::. 09255-3 17Cronin Road 2. For prefilling gypsum board joints, use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. 3. For topping compound, use sandable formulation. D. Drying-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged vinyl-based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. 1. Ready Mixed Formulation: Factory mixed produc t. a. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and face flanges of trim accessories. b. Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. B. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for fastening gypsum board to steel members less than _ 0.033 inch thick. C. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. - _ D. Steel drill screws of size and type recommended by unit manufacturer for fastening cementitious backer units. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow metal frames, cast-in-anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. - B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer or, if none available,with United States Gypsum Co.'s"Gypsum Construction Handbook." 3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board stud assemblies abut other construction. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-4 17Cronin Road I - B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips or foam gaskets between studs and wall. C. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surfaces do not vary more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. D. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated. E. Install steel studs spaced at 16" o. c:, unless otherwise indicated. F. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each gypsum board panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I 3.4 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216. B. Install gypsum panels with face side out. 1. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. 2. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. 3.. Do not force into place. C. Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. 1. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. i 2. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. D. Attach gypsum panels to -steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. E. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. F. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c.for vertical applications. 3.5 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS A. Single=Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows: 1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated, and provide panel lengths that will minimize end joints. - 2. Fasten with screws. . 3.6 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES - A. - General: For trim accessories with back flanges,fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturer's directions for type,-length, and spacing of fasteners. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES. -09255- 5 17Cronin Road B. Install comerbead at external comers. C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed. 1. Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound, except where other types are indicated. 2. Install LC-bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate. 3. Install L-bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed. 3.7 INSTALLING ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Provide acoustical sealant at floor track and above ceiling edge trim. B. Install acoustical sealant in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.8 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, flanges of comerbead, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting-type joint compound. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim accessories having flanges not requiring tape. D. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints and to flanges of trim accessories as recommended by trim accessory manufacturer. E. Finish interior gypsum wallboard by applying the following joint,compounds.in 3 coats (not including prefill of openings in base) 1. Embedding and First Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or taping compound. 2. Fill (Second) Coat: Ready-mixed,drying-type, all-purpose or topping compound. 3. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or topping compound. 3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. _ B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure gypsum board assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09255 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-6 17Cronin Road - SECTION 09511 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 -'GENERAL j 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS - A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. -I 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes ceilings consisting of acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems. B. The extent of acoustical panel ceiling work is indicated on the Drawings.- C.- Related Sections: 1. Section 16510 "Lighting Fixtures"for lighting.fixtures in acoustical panel ceilings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. B. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each type of ceiling assembly indicated; in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full-range of variations expected in these characteristics. 1. 6-inch-square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattem, and color. 2. Set of 12-inch- long samples of exposed suspension system members, including moldings, for each color and system type required. C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners; and other information specified. i 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications:' Engage an experienced installer who has completed acoustical panel ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Source Limitations for Ceiling Units: Obtain each acoustical ceiling panel from one source with resources to provide.products of consistent quality in'appeararice and physical properties without delaying the Work. C. Source Limitations for Suspension System: Obtain each suspension system from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING i ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 1 17 Cronin Road A. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from - moisture, direct sunlight,surface contamination, and other causes. i B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any.way. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient - temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.7 COORDINATION . A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire- suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed. _. PART 2-PRODUCTS If` 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Ceiling Panels: As indicated on the Drawings. 2. Suspension System Components: -- a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation. C. Donn Division, USG Interiors, Inc 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light refiectances, unless otherwise indicated. - B. Acoustical Panel Characteristics, Colors, and Patterns: As indicated on the Drawings. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -2 17 Cronin Road 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION'SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements. B. Acoustical Panel Ceiling Metal Suspension System Characteristics: Match material, configuration, and finish of existing system. C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire.. D. Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Match material, configuration, and finish of existing system. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage, and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. . B. Proceed with installation only after,unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. -3.2 PREPARATION _- A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite. edges of each ceiling. B. Avoid using less4han-half-width .panels at borders,-and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. _ I 3.3 INSTALLATION _! A. General: " I 1. Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's"Ceiling Systems Handbook." 2. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C 636.. ! B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. _ . 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -3 17 Cronin Road devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight tums. 5. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other,devices that are secure, and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicate. 7. Provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where I necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 ' inches from ends. 2. Level with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter comers accurately and connect securely. 3. Miter comers accurately and connect securely. 4. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. ' Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. F. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. I G. Install panels with pattem to match existing. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. C. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF:SECTION 09511 I ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -4 17 Cronin Road 1 SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1: Vinyl composition floor tile. 2. Resilient wall base and accessories. —� 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. B. Maintenance Data: For resilient floor the to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has --� specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of product specified from one source as indicated on the Drawings. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names,of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained between i 50 and 90 deg F. _I C. Store tiles on flat surfaces. D. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours before installation, unless longer conditioning period is recommended in writing by manufacturer. -' 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F in spaces to receive products for at least 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for at least 48 hours after,installation, unless manufacturer's written recommendations specify longer time periods. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING .09651 - 1 17 Cronin-Road B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic duringflooring installation and for time period after installation recommended 9in p writing by manufacturer. - I_ D. Install tiles and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. E. Do not install flooring over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, as determined by flooring manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test. - 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than one box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattem, class,wearing surface, and size of resilient file flooring installed. 2. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for each 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient accessory installed. 3. Deliver extra materials to Owner. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Azrock. 3. Johnsonite 4. Roppe Corporation 5. Tarkett 2.2 RESILIENT TILE i A. Vinyl Composition Tile: Provide products complying with ASTM F 1066. 1. Size: 12"x 12". 2. Thickness: 1/8"gage. 3. Color. As selected from manufacturer's full range of available selections 2.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Vinyl Wall Base: Products complying with FS SS-W-40, Type II, with matching end stops and preformed or molded inside and outside comer units as follows: j 1 1. Height: 4 inches. 2. Thickness: 1/8"gage. 3. Standard top-set cove. 4. Color. As selected from manufacturer's full range of available selections. 2.4 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 -2 17 Cronin Road A. Troweiable Leveling. and Patching' Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland-cement-based formulation Provided or approved by flooring,manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives:- Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. PART 3- EXECUTION 1 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of resilient products will occur, with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements. B. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for resilient product installation and comply with requirements specified. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. _ 3.2 PREPARATION _- A. General: Comply with resilient product manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive resilient products. _ B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wak, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by.. manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation. 1. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation,or dust. 2. Do.not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets; so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. 1. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half of a tile at perimeter. 2. Lay tiles square with room axis, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 4. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction. -; C. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures, including built-in furniture,.cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames,thresholds, and nosings. D. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 -3 17 Cronin Road E. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to comply with tile manufacturer's written instructions, including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. - F. Provide completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. G. Hand roll tiles according to tile manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATON A. General: Install vinyl wall base according to manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Apply vinyl wall base_ to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. 1. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. 2. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. 3. Do not stretch base during installation. 4. Install premolded outside comers before installing straight pieces. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing VCT flooring: 1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes_ using cleaner recommended by resilient product manufacturers. r- 2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended.by flooring manufacturer. 4. Damp-mop floor to remove marks and soil. B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from constriction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by flooring manufacturer. C. Clean floor surfaces not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. 1. Clean products according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 2. After cleaning, reapply polish to floor surfaces to restore protective floor finish according to flooring manufacturer's written recommendations. 3. Coordinate with Owner's maintenance program. END OF SECTION 09651 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 -4 17 Cronin Road I SECTION 09681 - CARPET TILE PART 1 -GENERAL . i 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. -Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,.including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Carpet tile. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.. Include manufacturer's written data.on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation methods. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Carpet the type, color, and dye lot. 2. Type of subfloor. 3. Type of installation. j 4. Pattern of installation. 5. Pile direction. 6. Type, color, and location of edge,transition, and other accessory strips. 7. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE - A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board -' or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products 'per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions;Temperature and Humidity." CARPET TILE 09681 - 1 17 Cronin Road B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tile until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet tile over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE A. Manufacturer and product: Interface "Cubic", color as selected by owner from full line of manufacturer's - samples. B. Product No: 13801 C. Construction: Tufted Textured Loop - D. Soil/Stain Protection: Protekt - E. Antimicrobial Treatment: Intersept F. Yam System: Aquafil Forza G. Secondary Backing: GlasBac Tile H. Yam Weight: 18 I. Machine Gauge: 1/12 in J. Stitches: 8.1600 K. Total Weight: 143 L. Total Thickness: .2750 M. Size: 19.69 in N. Radiant Panel: (ASTM E-648) Class I O. Smoke Density: (ASTM E-662) P. Lightfastness: (AATCC 16-E) Q. Static: (AATCC-134)<3.0 KV R. Dimensional Stability: AACHEN Din 54318< .10% CARPET TILE 09681 -2 17 Cronin Road 1 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES — A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided by or recommended by carpet file manufacturer. _ B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and that is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. j PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and .conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture -! content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. B. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet the installation and comply with requirements specified. C: Concrete Subfloors:. Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. 2. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics_ by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 3. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete". for slabs receiving carpet tile. 4. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104,. Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. E. Proceed'with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Carpet Tile: 1. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 13, "Carpet Modules(Tiles)." CARPET TILE 09681 -3 17 Cronin Road 2. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 3. Extend carpet the into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable J flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. 4. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking - device. 5. Install pattern as indicated on the Drawings. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yams that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet the using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Vacuum vestibule mats using commercial machine with face-beater element. C. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, and"Protection of Indoor Installations." D. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09681 CARPET TILE 09681 -4 17 Cronin Road Ii I . SECTION 09900-PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings.and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and CDivision 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. I 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following: 1. Exposed interior items and surfaces. 2. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces as indicated on the Drawings. C. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available.. _ D. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces,finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. E. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85- ^! degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60- degree meter. 3. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60- degree meter. 4. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a.60-degree meter. 5. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60- degree meter. 6. The term "Paint" includes coating systems materials, primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applie6 materials whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. 'Product.Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers. B. Material List: 1. Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. 2. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating,finish system, and application. PAINTING 09900- 1 17 Cronin Road 3. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. C. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers - bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume,for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition,free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Protect from freezing. 3. Keep storage area neat and orderly. 4. Remove oily rags and waste daily. 5. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production rim as the materials applied in the quantities described below. 1. Package paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for storage and identify with labels describing contents. 2. Deliver extra materials to the Owner. B. Quantity: Furnish the Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS PAINTING 09900-2 17 Cronin Road i_ i 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products in the paint schedules. 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service,and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2.3 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1. Low-Luster,Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer. Latex-based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 1) Glidden: 5111 Spred Ultra Latex Primer-Sealer. _ 2) Moore: Regal First Coat Interior Latex Primer& Underbody#216. 3) PPG: 17-10 Quick-Drying Interior Latex Primer-Sealer. 4) P & L: Z/F 1004 Suprime "4" Interior Latex Wall Primer. b. First and Second Coats: Low-luster(eggshell or satin), acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils. 1) Glidden: 4100 Series Spred,Ultra Eggshell Latex Wall &Trim Paint. 2) Moore: Moore's Regal AquaVelvet#319. 3) PPG: 89 Line Manor Hall Eggshell Latex Wall and Trim Enamel. 4) P &L: Z/F 4000 Series Accolade Interior Velvet. B. Stained Woodwork: Provide the following stained finishes over new, interior woodwork: 1. Alkyd-Based, Satin-Vamish Finish: 2-finish coats of an alkyd-based, clear-satin varnish over a sealer coat and an alkyd-based, interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain. a. Filler Coat: Paste-wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. 1) Glidden: Glidden Paste Wood Filler. 2) Moore: Benwood Paste Wood Filler#238. 3) PPG: None required. 4) P &L: None required. j 5) S-W: Sher-Wood Fast-Dry Filler. b. Stain Coat: Alkyd-based, interior wood stain applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. 1) Glidden:- 1600 Series Woodmaster Oil Wood Stain. 2) Moore: Benwood Penetrating Stain#234. 3) PPG: 77-302 Rez Interior Semi-Transparent Stain. 4) P &L: S-Series Tonetic Wood Stain. ... 5) S-W: Oil Stain A-48 Series. C. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer, applied at spreading- rate recommended by the manufacturer. PAINTING 09900-3 17 Cronin Road 1) Glidden: 5035 Ultra-Hide Quick-Dry Sanding Sealer, Clear. 2) Moore: Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick-Dry Sanding Sealer#413. 3) PPG: 77-30 Rez Interior Quick-Drying Sealer and Finish. 4) P&L: H-40 Sanding Sealer. 5) S-W: ProMar Varnish Sanding Sealer B26V3. d. First and Second Finish Coats: Alkyd-based or polyurethane varnish, as recommended by the manufacturer, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. 1) Glidden: 82 Satin Sheen Woodmaster Polyurethane Clear Finishes Varnish. 2) Moore: Benwood Satin Finish Varnish#404. 3) PPG: 77-7 Rez Varnish, Interior Satin Oil Clear. 4) P &L: H24 38 Clear Finish Gloss. 5) S-W: Oil Base Varnish, Gloss A66V91. I C. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: 1. Low-Luster, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. L a. Primer. Quick-drying,.rust-inhibitive, alkyd-based or epoxy-metal primer, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Primer not required on factory-primed material. 1) Glidden: 5207 Glid-Guard Tank&Structural Primer,White. 2) Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint#163. 3) PPG: 6-208 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer. 4) P &L: S 4551 Tech-Gard High Performance Rust Inhibitor Primer. i b. First and Second Coats: Low-luster(eggshell or satin), acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils. 1) Glidden: 4100 Series Spired Ultra Eggshell Latex Wall &Trim Paint. 2) Moore- Moore's Regal AquaVelvet#319. . 3) PPG: 89 Line Manor Hall Eggshell Latex Wall and Trim Paint. 4) P & L: ZJF 4000 Series Accolade Interior Velvet. i PART 3- EXECUTION l_ 3.1 EXAMINATION A. . Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: 1. Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. 2. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. PAINTING 09900-4 17 Cronin Road - 3. Notify the'Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: 1. Remove hardware and .hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and - similar items already installed that are not to be painted. 2. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item_, provide surface- applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 3. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: 1. Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various.coatings. 2. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 3. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. i C. Surface Preparation: - 1. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 2. Provide barrier coats over-incompatible primers or remove.and reprime. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. b. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of wood doors with a heavy coat of sealer. " D. Materials Preparation: 1. Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition,free of foreign materials . - - and residue. _ 3. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 4. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. 7 - 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: 1. Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 3. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 4. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. ,I 5. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 6. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. PAINTING 09900- 5 17 Cronin Road 7. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. r- 8. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats — until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, comers, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 9. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 10. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 11. Finish doors both sides and on tops, bottoms, and side edges. 12. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. B. Scheduling Painting: 1. Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 2. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. 3. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: _ 1. Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. 2. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Prime Coats: 1. Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer,to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. 2. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no bum through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. F. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: 1. Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. 2. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. G. Completed Work: 1. Match approved samples for color,texture, and coverage. 2. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. PAINTING 09900-6 17 Cronin Road 3.4 CLEANING A. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. B. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. 1. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. - 2. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades,whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. B: Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. C. Provide'Wet Paint'signs to protect newly painted finishes. i D. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. E. At completion of construction activities of other trades,touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. F. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1'. END OF SECTION 09900 ' —f _.J 1 ` -_l I I I —I I PAINTING 09900-7 17 Cronin Road . SECTION 09950-WALL COVERINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract; including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Vinyl wall covering. 2. Primer/Sealer. - 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of product specified. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade j resistance, and flame-resistance characteristics. C. Shop Drawings showing location and extent of each wall covering type. Indicate seams and termination I points. f D. Schedule of wall coverings using same room designations indicated on Drawings. E. Maintenance data for wall covering to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in - Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE -� A. Installer Qualifications`. Engage an experienced installer who has completed 5 projects,similar in material, design, and .extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service -' performance. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide wall coverings with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. � 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall covering until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, worts above ceilings is complete, and -- ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. WALL COVERINGS 09950- 1 17 Cronin Road B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a lighting level of not less than 15 foot-candles is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering. C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by the wall covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. - 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. 1. Rolls of Wall Covering Material: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL COVERING MATERIAL A. Manufacturer and Product: VYCON, Mandalay as manufactured by J.Josephson, Inc.. B. G.S.A. Federal Specification CCC-W 408D,Type II C. Backing: Osnaburg. D. Total weight: 20 oz. E. Class"A" Fire Rated. F. Smoke developed 25. G. Flame spread 15, Class 1. H. Fire Propagation Class 0 I. Material Requirements: 1. Provide fabric that does not contain mercury or arsenic based biocides or cadmium-based stabilizers. 2. Treat fabric with stain-resisting coating. 3. Provide fabric with bactericides and mildew inhibitors to protect from microbiological and mildew growth. 2.2 PRIMER/SEALER A. Mildew-resistant primer/sealer complying with requirements in Division 9 Section 'Painting" and recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer for intended substrate 2.3 ADHESIVES A. General: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive, for use with specific wood-veneer wall covering and substrate application, as recommended by wall covering manufacturer. PART 3- EXECUTION WALL COVERINGS 09950-2 17 Cronin Road 3.1 EXAMINATION —' A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of Work of this Section. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew, oil, grease, incompatible primers, and dirt. C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and -, defects. I1 - 1. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. 2. Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply rust-inhibitive zinc primer. D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. —i E. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finishes with fine sandpaper. I F. Acclimatize wall covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with wall coverings manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to -- products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Cut wall covering panels in roll number sequence. Change run numbers at partition breaks and comers only. C. Install wall covering with no gaps,or overlaps. D. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside comers and 3 inches from inside comers. E. Horizontal seams will not be permitted. F. Remove air bubbles,wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. F G. Trim edges for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure at seams and edges. H. Butt:seams. i 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. B. Use cleaning methods recommended by wall covering manufacturer. _J C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. WALL COVERINGS 09950-3 17 Cronin Road f SECTION 10650-OPERABLE PARTITIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All applicable provisions of the Bidding and Contract Requirements, and Division 1 General Requirements shall govern the work under this section. 1.2 SUMMARY i A. Provide all labor, materials, necessary equipment and services to complete the operable walls, as indicated on the drawings, or as specified herein or both. B. Related sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section : "Gypsum Board Assemblies"for Metal framing and gypsum board wall systems. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE i J A. The operable walls herein specified shall,be furnished and installed by an authorized local. distributor licensed by the operable wall manufacturer. Local distribution is required to insure i prompt project coordination and future customer service. 1.4 ACOUSTICAL PERFORMANCE A. Laboratory acoustical performance of the operable wall shall have been tested in an independent acoustical laboratory in accordance with ASTM E90 test procedure, and shall have attained an STC rating of no less than 44.A written test report by the test facility shall be available upon request. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: submit shop drawings fully describing partition fabrication, layout, and installation. -' Include details of track,trolleys, hardware, etc. Indicate loading to be imposed in the supporting structure. Show all anchorage, accessory items, caulking, and finishes. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER } A. Manufacturer: Modemfold, Inc. B. Product: Acousti-Seal 932FS floor supported operable wall, paired panels. 2.2 OPERATION - A. Operable wall shall be a series of flat panels hinged in pairs or groups of three, manually operated, and floor supported. 2.3 PANEL CONSTRUCTION A. Panels shall be nominal 3.25" (83mm)thick in manufacturer's standard width 48" (1220mm) maximum.All panel horizontal and vertical framing elements shall be formed steel. OPERABLE PARTITIONS 10650-1 17 Cronin Road B. Panel skin shall be (select one): 1. 0.50"(13mm)tackable gypsum board, class°A" rated single material or composite layers continuously bonded to panel frame. r C. Panels hinges shall be (select one): 1. Full leaf butt hinges, attached directly to panel frame. Welded hinge anchor plates within panel shall further support hinge mounting to frame. Hinges mounted into panel edge or vertical astragal are not acceptable. D. Panels shall not require trim on the vertical edges and shall create a minimal groove at panel-to- panel joints.E. Panel weight shall be 5 to 11 Ib./sq.ft. - 2.4 PANEL FINISH A. Panel finish shall be factory applied, class"A" rated material. Finish shall be: 1. Full height tackboard with reinforced vinyl with woven backing weighing not less than 15 ounces per lineal yard. 2.5 SOUND SEALS A. Vertical interlocking sound seals between panels (astragals) of a reversible tongue and groove configuration shall be required in each panel edge, permitting universal panel operation.Astragals shall be steel for maximum durability and fire resistance. Rigid plastic astragals or astragals in only one panel edge are not acceptable. B. Horizontal top and bottom seals shall be continuous contact extruded vinyl bulb shape with pairs of non-contacting vinyl fingers to prevent distortion and no mechanically operated parts. 2.6 SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Floor track of minimum 16 ga. stainless steel shall support nominally 80% or more of the panel weight. Surface mounted applications shall require no alteration of the floor surface. Recessed floor track shall require a kerf no wider than 1"(25mm) nor deeper than 1" (25mm). B. Each panel (except hinged panels)shall be supported by one all-steel trolley with steel tired ball- bearing wheels, capable of adjustment with the partition in its extended position. Non-steel tires are not acceptable. C. Lateral support shall be provided at the panel top by a steel ceiling guide,which may be either _. direct mounted to a wood header or supported by pairs of threaded rods. Ceiling guide must be configured to provide support for ceiling tiles.The ceiling guide trolley shall allow up to 0.50" (13mm) of floor deflection without transfer of weight to the ceiling guide. 2.7 OPTIONS A. Pass Door shall be standard hollow metal door hung in a steel frame. It shall be _ equipped with a friction latch and flush pulls for panic operation. Pass Door shall be located in the center panel of a three-panel group and shall not require a threshold. Pass Door shall be prime painted for field finishing. OPERABLE PARTITIONS 10650-2 17 Cronin Road PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Preparation of opening shall be by general contractor.Any deviation of site conditions contrary to approved shop drawings shall be called to the attention of the architect. 3.2 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Delivery to the job site shall be coordinated by general contractor. Proper storage of partitions before installation and continued protection during and after installation shall be the responsibility of the general contractor. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be by an authorized factory trained installer. Installation shall be in accordance with ASTM E557 installation procedure. 3.4 WORKMANSHIP B. The complete installation of the operable wall system as called for and detailed on the drawings shall be'provided in strict accordance with the drawings and manufacturers standard printed specifications, instructions and recommendations. i . END OF SECTION i i i OPERABLE PARTITIONS 10650-3 _ 17 Cronin Road SOCIAL SECURITY ADMINISTRATION ALTERATIONS TO DISTRICT OFFICES Queensbury, New York -MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX- DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL Section Number and Title 15000HSCOPE OF WORK........................••••...............................................................................1 15010H BASIC.HVAC REQUIREMENTS......................................................................................5 15193H DUCT AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION...................................................................2 15260HPIPING INSULATION.......................................................................................................5 15290HDUCT INSULATION .........................................................................................................3 15577H PREFABRICATION CHIMNEY .......................................................................................1 - 15650H REFRIGERATION.............................................................................................................3 15652HFAN COIL UNITS .............................................................................................................4 15875H GAS FIRED FURNACE...................................................................................•••..............3 15889H WIRING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.......................................................................2 15891 H METAL'DUCTWORK........................................................................................................6 15910H DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES ..........................................................................................5 15920H REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS .....................................................................2 . 15950H HEATING MOTOR CONTROLS.................:.............................................:....................:.2 15951 H MOTORS................................................................................:.........................................3 15970H TEMPERATURE CONTROLS-ELECTRIC ..............................................:. ...................3 . - 15992H CLEANING AND TESTING--•...........................................................:......:.....••• ....:.3 15993H BALANCING OF SYSTEMS..................... ........... - ' 16000H ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS ......................... ....3 ........................................................ 16010H BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS..........................................................................4 16110HRACEWAYS .....................................................................................................................3 16120H WIRES AND CABLES ......................................................................................................3 16135H ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS............................................................................2 16190H SUPPORTING DEVICES.................................................................................................3 16195H ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION......................................................................................2 16900H WIRING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.......................................................................1 INDEX-1 SECTION 15000H -SCOPE OF WORK PART1 GENERAL The following is a general listing of work items to be provided under this Contract which is not necessarily all inclusive, nor shall it limit the extent of the work or exclude any work shown or specified and not listed: 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide gas fired furnaces with direct expansion cooling coils for heating,ventilation and air conditioning. B. Provide complete refrigeration piping system from the furnace or fan coil cooling coil to the air cooled condensing units. C. Provide fan coil unit FC-2 and related controls for supplemental cooling for the reception area. D. Provide insulated cooling coil condensate piping system. E. Provide complete supply air, return air and outside air ductwork system F.. Complete insulation of ductwork, piping and equipment, as specified. G. Provide complete system of identification for piping,equipment and ductwork, as specified. H. Complete temperature control system, including control wiring. I. Provide furnace gas flue prefabricated chimney for each furnace. J. Provide motors and motor controllers for all HVAC equipment. K. Testing, balancing, training and one (1)year guarantee. L. Provide all cutting and patching as required for the removal and installation of all HVAC work. M. Provide selective demolition as noted in the specification and as indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION NO. 15000H SCOPE OF WORK 15000H—1 17 Cronin Road SECTION 15010H -BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS PART GENERAL 1.1 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. All work under this title, on drawings or specified, is subject to the architectural general and special contract conditions for the entire project,and the Contractor for this portion of the work is _ required to refer especially thereto, and to the architectural drawings. -B. Drawings and specifications are complementary and must be so interpreted to determine the full scope of work under this heading. Wherever any material,article,operation or method is either specified or shown on the drawings,this Contractor is required to provide each item and perform each prescribed operation according to the designate quality, -qualification .or condition, furnishing all necessary labor, equipment or incidentals. C. Wherever the designation "Architect'appears, it shall imply Architect or Engineer. 1.2 CONFLICTS j A. If a conflict appears between the drawings and the specifications,the Contractor is to contact the Engineer-for clarification. B. In the absence of a clarification by the Engineer, the Contractor must install his work in -� accordance with the more stringent application. 1.3 DIMENSIONS, LAYOUTS AND OBSTACLES ; I A. Verify dimensions and elevations from General Construction Drawings or by actual field - measurements after building construction has sufficiently progressed". B. Assume full and final responsibility.for the accuracy of any or all work performed under this Division and make repairs and corrections as required or directed at no extra cost to the Owner. C. .Layouts of piping,ductwork, and equipment shown on drawings are diagrammatic and shall be construed as such. D. Make actual installations in accord with said layouts, but with necessary deviations as directed or required by job conditions and field measurements in order to produce a thoroughly integrated and practical job upon completing, but make deviations only with specific approval of the Engineer/Architect. - E. Take particular care to coordinate all piping and ductwork under this Division to prevent conflict and remove and relocate work as may be made necessary by such conflict at no extra cost to the Owner. F. Unless expressly permitted by the Engineer/Architect or shown otherwise on the drawings,all piping,vent piping, ducts and similar items shall be installed so that they are concealed except as permitted by the Engineer/Architect in service rooms noted on the drawings. G. The Owner or Owner's representative reserves the right to relocate terminal equipment six(6) - feet in any direction from locations indicated on plans, before roughing-in, with no change in contract price.. BASIC HVAC.REQUIREMENTS 1501OH—1 17 Cronin Road 1.4 APPROVAL OF MATERIAL i A. Items specified have been checked by the Engineer for performance and space limitation. B. Unless the words"approved equal'appear, Contractor-is to choose from list of manufacturers mentioned and state the make of equipment he intends to purchase on a sheet provided at the time of the contract signing. C. In order for Engineer to consider "equal', HC must certify by letter that he has checked the product for conformance to specifications and space limitations and assumes full responsibility thereafter. D. Engineer, not Contractor or Vendor,shall be the final judge of equal materials. Where product is not considered equal by the Engineer, Contractor may offer credit to the Owner for further consideration. E. Requests for substitutions must be made in writing ten (10) days prior to bid date so that an addendum may reach all Contractors. F. If substitutions are proposed after the bids are received, the Contractor shall state amount of credit to the Owner for substitution. G. Where equipment requiring different arrangement of connections from those shown is approved, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish revised layouts, if requested;and install the equipment to operate properly and in harmony with the intent of the drawings and specifications,and to make all changes in the work required by the different arrangement of the . connections at no additional cost to the Owner. Also coordinate control and power wiring and pay for any changes imposed on other trades by these changes. H. Upon approval of equipment list by Engineer, copies of submittal prints shall be forwarded to Engineer within thirty (30) days. 1.5 PERMITS, CODES AND ORDINANCES A. The Heating Contractor shall arrange and pay for all permits, inspections, etc., as required by local utilities or applicable agencies. j B. All work and material shall be in complete accordance with the ordinances, regulations,codes, etc.,of all political entities exercising jurisdictions,specifically including the NYS Energy Code. C. In event of discrepancy, the Contractor shall observe the more stringent requirements. 1.6 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Check Division 15H drawings with all others. B. Anticipate and avoid interferences with other trades.C. Obtain decision for approval from project Inspector for proposed group installation before proceeding, and for clearance in structure and finish of the building. -- D. Verify with drawings if required. BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS 15010H—2 17 Cronin Road i E. Running pipe over electrical equipment is prohibited. Special cases may be permitted with protecting copper drip pan. Obtain Architect's or Engineer's approval. ~' 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Make provisions for delivery and safe storage of all materials. Check and properly receipt material to be"furnished by others"to Contractor,and assume full responsibility. for all materials while in storage with full visible identification and information. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Existing Conditions: Field verify existing conditions that will determine exact locations, distances, levels, dimensions, elevations, etc. Review all drawings of other trades and report any conflicts to the Arch itect/Engineer, which will affect the project cost. i 1.9 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit shop drawings,wiring diagrams or equipment lists for the following equipment and material. . 1. Submit a list of the following sub=contractors a. Sheet Metal b. Insulation C. Control System d. Balancing-air procedures BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS 15010H—3 17 Cronin Road i B. REQUIRED SHOP DRAWINGS MA'TERIAL ITEM N 4 15193H DUCT AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 15260H PIPING INSULATION 15290H DUCT INSULATION 15577H PREFABRICATED CHIMNEY 15650H REFRIGERATION 15652H FAN COIL UNITS 15875H GAS FIRED FURNACE 15889H WIRING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 15891 H METAL DUCTWORK 15910H DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 15920H REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS :15950H HEATING MOTOR CONTROLS 15951 H MOTORS I - I15970H TEMPERATURE CONTROLS—ELECTRIC I 15922H CLEANING AND TESTING 15993H BALANCING OF SYSTEMS 16000H ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010H BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16110H RACEWAYS - 16120H WIRES AND CABLES 16135H ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 16190H SUPPORTING DEVICES 16195H ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16900H WIRING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS 15010H—4 17 Cronin Road i 1.10 REQUIREMENTS BEFORE FINAL PA YMENT - A. Lubricating Instruction 1. Hang framed lubrication chart in mechanical room or adjacent to equipment installed by the Contractor. 2. List name of equipment, recommended lubrication, and times required. 3. Certify all equipment has been properly lubricated prior to turnover to Owner. f B. Identification 1.' Tag all starters, etc., per Article Section 15191 H, "Pipe and Valve Identification" and Section 15193H, "Duct and Equipment Identification." i 2. Hang typewritten list in equipment rooms where directed. _! C. Certification 1. Submit to Engineer/Architect certificates of approval from electrical inspector,or authority having jurisdiction over codes pertaining to work in this Division. 2. Submit to Engineer/Architect certificate stating any refrigerant on the project has been - handled and disposed of in accordance with EPA regulations. D. Instructional Period 1. Instruct up to two (2) of the Owner's representatives in complete operation of all components,to the satisfaction of the Owner and receive signed statement from Owner's representative certifying knowledge.and understanding of all equipment and systems. E. Guarantees 1. Provide all guarantees as required by the Contract Documents with a minimum of one year from the date of Substantial Completion on all labor and materials. i F. Start-up Report 1. Provide start-up report for each piece.of mechanical equipment including date,electrical characteristics, temperature and pressure readings, etc. 2. This is intended for all items not specifically included in the Balancing Report J G. Operational Booklets 1. Provide the Owner with two (2) Operation Booklets,which contain the following: a. Approved shop drawings b. ,Wiring diagrams C. Test date d. Operational instructions e. Lubrication instructions f. Start-up report g. Air Balancing report I END OF SECTION NO. 15010H BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS 1501OH-5 17 Cronin Road i f SECTION 15193H - DUCT AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 15191 H: Pipe and Valve Identification 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver paint to the Site in original,new unopened containers, bearing manufacturers'printed labels. B. Store materials at the site where directed. Keep storage space clean and accessible to the Engineer'at all times. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Paint: Semi-gloss enamel(latex base)complying with the requirements of FS TT-P-001511. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION . A. Do not execute the Work'of this Section until all testing, insulation and finish painting Work _ have been completed.. B. Place.drop cloths or other suitable protection as required to avoid damage and paint spatters on adjacent surfaces. 12 DUCT IDENTIFICATION I A. Identify exposed ductwork, bare or insulated,directly connected to air handling apparatus,in the following spaces or rooms, by means of painted stenciled legends: j 1. Mechanical Equipment 2. Penthouse B. Locate stenciled legends to be readily visible from any point of observation. Stencil identification along center line of duct,close to equipment. Where view is unobstructed from two(2) directions, apply two (2) sets of stenciling (both sides), visible from each direction. C. Letter Size: %inches in height DUCT AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION_ 1519311.—1 17 Cronin Road D. Samples of Ductwork Identification: 1. Fresh Air Supply 2. Air Cond. Supply Air 3. Air Cond. Return Air 4. Recirc. Cond.Air - 5. Exhaust Air E. Colors: Paint stenciled letters black. Where the background color is dark,paint background white before stenciling. 3.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Identify mechanical equipment, bare or insulated,installed in the following spaces or rooms, by means of painted stenciled legends: 1. Mechanical Equipment 2. Penthouse B. Paint stenciled legends black,a minimum of 1'/inches in height, located to be readily visible from a reasonable point of view. Place identification along centerline of equipment, if possible. C. Samples of Equipment Identification: 1. Air Cond. Unit AC 1 2. Supply Fan S 1 3. Exhaust Fan E 1 4. =Return Fan R 1 3.4 APPLICATION OF PAINT A. Stencil Painting: Apply with a brush or aerosol type spray can. -- 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of paint spatters resulting from the Work of this Section. END OF SECTION NO. 15193H i DUCT AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 15193H —2 17 Cronin Road - SECTION 15260H -PIPING INSULATION PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 1514OH: Hangers and Supports 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Cold Service Insulation: Insulation on piping !conveying .fluids at below ambient temperatures. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog sheets,specifications,and installation instructions for each item specified, excluding-Miscellaneous Materials B. Samples: 1. Fiberglass Pipe Insulation: Three (3) inches long, for one (1) inch pipe, with V.B. jacket 2. Flexible Elastomeric Foam Pipe Insulation: Three(3) inches long,for one(1) inch j pipe - 3. Pre-molded Fitting Insulation: One (1) inch ell or tee 4. PVC/Fiberglass Fitting Insulation: One (1) inch ell or tee - 5. Metal Jacket: Srriall-section for one (1) inch pipe, with snap strap, and band :,wrenched in place 6. Reinforcing Membrane; Canvas: One(1) sq ft of each - 7. Tapes: Sample roll of each 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: The persons and supervisors performing the Work of this section shall be personally experienced in installing insulation,and shall have been regularly performing such work for a minimum of three (3) years while in the employ of.a company or companies - engaged in the installation of piping insulation. - PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE INSULATION A. Fiberglass; Conform with FS HH-1-558B, Form D,.Type III, Class 12. i i PIPING INSULATION 15260H —1 17 Cronin Road 2.2 JACKET MATERIAL A. All Purpose Jacket: Vapor barrier type, factory or field applied over fiberglass insulation, comprised of a Kraft paper outer cover bonded to aluminum foil, and reinforced with fiberglass yarn. Jacket material shall be treated for permanent fire and smoke resistance. A vapor barrier jacket seal shall be accomplished with a 1 Y2"longitudinal flap,and 3"wide butt strips,factory supplied, for making circumferential joints. 1. Fire and Smoke Hazard Classification Rating (composite, including jacket and adhesive, ASTM E-84): _ a. Flame Spread: Twenty-five (25)or less b. Smoke Developed: Fifty (50)or less 2. Water Vapor Permeability (ASTM E-96): 0.02 perm. - 3. Tensile Strength: 40 lb./in.width 4. Mullen Burst: 70 psi. 2.3 FITTING INSULATION A. Fiberglass Insulation System: 1. Pre-molded fitting insulation: Same thickness as the adjacent pipe covering. a. Conform to FS-HH-1-558B, Form E, Class 16. 2. PVC/Fiberglass Fitting Insulation: Polyvinyl chloride pre-molded flexible fitting cover with batt type, pre-cut fiberglass insert. a. PVC: Conform with FS L-P-535C, Composition A, Type II, Grade GU. b. Fiberglass: Conform with FS HH-1-558B, Form B, Type 1, Class 7&8. 3. Miter Cut Fitting Insulation: Fabricated from materials employed for pipe insulation 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS. A. Adhesive: 1. Vapor Barrier Jacket Adhesive: Foster Products Division, 85-20, Childers, CP-82, Epolux, Cad-o-prene, 400 2. Canvas Jacket Adhesive: Foster Products Division,30-36,Childers,CP-50;Epolux, Cadalag, 336 3. Reinforcing Membrane Adhesive: Foster Products Division 30-36;Childers,CP-50,- Epolux, Cadalag 336 - 4. Flexible Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Foster Products Division, 85-75; Epolux, Cad-o-prene, 488; Armstrong, 520 B. Joint Sealant for Fiberglass Insulation: Foster Products Division, 30-45; Childers, CP-30; Epolux, 670 C. Vapor Barrier Coating: Foster Products Division, 30-35; Childers, CP-30; Epolux, 670 D. Cement: 1. Insulating Cement: ASTM C195, asbestos free 2. Finishing Cement: ASTM C449/C449M E. Reinforcing Membrane: 1. Polyester Cloth: 8 x 8 mesh per sq.in.,0.7 oz. per sq.yd.; Foster Products Division, Mast-a-fab. 2. Glass Yarn Cloth: 20 x 20 mesh per sq. in.; Johns-Manville, Duramesh fabric PIPING INSULATION 15260H —2 17 Cronin Road I F. Sealing Tape: Vapor_barrier,color.matching,of same material as the pipe or fitting cover to _! which applied; as manufactured by Arno Inc., Compac Corp., Fasson Adhesive Co.; or as recommended by the manufacturer of the jacket material to which applied. G. Banding Wire: Steel, 20 gauge, galvanized; annealed -, H. Thumb Tack Fastener: 'Stainless steel,with serrated shank I. Wood Blocks: Hardwood, preservative treated; 1"wide,3"minimum length;inner and outer surfaces contoured to fit the curvature of the pipe, and insulation shield r J. Wood Dowel Plugs: Hard wood, preservative treated K. Wood Preservative: Pentachlorophenol, 5%solution, 3 minute dip PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Do not install insulation until the piping.,Work has been tested and approved. I B. Clean and dry all Work to be insulated,prior to applying insulation. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install the Work of this section in accordance.with the manufacturer's printed installation instructions, except as specified otherwise. 3:3 -INSTALLATION'OF FIBERGLASS INSULATION - A. Seal,jacket longitudinal flap with vapor barrier jacket adhesive. Rub out all wrinkles and smooth excess sealant flush with outer surface.of jacket.. -� B. Apply a coating of vapor barrier jacket adhesive to each section of insulation to be joined, i and apply butt strips in.like manner as above. Apply.butt strips to overlap 134"on each side of the sections joined. } C. PVC/Fiberglass Fitting Insulation: Tuck the ends of the pre-cut insulation batt snugly into the throat of the fitting, tuft and tuck-in the edges adjacent to the pipe insulation. Install fitting cover and seal as follows: 1. Cold Service Insulation: Seal the overlap in the throat of the fitting cover, and the - butt joint of the cover with the adjacent pipe insulation,with 2"wide sealing tape(a product of the fitting cover manufacturer). Extend the tape 1"over the adjacent pipe insulation and overlap upon itself at least 2"on the downward side. _! 2. Hot Service Insulation: Secure the cover with staples,.thumbtack fasteners, or sealing tape. D. Pre-Molded and Miter Cut Fitting Insulation: Insulate to the same thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation. Apply joint sealant to the mating edges of the sections, and to the butt joint. Secure sections together with banding wire; bend twisted ends into the insulation. Apply a I leveling coat of insulating cement to fill the voids and smooth irregularities. PIPING INSULATION 15260H —3 17 Cronin Road 1. Cold Service Insulation: Cover fitting insulation with two W thick applications of vapor barrier coating,with a layer of reinforcing membrane bedded between coats- Lap membrane at least 2" over itself, and the adjacent pipe insulation. Apply a 6 - ounce canvas jacket over the fitting,secured with adhesive. Lap canvas at least 2" over itself, and the adjacent pipe insulation. a. Omit canvas on concealed installations. 2. Hot Service Insulation: Apply a six(6)ounce canvas jacket to the fitting insulation, secured with adhesive. Lap canvas at least 2"over itself. a. Omit canvas on concealed installations. E. Vapor Stop for Cold Service Insulation: 1. Pipe Insulation: At twenty-one (21) foot intervals of horizontal, and nine (9) foot intervals of vertical pipe insulation, also at each fitting insulated with pre-molded or miter cut fitting insulation,apply a 1/16"thickness of vapor barrier coating to the butt end, and 2"into the bore of each joining section before assembling. 2. Insulation Termination; Metal to Insulation Joints; Protrusions Through Insulation: a. Apply a vapor barrier coating to completely seal the joint and extend over adjacent insulation and metal a maximum of three (3) inches. b. Embed reinforcing membrane into the coating, covering the complete coated surface; smooth out wrinkles. C. Apply a heavy application of vapor barrier coating over the entire surface, i leaving a large bead or fillet at the joint between metal and insulation. 3.4 INSTALLATION AT HANGERS A. Reset and realign hangers and supports if they are displaced while installing the piping insulation.B. Install insulation filler pieces at all hangers for cold service piping, to prevent crushing the insulation. 1. Fiberglass Insulation: Use insulated clevis hangers specified with built-in filler _ pieces. ,PIPE/TUBIN�G SIZE''', FILLER PIECES YI ;; x POSITION Thru IY2" 2 dowel plugs 6 o'clock; in tandem - 2"thru 4" 1 block 6 o'clock, and - 2 dowel plugs 4 &8 o'clock, respectively 6"thru 8" 2 blocks 6 o'clock; in tandem 4 dowel plugs and 4&8 o'clock; in tandem PIPING INSULATION 15260H -4 17 Cronin Road _- 3.5 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULES A. Hot water piping not to be insulated: 1. Piping within fntube enclosures. (Except draft barrier enclosures) 2. Air vents, pressure reducing valves, pilot lines, safety valves, relief valves, back pressure valves 3. Flexible connectors B. Insulate all cold service piping and equipment in accordance with the following schedule: 1. Cooling coil condensate piping 2. Refrigerant suction piping C. Install cold service insulation intact through pipe, sleeves, and openings in building construction, maintaining the vapor barrier integrity of the system. D. Insulate valve bodies up to but not including the packing nuts. E. Insulation Options: Select only one of the first three(3)options for fiberglass pi pe insulation. Option 4 may be used for temperatures to 200 degrees F and on pipe sizes of two(2)inches } and under. Use fiberglass on pipe sizes of 2%2 inches and larger. Do not intermix insulation types on individual runs of piping. 1. Option 1: Fiberglass pipe insulation, with pre-molded fitting insulation 2. Option 2: Fiberglass pipe insulation,with PVC/fiberglass fitting insulating system 3. Option 3: Fiberglass pipe insulation, with miter cut fitting insulation - 4. Option 4: Flexible elastomeric foam pipe insulation,with miter cut fitting insulation: -.. COLD SERVICE INSULATION SCHEDULE Insulating materials and thickness for piping, equipment, vessels and appurtenances for conveying, storing or processing materials, at or below ambient temperature. Thicknesses listed are minimum (Nominal). - ,SERVICES AND MATERIAL ' PIPE SIZESr INSULATION y TEMPERATURE OPTIONS (Inches) i THICKNESS i Water and other fluids 40 Flex. Elastomeric 1 &less %2. F to 80 F Foam or Fibrous 1%& Up 1 Glass Water and other fluids 81 *NO INSULATION-REQUIRED" Fto104F. END OF SECTION NO. 15260H PIPING INSULATION 15260H -5 17 Cronin Road I SECTION 15290H DUCT INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions for the following: 1. Insulating Materials 2. Jacket Materials 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE ( A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Fire.and Smoke Hazard'Ratings: Duct insulation installed inside a building, duct lining materials, Class 1 and 2 jacketing materials, mastics, and adhesives.shall have a maximum flame spread rating of twenty-five (25) and a maximum fuel contributed and smoke developed rating of fifty (50).or less,when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 and UL723. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Insulation for ductwork, installed inside.a building, shall be fibrous glass with a factory applied -;laminated foil 'scrim.-kraft jacket of-Class as specified and as follows: 1. Blanket insulation shall be a minimum of 2"thick with a factory applied Class 2 jacket. 2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Fibrous Glass: Glass processed from a molten state into fibrous form, bonded together with or without the addition of a binder to form rigid, semi-rigid or flexible insulation materials with the following physical properties: 1. Blanket insulation shall be a minimum of 2"thick with a factory applied Class 2 jacket. 2. Ductwork Insulation Filler Pieces: Preformed,flat, rectangular material, of thickness as specified, having a density of 6 pcf, conforming to ASTM C612. 2.3 . JACKET.MATERIALS A. When conditions permit, factory apply jacketing materials to insulation, __i B. Laminated Jackets: Permanent, fire resistant, non-corrosive type having a UL flame spread rating of 25 or less-, a fuel contributed and smoke developed rating of 50 or less, a vapor transmission rate of 0.02 perms or less. Jacket materials shall be as follows: 1. Class 1 -Heavy duty 0.7 mil thick aluminum foil and white kraft paper laminate,reinforced with glass fiber scrim or fiber glass yarn, not less than four(4)per inch in both directions. 2. Class 2-Same as Class 1,with the foil side out. DUCT INSULATION 15290H—1 17 Cronin Road i 2.4 ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND CEMENTS: (Cereal base adhesives will not be approved). A. Lagging Adhesive for Canvas Jackets: B. Foster 30-36,Childers'CP-50 or Epolux Cadalag 336 B. Vapor Seal Adhesive: B. Foster 85-20, Childers' CP-82, or Epolux Cadaprene 400 - C. Vapor Barrier Mastic: B. Foster 30-35, Childers'CP-30, or Epolux Cadalar 670 D. Joint Sealer for use with Fibrous Glass Insulation: B. Foster 30-45, Childers'CP-30 or Epolux Cadalar 670 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS - A. Duct and Equipment Insulation Fasteners: Weld pin type complete with a speed washer, or suitable clip for supporting the insulation. Fasteners shall be Graham Weld Pins, Duro Dyne Spotter Pins or Clip Pins. B. Sealing Tape for Sealing Joints in Duct Insulation: Same materials as the jacket, as manufactured by Amo Adhesive Tapes, Inc., Compac Corp., Fasson or Morgan Adhesive Company. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Preliminary Work: Clean and dry ductwork, prior to insulating. '3.2 -:INSTALLATION A. General: Insulate ductwork with fiberous glass insulation,with a factory applied jacket of Class as specified. B. Ductwork services requiring blanket insulation includes the following: 1. Air conditioning supply air and return air installed in the attic shall be 2" thick, 6.00 pcf density ductwrap insulation. 2. Air conditioning supply air concealed in ceilings over spaces not air conditioned, or in furred spaces or shafts next to spaces not air conditioned 3. Air conditioning supply air concealed in ceilings over air conditioned spaces,or in shafts located completely in air conditioned spaces C. Blanket Insulation Application: Install insulation with all longitudinal joints overlapped a minimum of 2"and butt or lap all circumferential joints. Secure longitudinal and circumferential joints with flare door staples. Install loops or 16 gage steel wire on 12"centers on all straight duct runs and over all circumferential joints. Install loops of 16 gage wire on 6"centers on all elbows and duct fittings. Install duct insulation fasteners on the bottom side of all horizontal duct runs,when the bottom dimension of the duct is in excess of 32"in width. Install duct insulation fasteners on the sides of all duct risers having a dimension over 24" in size. DUCT INSULATION 15290H—2 17 Cronin Road Space fasteners in accordance with the following schedule: 4_ DUCT DIMENSIONkw `, .i SPACING OF FASTENERS (MINIMUIIA) Up to 32" None required on horizontal runs, 1 row- 16"on center on all duct riser sides over 24" in size. 33"to 48" 2 rows- 16"on centers. _ 49"to 60" 3 rows- 16"on centers. 61"and over 16"on center all directions. D. Bench Insulated Ductwork: 1. Insulate ducts prior to erection in place when ducts are required to be installed proximate to walls, ceilings, equipment or other ductwork,which will not permit adequate space for the installation of insulation,at a later date. Exercise reasonable care in the installati on of bench insulated ductwork, so that insulated surfaces are in perfect condition before and after installation. 2. Thermally line the interior surfaces of ducts, when the specified application of exterior insulation is impractical. Written permission from the Director must be received, prior to the substitution of lined ducts for exterior insulated ducts. Maintain interior cross-sectional areas of ducts, all as noted on drawings. i 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Samples: The Owner's representative may at his discretion,take field samples--of installed: insulation"for the purpose of checking materials and application. Reinsulate sample cut areas. . , END OF SECTION NO. 15290H s i 15290H—3 DUCT INSULATION 17 Cronin Road SECTION 15577H-PREFABRICATED CHIMNEYS PART GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions for each item specified. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Factory built chimneys shall be designed and installed in accordance with the requirements of the NFPA and all components shall be UL listed and . labeled. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 . MANUFACTURERS/COMPANIES -_- A. Dura-Vent Corporation.. B. Hart&Cooley Manufacturing Co. C. Selkirk Metalbestos, Division of the Wallace Murray Company 2.2 MULTI-WALL CHIMNEY - A. Fumish•a factory fabricated, round sectional, double walled chimney,with a stainless steel - - inner liner, a galvanized steel outer casing with twist lock end joints.- The prefabricated _ chimney shall be provided for each furnace. Chimney fittings, supports,anchor plates, roof flashing, storm collar, storm cap and other miscellaneous items shall be-of the same manufacture as the chimney. Termination cap shall be of the bird proof type. - PART 3 EXECUTION I - ' 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install chimney in accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation.instructions. END OF SECTION NO, 15577H V PREFABRICATED CHIMNEYS 15577H-1 17 Cronin Road SECTION 15650H -REFRIGERATION PART GENERAL 1,.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 1506OH: Pipe and Pipe Fittings B. Section 1514OH: Hangers and Supports. C. Section 15260H: Insulation D. Section 15992H: Cleaning and Testing E. Section 15889H:Wiring of Mechanical Equipment 1.2 SCOPE A. Provide a complete refrigeration piping system from the direct expansion cooling coil at the - unit ventilators and air handling units to the remote air-cooled condensing units. B. Provide a complete refrigeration piping system from the direct expansion cooling coil to the. remote air cooled condenser. C. Provide a:complete approved refrigerant piping system from•the manufacturer. The. refrigerant piping system shall include pipe sizes, arrangements and accessories. . . 1:3 SUBMITTALS Product Data: Manufacturers catalog sheets, performance charts, standard schematic drawings, specifications and installation instructions for all items'specified. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Test Reports: Provide system test reports in accordance with the Section entitled "Cleaning and Testing". Frame one set of test report sheets under glass and mount in a conspicuous manner on mechanical equipment room wall. Mounta second and third,set on stiff cardboard and bind into the maintenance manuals. C. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit two (2) copies to the Engineer, incorporated within maintenance manuals, covering the installed products. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Installation of refrigerating equipment shall be performed by skilled mechanics regularly engaged in refrigeration Work. REFRIGERATION- 15650H-1 17 Cronin Road . B. Regulatory Requirements: Refrigeration equipment and accessories shall be designed, constructed, tested, installed and shall operate in accordance with the following: L_ 1. ASHRAE 15 Safety Code for mechanical refrigeration 2. Applicable equipment standards of ARI 3. NFPA 4. All local Refrigeration, Fire and Safety Codes 5. All electrical components shall be U.L. listed 1.5 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: 1. Furnish one(1)spare thermostatic element assembly for each size expansion valve installed. 2. When thermal expansion valves are installed of a type that must be removed from the line for servicing, furnish a complete spare valve for each size installed. 3. Furnish all special tools required to maintain the refrigeration equipment. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 REFRIGERANTS A. Refrigerant 22: Monochlorodifluoromethane(CCHCLF2) .2.2 FILTER DRIERS A. Refillable Type: Furnish on tubing sizes 3/8"to 1-1/8" O.D B. Working Pressures: 300 psig with a pressure drop not to exceed two(2)psig in accordance with ARI Standard 710. C. Desiccants shall have moisture and acid removing qualities as well as the ability to entrap fine particles. 2.3 MOISTURE-LIQUID INDICATOR A. Type: Provide a visual check type designed to indicate moisture in the system by changing color and shortage of refrigerant or restriction in the liquid line by the presence of bubbles. B. Fabrication: 1. Body: Copper plated steel or non-porous forged brass with solder connections. 2. Sight Glass: Sealed and covered with a suitable removable cap to keep sight glass ` free of grease or dirt. C. Moisture Content: System moisture content shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's -- color calibration chart, based on the type of refrigerant and the operating liquid line temperature. REFRIGERATION 15650H-2 17 Cronin Road 1 2.4 THERMAL EXPANSION VALVES A. Type: Provide valves designed to meter the flow of refrigerant. Selection of type and size, most suitable for the particular refrigerant and application,shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2.5 SOLENOID VALVES A. Type: Provide valves of the normally closed type with manual lifting stem. When used in liquid refrigerant lines, pressure.drop through valves shall not exceed three (3) psig. Selection of type and size, most suitable for the particular application shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Install refrigeration equipment and accessories, as indicated on the drawings and as specified, in complete accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 SELF CONTAINED CONDENSING UNITS A. Install units on reinforced concrete pads. B. Pipe the condensing unit into the direct expansion coil with solenoid valves, refrigerant shutoff valves, sight-glass, expansion valve and all other specialties complete as required and as indicated on drawings. 3.3 REFRIGERATION ACCESSORIES i A. Filter Driers: Provide a filter drier in the liquid line of each system. B. Moisture-Liquid Indicators: Provide an indicator at point in refrigerant piping, where the refrigerant state at the entrance of the thermal expansion valve may be checked, and at - condensing units. -' C. Thermal Expansion Valves: j 1. Provide valves as close as possible to the evaporator inlets-, with the feeler bulb clamped to the suction line at a location where the bulb temperature will reflect the same temperature as the evaporator during the"off'cycle. 2. When indicated, install an externally.equalized thermal expansion valve and all equalizing connections, as required by the equipment installed. 3. When indicated, install a pressure limit type thermal expansion valve to prevent - refrigerant feed into the cooling coil, until the pressure has been reduced to the safe operating limits of the compressor motor, during subsequent pull down after defrosting and other warm pull-down conditions. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refrigeration Systems - Dehydration, Charging and Testing: Refer to Section entitled "Cleaning and Testing". i END OF SECTION NO. 15650H REFRIGERATION 15650H-3 17 Cronin Road SECTION 15652H-FAN COIL UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Work Specified Elsewhere A. Section 15060H:,Pipe and Pipe Fittings B. Section 1514OH: Hangers and Supports C. Section 15260H: Insulation D. Section 15992H: Cleaning and Testing - E. Section 15889H:Wiring of Mechanical Equipment F. Section 15951 H: Motors 1.2 Submittals A. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog sheets, performance charts, complete schematic wiring diagrams and drawings, specifications and installation instructions for all items specified. 1.3 Quality Assurance A. Qualifications: Installation of refrigerating equipment shall. be performed by skilled mechanics regularly engaged in refrigeration Work. . . B. Regulatory Requirements: Refrigeration equipment and accessories shall be designed, j constructed, tested, installed and shall operate in accordance with the following: 1. ASHRAE 15 Safety Code for mechanical refrigeration 2. Applicable equipment standards of ARI 3. NFPA 4. All local Refrigeration, Fire and Safety Codes 5. All electrical components shall be UL listed I C. Provide written approval of refrigeration piping diagram shown on plans, or submit revised piping diagram to Architect. D. Provide factory trained mechanic to checkout wiring and piping and assist in starting unit. i FAN COIL UNITS 15652H-1 17 Cronin Road PART PRODUCTS 2.1 Fan Coil Unit A. Indoor, direct-expansion, ceiling mounted fan coil unit. The unit shall be complete with coil, fan,fan motor, piping connectors,electrical controls,microprocessor control system,integral temperature sensing, and a holding charge of R-22 refrigerant. Unit shall be furnished with integral support-mounting bracket and fully insulated discharge and inlet grille. - B. Fan: Fan shall be centrifugal blower type. - C. Coil: Coil shall be copper tube with aluminum fins and galvanized steel tube sheets. Fins will be bonded to the tubes by mechanical expansion. A drip pan under the coil shall have a _ drain connection for hose attachment to remove condensate. , D. Motors: Motors shall be permanently lubricated with inherent overload protection. Fan motors shall be multi-speed. E. Controls: Controls shall consist of a electronic programmable thermostat system,which shall control space temperature, determine optimum three speed fan speed and run self - diagnostics. The unit shall have: 1. An automatic restart after power failure at the same operating conditions as at failure. 2. A timer function to provide a minimum 15-hour timer cycle for system on or off. 3. Temperature-sensing controls and a high discharge temperature shut down. 4. Wired control to enter set points and operating controls (required accessory). - 5. Filter status indication after 250 hours:of indoor fan operation. 6. Test mode button to run self-diagnostics and aid in troubleshooting. 7. Automatic changeover !_ F. Filters: Unit filters shall have filter track with factory-supplied cleanable filter. G. Electrical Requirements: Refer to equipment schedule.H. Special Features and Accessories: I 1. Wall mounted thermostat with automatic changeover and fan speed subbase. 2. Condensate pump 3. Fresh air intake kit 4. Power ventilation kit 2.2 Condensing Unit A. General: Factory assembled,single piece,air-cooled,outdoor unit. Contained within the unit enclosure shall be all factory wiring, piping,controls,compressor,charge of R-22 refrigerant, capillary tube metering device, and special features required prior to field start-up. B. Unit Cabinet: 1. Unit cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel, bonderized and coated with a baked enamel finish. -_ 2. Unit access panels shall be removable with minimal screws and shall provide full access to the compressor, fan, and control components. - FAN COIL UNITS 15652H-2 17 Cronin Road C. Fans: 1. Condenser fans shall be direct-drive propeller _ p p type, discharging air horizontally, drawing air through the condenser coil. 2. Condenser fan motors shall be totally enclosed, single phase motors with class A insulation and permanently lubricated ball bearings. Motor shall be protected by internal thermal overload protection. 3. Shaft shall have inherent corrosion resistance. - 4. Fan blades shall be corrosion resistant and shall be statically and dynamically balanced. 5. Condenser fan openings shall be equipped with PVC grille cover and screen protection grille. D. Compressor: 1. Compressor shall be hermetic rotary type. 2. Compressor shall be equipped with oil system, operating oil charge, suction line accumulator, muffler, eccentric shaft, and motor. 3. Motor shall be NEMA rated class F, suitable for operation in a refrigerant atmosphere. 4. Casing shall include discharge valves,discharge muffler,pump bearing,piston and _t vanes. 5. Compressor assembly shall be installed on rubber vibration isolators. I E. Condenser Coil: Coil shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to smooth seamless copper tubes, which are cleaned, dehydrated and sealed. F. Refrigeration Components:-Refrigerant-circuit components shall include liquid line service- calve, suction line service:valve-with service- gage connection port, 4-way valve on heat .: pumps, discharge line service port, accumulator,cooling capillary tubes,pressure relief,and an operating charge of refrigerant. G. Controls and Safeties: Operating controls and safeties shall be factory selected,assembled and tested. The minimum control.function shall include: 1. Controls: a. Time delay restart to prevent compressor short cycling b. Automatic restart on power failure 2. Safeties: a. High temperature protection - b. Freeze-up protection C. System diagnostics, - d. Compressor motor current and temperature overload protection e. High pressure relief f. Condenser fan failure protection H. Electrical Requirements: 1. All power and control wiring must be installed per the NEC and all local building codes. FAN COIL UNITS 15652H-3 17 Cronin Road r- I. Special Features (Field Installed): 1. Solid-State Head Pressure Control: Control shall regulate fan motor cycles in response to saturated condensing pressure of the unit. The control shall be capable of maintaining a condensing temperature of 1000F+/- 10❑F with outdoor temperatures to-20❑F. The condenser fan motor shall be required to be changed. 2. Snow Stand/Ice Stand: Unit shall be provided with a stand to raise the unit to a level to permit normal air circulation and condensate drainage in areas of snow accumulation. 3. Wind Baffle: Unit shall be equipped with a sheet metal wrapper to prevent wind gusts from affecting unit performance. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Application A. Install refrigeration equipment and accessories, as indicated on the drawings and as specified, incomplete accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Mount outdoor unit on suitable base to minimize vibration. C. Pipe the outdoor unit into the direct expansion coil with pre-charged refrigerant piping and all other specialties. - D. Install all refrigeration piping and equipment, accessories and piping employing experience contractors and mechanics. E. _'Fused disconnect-by Electrical Contractor. END OF SECTION NO. 15652H i FAN COIL UNITS 15652H-4 17 Cronin Road _i SECTION 15875H-GAS-FIRED FURNACE PART IGENERAL i 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 15891 H: Low Velocity Metal Ductwork B. Section 15889H: Wiring of Mechanical Equipment C. Section 15950H: Heating Motor Controllers D. Section 15577H: Pre-Fabricated Chimneys 1:2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings for each size unit with factory furnished accessories. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, performance charts, standard schematic drawings, specifications and installation instruction for each size unit. 1. Name, address and telephone number of nearest fully equipped service organization. -_} 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Provide gas-fired furnace for installation certified by the AGA 2. Electrical components shall be UL listed 3. Provide gas-fired furnace,which meet the New York State Energy Code 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY A. Deliver each unit as an integral factory packaged assembly. 1.5 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials:. Provide with each unit, one (1) spare set of air filters. Suitable box and label spare filters as to their usage. PART 2 PRODUCTS r 2.1 GAS-FIRED FURNACE A. General: Provide a gas-fired induced combustion up-flow furnace,providing a 80.0%annual fuel utilization efficiency (AFUE). Refer to drawings for size and capacity of gas-fired furnaces. The furnace shall consist of, but not limited to, the burner assembly, pressure switch, blower door safety switch control box, blower and.blower motor, heat exchanger, wrap around casing and side filter back. B. Cabinet shall be galvanized steel constructed with painted enamel finish. GAS-FIRED.FURNACE '15875H-1 17 Cronin Road C. Heat exchanger shall be constructed of aluminized steel with a twenty (20) year limited warranty. The heat exchanger shall be four(4) pass with an inducer assembly. D. Microprocessor Control Center shall be a electronic control board. The control board shall provide start up and shut down operation as well as monitoring the furnace functions. The _ control board provide a diagnostic check of major component failure and also check the inducer, silicon carbide ignition, low and high speed blower. The control board shall also include a 3-amp fuse to protect the transformer and control board. E. Igniter shall consist of a hot surface carbide ignition. F. Return filter rack shall consist of a factory fabricated filter rack with a removable access panel for filter access. Rack to accept extended throw-away filters 2.2 DIRECT EXPANSION COOLING COIL A. Provide direct expansion cooling coil to be attached to the discharge of each furnace. The cooling coil shall be a factory assembled unit and shall match the furnace discharge casing dimensions. - B. The coil shall be constructed of aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to non-ferrous tubing with all joints brazed. C. The coil casing shall be constructed of galvanized steel and shall be fully insulated. 1 D. Each coil shall be equipped with a corrosion-resistant condensate pan with two W female threaded pipe connections and is sloped to a self-drain. E. Coil capacity furnace and condensing unit shall be matched rated for a system capacity as scheduled on drawings. 2.3 AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNIT A. Provide an air cooled condensing unit for each furnace system, size and capacity as scheduled. B. The cabinet shall be galvanized steel with a layer of zinc phosphate with a coat of polyester power coating applied and baked on. C. The condensing unit motor shall be totally enclosed, and shall be a permanent-split- capacitor type. D. The coil shall be copper tube with aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to the copper tubing. i E. The unit shall be equipped with external inlet and outlet brass service valves. - F. Each compressor shall be protected with temperature and current sensitive overloads. G. The compressor shall be spring isolated. H. The unit shall be equipped with the following accessories high and low pressure cutouts, cycle protector, time-delay relay, compressor start assist-capacitor relay and low-ambient - control GAS-FIRED FURNACE 15875H-2 17 Cronin Road i J - PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION GENERAL A. Unless otherwise shown or specified, install the work.of this section in accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation instructions and the SMACNA manual. END OF SECTION NO. 15875H i GAS-FIRED FURNACE 15875H-3 17 Cronin Road SECTION 15889H -WIRING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 1601OH: Basic Electrical Requirements B. Section 1611OH: Raceways C. Section 1612OH:Wire and Cables D. Section 16135H: Electrical Boxes and Fittings E. Section 1619OH: Supporting Devices F. Section 16195H: Electrical Identification G. Section 1690OH:Wring of Mechanical Equipment H.. Section 15970H: Temperature Controls Electric 7 1.2. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications and.instructions for each item specified. 1.3 SCOPE A. It is the requirement of this specification to have the Heating Contractor(HC) provide and install all control wiring for equipment specified in Division 15H-for this project i n accordance with Division 16 Heating sections.-Control wiring may not be limited to low voltage wiring. _ B. This specifically includes all motors, starters, relays, control switches, and other incidental devices for complete control of the mechanical equipment. C. All control wiring shall be installed in conduit and attached securely to the building structure. D. Sizes of the motor circuit breakers and fuses shown on the drawings or in the specifications are based on criteria available at the time of design and are for bidding purposes only. E. The Mechanical Contractor,(HC)and the Electrical Contractor(EC) shall coordinate these sizes with: motors actually to be installed for correct motor short circuit and overload protection to insure that the electrical equipment is sufficient for the starting current of the motor and to insure compliance with all prevailing electrical codes. F. The EC shall size motor circuit breakers and fuses as directed by.HC coordination. The HC . —1 shall bear all costs for electric changes causes by equipment substitutions. WIRING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT -_ 15889H —1 17 Cronin Road PART 2 PRODUCTS - 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Refer to Division 16 Heating Specifications for product data. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install all electrical work in accordance with Division 16 Heating Sections and the latest National Electrical Code. END OF SECTION NO. 15889H WIRING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 15889H —2 17 Cronin Road SECTION 15891 H-METAL DUCTWORK ,PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section includes rectangular, round and flat-oval metal ducts and plenums for heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 2 to plus 2 inch wg. B. Related sections include the following: 1. Division 7 section "Joint Sealants" for fire-resistant sealants for use around duct penetrations and fire damper installations in fire rated floors, partitions and walls 2. Division 8 section "Access Doors" for wall and ceiling mounted access doors for access to concealed ducts 3. Division 15 section "Louvers"for intake and relief louvers and vents connected to ducts and installed in exterior walls 4. Division 15 section "Duct Insulation"for duct insulation 5. Division 15 section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound control devices, duct mounted access doors and panels, turning vanes and flexible ducts 6. Division 15 section "Registers, and Diffusers" 7. Division 15 section"Temperature Controls-Electric" 8 Division 15 section "Cleaning and Testing"for testing of mechanical systems" 9. Division 15 section "Balancing of Systems" for air balancing and final adjusting of manual volume dampers 1.2 DEFINITIONS - A. Thermal conductivity and apparent thermal conductivity (k-value): As defined in ASTM C 168. In this section,these values are the result of the formula Btu x in./hour x sq.ft.x deg F or W/m x K at the temperature differences specified. Values are expressed as Btu or W. 1. Example:Apparent thermal conductivity (k-value): 0.26 or 0.037 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Duct system design, as indicated, has.been used to select and size air moving and distribution equipment and other components of air system. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: Show details of the following: 1. Fabrication, assembly and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work 2. W = T-0' scaled reproducible sepias of metal ductwork and fittings including indicating pressure classifications and sizes on plans 3. Fittings 4. Reinforcement and spacing 5. Seam and joint construction 6. Penetrations through fire rated and other partitions METAL DUCTWORK 15891 H—1 17 Cronin Road 7. Terminal unit, coil and humidifier installations 8. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment,vibration isolation, seismic restraints and cut attachment B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling mounted items. Show the following: _ 1. Ceiling suspension assembly members 2. Other systems installed in same spaces as ducts 3. Ceiling and wall mounted access doors and panels required to provide access to dampers and other operating devices 4. Coordination with ceiling mounted items, including lighting fixtures,diffusers,grilles, speakers, sprinkler heads, access panels, and special moldings C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. D. Record Drawings: Indicate actual routing,fitting details, reinforcement,support and installed accessories and devices. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with.NFPA 9013, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems," unless otherwise indicated. - 1.6 DELIVERY; STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver sealant and firestopping materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color,expiration period for use, pot life, curing time and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle sealant and firestopping materials according to manufacturers written recommendations. C. Deliver and store stainless steel sheets with mill applied adhesive protective paper maintained through fabrication and installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 652/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view B. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized, sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless steel ducts !, C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, W minimum diameter for 36" length or less; 3/" minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36" - METAL DUCTWORK 15891 H—2 17 Cronin Road 2.2 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Joint and seam sealants,general:The term"sealant"is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open weave fabric strips and mastics. 1. Joint And Seam Tape: Two(2) inches wide; glass fiber fabric reinforced 2. Tape Sealing System: Woven fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum mineral compound and a modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form a hard, durable, airtight seal 3. Joint And Seam Sealant: One (1) part, non-snag, solvent release curing, polymerized butyl sealant, formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids 4. Flanges Joint Mastics: One(1)par,acid curing,silicone,elastomeric joint sealants, complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O 2.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder actuated fasteners, or structural steel fasteners appropriate for building materials. 1. Use powder actuated concrete fasteners for standard weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4"thick. 2. Exception: Do not use powder actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4"thick. B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel or round, threaded steel rod. .1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rod or.- galvanized rods with threads painted after installation. `2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with. SMACMA's -"HVAC Duct Construction:.: Standards Metal.and.Flexible" for sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters. i C. Duct Attachments:Sheet metal screws,blind rivets orself-tapping metal screws;compatible with duct materials. D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. Supports for Galvanized Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and plates 2. Supports for Stainless Steel Ducts: Stainless steel support materials 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support.materials, unless materials are electrolytically separated from ductwork 2.4 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction with galvanized,sheet steel,according to SMACNA's"HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible." Comply with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types and intervals. 1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure classification 2. Materials: Free from visual imperfections such as pitting,seam marks, roller marks, stains and discolorations METAL DUCTWORK 15891 H—3 17 Cronin Road B. Static Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated,construct ducts to the following: - I 1. Supply Ducts: 2"wg. 2. Return Ducts: 2"wg, negative pressure 3. Exhaust Ducts: 2"wg, negative pressure C. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading:Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19"and larger and 0.0359"thick or less,with more than 10 sq.ft.of unbraced panel area, unless ducts are lined PART 3- EXECUTION - 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate genera arrangements of ducts, fittings and accessories. i B. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated. C. Install round ducts in lengths not less than 12', unless interrupted by fittings. D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. E. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections. F. -Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. -'G. Install :ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and .horizontally,_parallel -and <perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs. _ H. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. I. Install ducts with a clearance of 1", plus allowance for insulation thickness. J. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, unless specifically indicated.K. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling,fire and smoke control dampers, lighting layouts and similar finished work. L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork.to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures. M. Non Fire Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct. Overlap opening on four sides by at least 1%". N. Fire Rated Partition Penetrations:Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping." METAL DUCTWORK 15891H—4 17 Cronin Road 3.2 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING A. General: Seal duct seams and joints according to the duct pressure class indicated and as '- described in SMACNA's"HVAC Duct Construction Standard's-Metal and Flexible." B. Pressure Classification Less Than 2"wg:Transverse joints C. Seal externally insulated ducts before insulation installation. 3.3 HANGING AND SUPPORTING A. Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat oval metal duct with support systems indicated in SMACNA's"HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible." B. Support horizontal ducts within 24"of each elbow and within 48"of each branch intersection. C. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16'and at each-floor. D. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of failure (proof test) load. E. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete. F. Install.powder actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. j '{ 3.4 _ ..CONNECTIONS `A. .:.,,Connect,equipment with flexible connectors- according to Division 15 Section 'Duct •_`Accessories." B. For branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal'unit connections-, comply.with SMACNA's"HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible." 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Disassemble, reassemble and seal segments of systems as required to accommodate leakage testing and as required for compliance with test requirements. B. Conduct tests, in presence of Architect, at static pressures equal -to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classifications are not indicated,test -- entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize system above maximum.design operating pressure. Give seven (7) days'advance notice for testing. C. Determine leakage from entire system or section of system by relating leakage to surface area of test section. D. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is less than maximum allowable. E. Leakage Test: Perform tests according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." METAL DUCTWORK 15891 H—5 17 Cronin Road i 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust volume control dampers in ducts, outlets and inlets to achieve design airflow. B. Refer to Division 15 Section"Testing,Adjusting and Balancing"for detailed procedures. S 3.7 CLEANING A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices,inspect the system. Vacuum ducts before final acceptance to remove dust and debris. END OF SECTION NO. 15891 H t _ i METAL DUCTWORK 15891 H—6 17 Cronin Road i SECTION 15910H-DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 15891 H: Metal Ductwork _I 1.2 REFERENCES A. ACGIH: American Conference of Govemmental Industrial Hygienists B. NFPA: National Fire Protection.Association i - C. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. D. UL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1.3 SUBMITTALS JIA. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog sheets, diagrams, standard schematic drawings, and installation instructions for each manufactured product. Submit SMACNA Figure Numbers for each shop fabricated item. - 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. -.-Unless otherwise shown or specified, comply with the applicable requirements of the following: Ja. SMACNA: Gages of materials;fabrication, sealing, and installation shall be in accordance with the HVAC Duct Construction Standards Manual. b. NFPA: Standards No.'s 90A, 90B, 91, 96, and 101. C. UL: Standards No. UL181, UL555, and UL555S. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 DAMPERS - A. Volume Control Dampers: Opposed blade type, frames of all welded construction utilizing channel iron members in galvanized steel ducts, extruded members in aluminum ducts and - stainless steel in stainless steel ducts. Fabricate frames-of 2 inch wide x%Z inch legs.x 1/8 inch. - thick(minimum)members for dampers less than 10 sq,ft in size and 2 inch wide x 1 inch leg x 1/8 inch thick(minimum)for larger sizes. Fabricate blades from No. 16 gage(minimum)metal, of same material as duct' in which installed, with 3 horizontal grooves, 2 turned,edges and trunnions mounted in brass sleeve or ball bearings. Space bearings on maximum 48 inch centers. Single blade dampers are unacceptable for ducts over 11 inches in height Weld motor mounting bracket to damper frame, for pneumatic or electric motor operated dampers. DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 15910H —1 17 Cronin Road r B. Splitter Dampers: Fabricate dampers of same material as duct in which installed,with rolled or hemmed edges. Provide blades in ducts having a maximum side dimension under twenty-four _ (24)inches of same gage as duct, and in ducts having a maximum side dimension twenty-four (24) inches and over provide blades two (2) gages heavier than duct. C. Fire Dampers, Dynamic Systems: 1. UL Classified and Labeled: a. Type FD-1: mark dampers in accordance with UL555, including but not limited to the following: 1) Fire Damper, 1%2 hr fire resistance rating 2) For use in dynamic systems 3) Maximum rated air flow and pressure difference across damper 4) Directional arrow indicating air flow 5) Mounting position (horizontal or vertical, or both) 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: - a. Air Balance, Inc., or Ruskin Manufacturing Div., Phillips Industries. 1) Furnish Style, or Type B (blades out of airstream when damper in open position) D. Manual Damper Regulators: 1. For Dampers Installed in Exposed, or Accessible Concealed Ductwork: Indicating quadrant with heavy metal handle and means for locking damper in all positions. -- 2. For Dampers Installed in Inaccessible Concealed Ductwork: Concealed type with indicating regulator in cast metal box with cover plate. Furnish assembly complete with - duct and bearing, adjustment coupling, damper extension rods and minimum of two (2) keys or socket wrenches for each type of damper adjustment screw or device. E. Adjustable Vaned Damper Assembly: Factory fabricated assemblies of same material as ductwork in which installed. Design assembly so either half of each blade may be adjusted independently,with blades held in position by friction pins. Install damper unit in collar gasketed with heavy felt. Design assembly to facilitate positive volume control and uniform air distribution over entire outlet. 2.2 TURNING VANE ASSEMBLIES A. Fabricate vane assemblies of same material as ductwork in which installed. Provide individual hollow airfoil type vanes, rigidly connected to vane rails,with rails welded,screwed,or riveted to the ductwork. -- 2.3 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS-FABRIC A. Glass fabric coated with an inorganic elastomeric material, similar to Duro Dyne's Thermafab. B. Factory pre-fabricated pre-assembled flexible connectors of fabric specified in A. above with minimum No. 24 USS gage metal edges similar to Duro Dyne's Metal-Fab or Super Metal-Fab as required for free fabric length. DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 1591 OH .—2 _ 17 Cronin Road 2.4 GASKET MATERIAL A. Registers, grilles and diffusers installed iri exposed uninsulated ductwork: %< inch thick felt or sponge rubber material, of width as required by the flange on the particular device. B. Flanged joints in ducts: %inch thick reinforced inert plastic of the self-conforming type,of same width as flange. 1. Exception: Use ceramic fiber paper as in C. below, where NFPA 96 allows flanged connections in cooking equipment exhaust ductwork. C. Access doors: %inch thick ceramic fiber paper,such as Fiberfrax Paper by Carborundum Co. 2.5 DUCT TAPE A. Arno's C 520;"Fasson's Fastape; Kendall's Polyken No. 222 2.6 SEALANTS - A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Duro Dyne Corp.;.Foster Products Div., H.B. Fuller Co.; Hardcast Inc.; United Sheet Metal Div., United McGill Corp. B. U.L. Listed adhesives (liquid or mastic), scrim, tapes, or combinations thereof, as required for pressure class; suitable for system operating temperatures; compatible with media conveyed within, insulation (if any), and ambient conditions. 2.7 FLEXIBLE DUCT - A. Conform with NFPA 90A, and UL 181, Class I: 1. Un-insulated: Dual element construction consisting of a corrosion resistant metal support spiral, mechanically locked to reinforced coated glass fabric, conforming to NFPA Standard 90A. 2. Pre-insulated: CertainTeed's Certaflex Punchline 25;Owens-Corning's INL-25;Wiremold WCK .3. Maximum length extended shall not exceed 36" 2.8 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Fabricate minimum 12 x 12.inch size, of same material and finish as duct unless otherwise shown or specified. 1. For uninsulated duct designed for under two(2)inches w.g.: Fabricate single panel door of same gage as duct, with all edges folded, size door to overlap opening perimeter by one inch. Provide door with a minimum of two (2) hinges and two (2) sash locks. 2. For insulated duct and duct designed for two(2)'inches w.g.and over: Fabricate hollow metal doors in accordance with the SMACNA Manual. Fill void in doors for insulated duct with thermally equivalent insulation. DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 15910H —3 17 Cronin Road i B. Provide doors with a'/ inch wide ceramic fiber paper gasket, around all four(4)sides of duct opening. 2.9 ACCESS DOOR HARDWARE i A. Butt Hinges: Galvanized steel with brass pins, approximately two (2) inches x 1-9/16 inches wide for doors under twenty-four(24)inches high and three(3)inches x two(2)inches wide for doors over twenty-four(24) inches and higher. B. Sash Locks: Galvanized, cadmium plated, or aluminized steel or cast aluminum. C. Door Latches: Ventfabrics, Inc. Ventlock No. 260 or Duro Dyne Corp. Code No. SP Series. 2.10 FUSIBLE LINK ATTACHMENTS A. For Registers and Grilles: Factory installed spring arrangement with 160°F rated fusible links. B. Thermally and Electrically Responsive Links: Air Balance's ETL electtrothermal link. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Unless otherwise shown or specified, install the Work of this section in accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation instructions and the SMACNA Manual. 3.2 FLEXIBLE FABRIC CONNECTORS (INSTALLATION) A. Make ductwork connections to air handling equipment with flexible fabric connectors. Install connectors with sufficient slack to prevent vibration transmission. B. Free Fabric Length: Install fabric connectors a minimum of three(3)inches in length for ducts having a maximum diameter of eighteen (18)inches, or maximum side dimension of thirty(30) - inches, and a minimum of five(5)inches in length for duct diameters over eighteen(18)inches or side dimensions over thirty (30) inches. C. Secure fabric connectors to fans, casings and ducts as follows: 1. Secure round connectors with No. 12 USS gage x 1 inch wide galvanized steel draw bands. Secure bands with bolts and nuts. 2. Secure rectangular connectors with 1 inch x%inch thick flat galvanized steel bars,with screws or bolts on maximum eight (8) inch centers, or with approved sheet metal slip joints. Tightly crimp fabric into sheet metal joint and secure complete joint with sheet metal screws on maximum six(6) inch centers. D. Fabric connectors may be factory pre-fabricated pre-assembled units, with minimum No. 24 USS gage metal edges, secured to fabric with double lock seams. E. Do not paint fabric connectors. D=PNORK ACCESSORIES 15910H —4 r 17 Cronin Road I 3.3 ACCESS DOORS A. Install gasketed access doors in ductwork at fire damper and at all locations where operating -- parts of any kind are installed and elsewhere as indicated. Access doors are not required, where a manually operated damper has an exposed 'damper regulator, with an indicating quadrant. END OF SECTION NO.15910H i -I i i DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 15910H —5 17 Cronin Road SECTION 15920H -REGISTERS, GRILLES AND.DIFFUSERS PART 1' GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 15891 H: Metal Ductwork 1.2 REFERENCES A. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association B. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. C. UL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog sheets, diagrams, standard schematic drawings, and installation instructions for each manufactured product. Submit SMACNA Figure Numbers for each shop fabricated item. B. Samples: When requested by the Engineer, submit one (1) complete unit for each type of - proposed air inlet and outlet device. Approved samples will be delivered to the job site for installation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE _ A. Regulatory Requirements:. 1. Unless otherwise shown or specified, comply with the applicable requirements of the following: a. SMACNA: Gages of materials, fabrication, sealing, and installation shall be in - accordance with the HVAC Duct Construction Standards Manual b. NFPA: Standards No.'s 90A, 90B, 91, 96, and 101 C. UL: Standards No. UL555 PART2 PRODUCTS i 2.1 GRILLES AND REGISTERS A. Unless otherwise specified,fabricate all register faces,and frames of steel with factory applied finish as follows: 1. Baked-on white enamel for installation in splined acoustic ceilings, metal pan ceilings and suspended lay-in tile ceilings. - B. Return Registers (RR-1) 1. The return registers shall have a nominal 24"x 24" drawn back.pan with square neck connections. The perforated faceplate shall be constructed of minimum 22 gauge steel with not less than a 50% area pattern and shall have an unperforated visible margin around the perimeter. The faceplate finish shall-be white with the back pan painted flat black for masking. Provide opposed blade damper. REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS 15920H-1 17 Cronin Road 2.2 AIR DIFFUSERS A. Square type as indicated. Do not use neck or duct connection sizes indicated to size diffusers. B. In general, fabricate diffusers of steel with a white baked enamel finish, unless otherwise specified. Roll or round and reinforce all exposed edges of diffusers and provide readily removable internal diffuser parts to permit cleaning and access to ducts. Design removable parts and assemblies so that they cannot be reassembled in a manner,which would produce an incorrect air distribution pattern. Secure internal assemblies with fasteners,which will allow their removal without use of special tools. C. Square Diffusers: Complete with volume control damper (and adjustable equalizing grid), fabricated of same material as diffuser. Damper shall be adjustable by means of operator — handle and rod device, which is designed to be locked in any position. Diffusers installed in plaster ceilings shall have plaster grounds and anti-smudge rings of same material and finish as diffuser, or diffuser shall have specially designed outer rings or rims with contours of sufficient depth below ceiling line to minimize smudging. 1. Surface Mounted Diffuser Type CD-1: Manufacturers Carnes Model#SKFA with KXKA(Steel); Anemostat Model#SDF with DOB (Steel); Titus Model#TIC-1 with AG-95 (Steel); Tuttle Model ME with OBD (Steel),#AME with A7. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Unless otherwise shown or specified, install the Work of this section in accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation instructions and the SMACNA Manual. END OF SECTION NO. 15920H REGISTERS,GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS 15920H-2 17 Cronin Road i SECTION 15950H -HEATING MOTOR CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Heating Contractor (HC) shall furnish all motor controls and starters as required by this contract. Except those motors specifically indicated in the equipment schedules to be provided and installed by Division 16 in the motor.control center. B. HC shall be responsible for coordination of motor(s)with motor short circuit and overload protection device(s). 1. For motors and.devices within this contract 2. For motors within this contract and devices furnished by others(i.e.,circuit breakers and/or fuses in panels famished by the Electrical Contractor(EC) 3. For compliance of the devices with the N.E.C. 4. To ensure device(s) is sufficient for the starting current of the motor(s) 5. All costs resulting from this coordination shall be borne by the HC and EC, as regards their own work. a.- In the event of substitutions by the HC, all costs for revising attendantwork . by other trades shall be borne exclusively by the HC. 1.2 ACCEPTABLE STANDARDS A. Cutler Hammer Notations or approved equal The starter manufacturer shall coordinate the-starter with the motor actually to be installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTOR STARTERS . A. Unless otherwise noted, the following.features apply to all motor starters: 1. Hand-Off-Auto selector switch in cover 2. Pilot light in cover for: a. All exhaust fans b. All motors out of sight from, or more than 50'from-the motor starter 3. Overload protection based on Motor Nameplate Data per N.E.C. 4. General purpose NEMA 1 or 1 B enclosure,except flush mounted for manual starters _ in finished areas 5. 120 volt A.C, control transformer with primary and secondary fuse protection B. Manual Starters I 1. NEMA size"0",.115/230 volts 2. For single-phase motors less than Y2 Hp or unless otherwise noted HEATING MOTOR CONTROLS 15950H—1 17 Cronin Road C. Three-phase Magnetic Starters: 1. For all motors '/2 Hp or greater, unless otherwise noted. 2. Three overload relays, one(1)each phase. 3. 120 volt control circuit transformer; primary fuses, secondary line side fused; secondary coil side grounded;sized for starting coil;two(2)pilot lights,and one(1) auxiliary relay minimum. 4. Name size minimum size starter. 5. One(1)extra auxiliary normally open contact. 6. Operation of the disconnect switch shall disconnect all electric power within the - starter, including outside control power, to be accomplished by contacts on the disconnect switch, remote auxiliary relays, or other approved means. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Heating Contractor shall furnish, to the Electrical Contractor, all HVAC equipment motor - starters not factory mounted. Electrical Contractor to mount and wire. END OF SECTION NO. 15950H I HEATING MOTOR CONTROLS 15950H—2 - 17 Cronin Road i SECTION 15951 H -MOTORS -- 1.1 GENERAL A. Specific motor'requirements for mechanical equipment are scheduled on the drawings. B. This section includes, but is not limited to,factory-installed motors furnished as an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment. C. Motors shall conform to NEMA Standards MG1, Motors and Generators. D. Motors shall comply with the National Electric Code. E. Electrical components shall be UL labeled. 2.1 MOTORS A. General The following are basic requirements for simple or common motors. For special motors, more detailed and .specific requirements are specified in the individual equipment specifications. ^! 1. Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven loads. 2. Motor sizes shall be large_enough so that the driven load will not require'the motor to _ operate in the service factor range. 3. Two (2) speed motors shall have two(2)separate windings on polyphase motors. 4. Temperature Rating: Rated for400C environment with maximum 500C temperature rise for continuous duty at full load (Class A Insulation). 5. Service Factor: 1.15 poly-phase motors and 1.35 for single phase motors. 2.2 MOTOR CONSTRUCTION NEMA Standard MG1,general purpose, continuous duty, Design "B",except"C'where required for high starting torque. A. Frames NEMA Standard No.48 or 54; use driven equipment manufacturer's standards to suit specific application. j . B. Bearings 1. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals 2. Re-greasable, except permanently sealed where motor is normally inaccessible for regular maintenance 3. Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce lateral or axial thrust in motor 4. For fractional horsepower, light duty motors, sleeve type bearings are permitted MOTORS 15951 H—1 17 Cronin Road . C. Enclosure Type 1. Open drip-proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation. 2. Weather protected Type I for outdoor use,Type II where not housed.D. Overload Protection Built-in thermal overload protection and,where indicated,internal sensing device suitable for signaling and stopping motor at starter. E. Efficiency "Energy Efficient'motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled in accordance with ANSI/IEEE 112-1984-IEEE Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators. F. Noise Rating "Quiet' rating on motors located in occupied spaces of building. - TABLE MINIMUM NOMINAL FULL-LOAD MOTOR EFFICIENCY OPEN MOTORS POLES 6 4 2 HP'RPM 1200 1800 3600 1.0 80.0 82.5 1.5 84.0 84.0 82.5 2.0 86.5 84.0 84.0 3.0 86.5 86.5 84.0 - 5.0 88.5 87.5 85.5 7.5 89.5 88.5 87.5 10 90.2 89.5 88.5 15 91.0 90.2 89.5 20 90.2 91.0 90.2 - 25 91.7 92.4 91.0 30 92.4 93.0 92.4 40 93.0. 93.0 92.4 50 92.4 94.1 92.4 60 93.0 93.6. 93.0 75 93.6 94.1 93.6 100 93.6 94.1 93.6 125 94.1 94.1 93.6 150 94.5 94.5 94.5 200 94.5 95.0 95.4 -- MOTORS 15951 H-2 17 Cronin Road - I ' CLOSED MOTORS POLES 6 4 2 HP RPM 1200 1800 3600 1.0 81.5 84.0 - 1.5 85.5 85.0 84.0 2.0 86.5 84.0 85.5 3.0 88.5 88.5 86.5 5.0 88.5 88.5 87.5 7.5 89.5 91.0 88.5 10 89.5 91.0 89.5 15 90.2 91.0 89.5 20 91.0 91.7 90.2 25 91.7 92.4 90.2 30 92.4 93.6 91.0 40 93.0 93.0 91.0 50 93.6 93.6 92.4 60 93.6 94.1 94.1 75 94.1 94.5 . 94.1 100 94.1 95.0 94.1 125 94.1 95.0 94.1 150 95.0 95.0 94.1 200 95.0 95.8 95.0 2. _. Efficiency is the ratio of useful output power to total input power expressed as a percent. END OF SECTION NO. 15951 H _I l MOTORS 15951 H-3 17 Cronin Road- r SECTION 15970H—TEMPERATURE CONTROLS-ELECTRIC PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. A complete temperature control system as manufactured and installed by: 1. Encon Controls 2. Landis Stafea 3. Johnson Controls B. Requirements of the Temperature Control Subcontractor: 1. All temperature control equipment as herein specified and as necessary for complete installation. 2. All necessary shop drawings, submittals and.wiring diagrams. 3. Supervision of installation and installing personnel. 4. All calibrations, adjustments and a final check of the equipment operation. 5. Instruction of the operating personnel. 6. Guarantee the equipment and its installation for a period of one(1)year. 7. All control wiring for equipment specified and/or installed under Division 15 shall be provided and installed under this division in accordance.with Division 16 sections. 8. All control wiring shall be installed in conduit. 9. Review EC's drawings and figure any additional control wiring not shown. C. The scope of the work is to provide an electric-electronic control system of the following: 1. Gas Fired Furnace with D.X. cooling 2. Fan Coil Unit i 1.2 WORK NOT INCLUDED i A. All power wiring shall be provided and installed by the EC. B., All control dampers shall be furnished,by the M.C.-and installed by the M.C. Balancing dampers shall be furnished and installed by the M.C. • PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS " _l A. Control Dampers 1. Construction a. '16 gauge frames, 16'gauge blades, Y2'zinc-plated shafts. _ b. Size: 2"increments with adjustable baffles for tight fit. c. Non-stick, noncorrosive bearings. -i d. Seals: Type A damper-Neoprene blade seals and flexible metal compression type jamb seals; insulated blade with double skin construction; leakage to be less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of surface area at 4 inches static pressure differential. TEMPERATURE CONTROLS—ELECTRIC 15970H—1 17 Cronin Road e. Flow characteristics Provide leakage and flow characteristics curve for all dampers. 2. Application: - a. Type A damper-install at all outside air intake and exhaust applications. B. Valve Motors 1. Size each motor to operate valves with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or 2-position action as specified. - 2. Provide permanent split-capacitor or shaded pole type motors with gear trains completely oil-immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors,where indicated on drawings or in operational sequence,with integral spiral-spring mechanism. Furnish entire spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer. 3. Equip motors for outdoor locations and for outside air intakes with "O ring" gaskets designed to make motors completely weatherproof,and equip with internal heaters to permit normal operation at-40OF (-400C). 4. Furnish non-spring return motors for dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., and for valves larger than 2%2', sized for running torque rating of 150 inch-pounds, and breakaway torque rating of 300 inch-pounds.Size spring-return motors for running torque rating of 150 inch-pounds, and breakaway torque rating of 150 inch-pounds. C. Room Thermostats 1. Room thermostats shall be mounted approx.60"above finished floors and adjacent to light switches. Where there is a question concerning mounting location, Architect or Engineer will determine final location. PART3 SEQUENCE 3.1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. GAS FIRED FURNACE WITH D.X. COOLING OCCUPIED HEATING AND COOLING MODE 1. The furnace fan shall operate continuously through the furnace programmable thermostat. 2. If the space temperature is below the setpoint of the space thermostat,the electric outside air damper shall remain closed and the electric return air damper shall be open. -- 3. As the space temperature begins to warm,the furnace unit electric outside air modulates open to the preset minimum position. 4. The space programmable thermostat energizes the gas heater section to maintain room setpoint. 5. If the space temperature continued to rise above the thermostat setpoint, the refrigeration system will be automatically energized. 6. Provide a low limit thermostat to de-energize the furnace and closed the outside air damper when the discharge temperature drops below 55°F. i I TEMPERATURE CONTROLS—ELECTRIC 5 0 1 97 H—2 17 Cronin Road UNOCCUPIED HEATING MODE 1. The space temperature will be reset to the unoccupied setpoint. 2. The outside air damper will remain closed. 3. The furnace fan and heat exchanger will cycle to maintain the lower night setback temperature. UNOCCUPIED.COOLING MODE 1. The furnace and condensing unit will be deenergized. B. FAN COIL UNIT FC-2 , OCCUPIED COOLING MODE 1. If the space temperature rises above the fan coil FC-2 thermostat setpoint the refrigeration system and the outside air fan will be energized. UNOCCUPIED COOLING MODE 1. The fan coil unit, outside air fan and condensing unit will be deenergized. i END OF SECTION 15970H j 1 _J n TEMPERATURE CONTROLS—ELECTRIC 15970H—3 17 Cronin Road SECTION 15992H-CLEANING AND TESTING -, PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ' A. Section 15993H: Balancing of Systems 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Control Submittals 1. Test Reports (Field Tests): a. Low Pressure Steam or Hot Water Heating Boilers: Submit test results on Boiler Test Record,' Form BDC-360, or a similar test report form, which includes the data shown on Form BDC-360. b. .. Propylene Glycol System Test: Submit test results on Test Record - Propylene Glycol Systems, New York State Form BDC-359,or a similar test report form,which includes the data shown on Form BDC-359. 1.3' QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. _ Perform factory testing of factory fabricated equipment in complete accordance with the agencies having jurisdiction. 2. Perform field testing of piping systems in complete accordance with the local utilities and other agencies having jurisdiction and as specified. . - 1.4 . PROJECT CONDITIONS } A. Protection: During test Work, protect controls, gages and accessories, which are not designed to_withstand test pressures. Do not utilize permanently installed gages for field testing of systems. 1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING. A. Transmit written notification of proposed date and time of operational tests to the Owner's representative at least five(5) days in advance of such tests. B. Perform cleaning and testing Work in the presence of the Owner's representative. C. Pressure test piping systems inside buildings,at the roughing-in stage of installation, before piping is enclosed by construction Work, and at other times as directed. Perform test operations in sections as required and directed, to progress the Work in a satisfactory manner and not delay the general construction of the building.'Valve or cap-off sections of - piping to be tested, utilizing valves required to be installed in the permanent piping systems, or temporary valves or caps as required to perform the Work. CLEANING AND TESTING 15992H—1 17 Cronin Road PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Test Equipment and Instruments: Type and kind as required for the particular system under test. B. Test Media (air, gas, refrigerant, vacuum, water): As specified for the particular piping or system under test. C. Cleaning Agent (chemical solution, steam, water): As specified for the particular piping, apparatus or system being cleaned. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PRELIMINARY WORK A. Thoroughly clean pipe and tubing prior to installation. During installation, prevent foreign matter from entering systems. Prevent if possible and remove stoppages or obstructions from piping and systems. B. Thoroughly clean refrigerant pipe and similar systems prior to pressure or vacuum testing. 3.2 PRESSURE TESTS-PIPING A. Piping shall be tight under test and shall not show loss in pressure or visible leaks, during test operations or after the minimum duration of time as specified. Remove piping,which is not tight under test; remake joints and repeat test until no leaks occur. - B. Water Systems: — 1. Circulating water systems, including propylene glycol solution systems and cold water make-up piping connections to heating, ventilating, air conditioning and refrigeration systems, unless otherwise specified: a. Before final connections are made perform hydrostatic test at 1 Y2 times the maximum working pressure, but not less than 125 psig, for four(4) hours. b. After final connections are made perform hydrostatic retest at a pressure — equal to maximum operating system design pressure, but not less than thirty (30) psig, for four(4) hours. 3.3 TESTING OF EQUIPMENT,APPARATUS AND APPURTENANCES A. Hot Water Boilers: Perform hydrostatic test at 170 psig, after installation, with piping connections shut-off. B. Relief Valves: Increase pressure in equipment or apparatus to relief valve setting, to test opening of valves at required relief pressures. - I CLEANING AND TESTING 15992H—2 17 Cronin Road i 3.4 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS-CLEANING AND OPERATIONAL TESTING A. Circulating Water Systems: 1. Cleaning: Flush systems and apparatus, upon completion of pressure and miscellaneous tests. Completely open valves and flush each system with clean water, prior to chemical cleaning. Repeatedly flush at short intervals until twice the system water capacity has been flushed through. Chemically clean systems immediately following flushing operations. Circulate a solution consisting of trisodium phosphate, in a proportion of one pound of chemical to every fifty (50) gallons of water in the system. Completely fill system with cleaning solution; vent system and place in operation, with automatic controls operating and valves fully open. Allow system to reach design operating temperature or an operating temperature designated by the Owner's representative. Circulate the solution through the system for a minimum of four(4)consecutive hours; immediately drain system and flush with clean water until the pH at the farthest drain matches the clean water input. Keep strainers unplugged during cleaning operations. Remove and clean strainer screens prior to operational test. Refill system with clean water. 2. Operational Test: Run system in an automatic mode for a minimum of 120 consecutive hours. During this time,make final adjustments,including the setting of the balancing valves. END OF.SECTION NO. 15992H CLEANING AND TESTING 15992H—3 17 Cronin Road I , SECTION 15993H-BALANCING OF SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 15992: Systems Cleaning, Pressure and Operational Testing 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Testing, Adjustment and Balancing Reports: a. Submit final testing and balancing results on applicable report forms, as approved or furnished by the environmental systems balancing council or _ bureau,which is certifying the independent member agency performing the Work, required by this Section. Each final systems report form shall bear the signature of the person performing the Work and recording the data and the signature of the certified supervisor for the performing agency. Submit simultaneously with the final reports, a list of the instruments used with the last date of calibration for each instrument. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Provide the services of a certified independent agency for the testing, adjustment and balancing of all air distribution and hydronic distribution systems complete with all connected apparatus and equipment. The agency, shall be certified by the Associated Air Balance Council Bureau -AABC, Los Angeles, Cal. 90026 or by National Environmental Balancing Bureau -NEBB, Arlington,Va. 22209. 2. The Work shall be performed by skilled mechanical technicians under the direct supervision of certified personnel in the employ of the independent agency. The supervisor shall be personally certified by the national council or bureau, as approved by the Engineer. 1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Scheduling: 1. Perform environmental systems testing and balancing after cleaning,miscellaneous testing, adjustment and operational testing Work has been completed. 2. Test and balance system during a period of time when outside temperature conditions will impose a significant load on the system; i.e., summer months.for air conditioning system,winter months for heating system. Balance and adjust systems accordingly. Return to the site as required. 3. Send written notification to the Owner's representative a minimum of five (5) days prior to the performance of_testing and balancing Work. Perform testing and balancing Work in the presence of the Owner's representative. BALANCING OF SYSTEMS 15993H—1 17 Cronin Road PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT A. General Information: Test instruments are included in this specification for information only. Balancing of air and hydronic systems shall be performed by qualified personnel utilizing company owned test instruments,which will remain the property of the company. Use test instruments,which are in first class operating condition,with individual calibration histories to guarantee their accuracy. Test instruments shall be of type and kind as required by the type of system installed. Trade names and manufacturer's names are mentioned in this section for descriptive purposes only; instruments of equivalent range and capabilities may be utilized. B. Air Balancing Instruments: 1. Manometers: Inclined with ranges of 0 to 1/4"and 0 to 1';Combination inclined and vertical with a range of 0 to 5" and U tube type, 18" 2.- Portable"Magnehelic" Draft Gages: Ranges 0 to 1/2", 0 to 1"and 0 to 5" 3. Anemometers: Deflecting vane type with a range of 100 to 3000 fpm, similar to Alnor Velometer Model 6000 BP and 4"diameter rotating vane type 4. Pitot Tubes: ASHRAE standard type, stainless steel, 5/16" diameter, lengths as required 5. Sling Psychrometer 6. Smoke Candles and Smoke Generator C. Air Systems Balancing Instruments: 1. Thermometers: 12"mercury column type and dial type,with a range of-40 to+120 degrees F. and 0 to 220:degrees F. Total of four thermometers 2. Universal Hand Tachometer: Herman H. Sticht Type U.H 3. Stop Watch 4. Stroboscope 5. Contact Pyrometer: Thermocouple type 6. Volt-Ohm-Ammeter Test Kit, High Current Type: Sperry"Ohmprobe" 7. Volt-Ammeter: With leads for connecting to lugs PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: Prior to the environmental testing and balancing of air distribution systems, the certified supervisor in the employ of the testing and balancing agency shall inspect the installations and notify the Owner's representative of any Work which must be performed or modified prior to initiating testing and balancing procedures. B. Performance: Test and balance environmental hydronic and air distribution systems, including all connected equipment and apparatus,so as to conform to the design conditions. Perform the Work of this section in accordance with the published standards of the balanci ng council or bureau,which is certifying the member firm. Record all test readings,calculations and results. END OF SECTION NO. 15993H BALANCING OF SYSTEMS 15993H—2 17 Cronin Road i_ i I i SECTION 16000H -ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions.of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of electrical related work required by this section is indicated on drawings. B. Electrical Scope The following is a general listing of work items to be provided under this Contract which is not necessarily all inclusive, nor shall it limit the extent of the work or exclude any work shown or specified and not listed: 1. Temperature control wiring 2. Power wiring to temperature control valves and damper actuators 1.3 MECHANICAL WORK ' A. Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, it is the requirement of this specification to have the Heating Contractor (HC) provide and install all CONTROL work for this project in accordance with Division 16 Sections.The Electrical Contractor(EC)shall be responsible for all the POWER work to the mechanical equipment(not to include any power wiring inside . .: factory supplied control cabinets). The CONTROL-work specifically includes all motors, starters, relays, switches, control valves, dampers, wiring and other incidental devices for complete control and interlocking of the mechanical equipment Control voltage includes 120 volt and below. The POWER work specifically includes all conduit, wire, disconnects and other incidental devices for complete power feeds to mechanical equipment. The Heating Contractor and the Electrical Contractor shall coordinate these sizes with the motors to actually be installed for correct motor short circuit and overload protection to ensure that the electrical equipment is sufficient for the starting current of the motor; and to ensure compliance with all prevailing electrical codes. The EC shall size motor,circuit breakers,and fuses as directed by HC's coordination. The HC shall bear all costs for electric changes caused by equipment substitutions. PART 2-PRODUCTS . 2.1 WIRE AND CABLE A. Wire and cable shall include copper conductors, fixture wires,switchboard wires,and Type MC cable and shall be required for power distribution circuitry, lighting circuitry, equipment circuitry, motor-branch circuitry,and system circuitry. All conductors shall be a minimum of #12 AWG and conform to the.latest requirements of NEC, UL,ASTM, and NEMA. B. Cables shall be Type MC,Metal-clad cable with separate insulated green ground conductor, used for dry locations; concealed in walls and/or ceilings. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16000H—1 17 Cronin Road PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Wherever any material,operation, method or device is mentioned, listed or noted within this Division of the specification or on the plans, unless specifically mentioned as furnished by others, said material, operation or device (including all necessary labor, materials and appliances in connection with same) shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor. B. Wire and cable 1. Install electrical cables, wires and connectors in compliance with manufacturer's - written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices. Unless otherwise indicated, all wiring shall be, concealed in walls, and above ceiling. Branch, Lighting and control circuit wiring shown on drawings with no identification or cross-lines indicates 2 #12 AWG and 1 #12 AWG green insulated ground. Branch circuit home runs are indicated by arrow with circuit designated. Unless otherwise indicated all branch circuit wiring shall be in 3/4"conduit and shall be#12 AWG. In spaces where conduit runs are not shown, connect all lighting fixtures to - switch or switches in space or area designated.Connect circuits to phases indicated and provide a neutral with each phase conductor and/or with each group of different phase(2 or 3). Phase connections to all panelboards shall be."A","B","C",from left to right when facing panels. Taps and splices for#10 wire and smaller shall be made with pressure type self-insulated spring connectors. For wire#8 and larger, taps and splices shall be insulated with rubber and/or plastic electrical tape compatible with.the conductor insulation. Split bolt or"servits"shall not be allowed — Keep splices to a minimum. Wires shall not be installed in conduits until an masonry, concrete or plaster is fully dried. Only approved lubrication shall be used for pulling wires. Unused wires in any outlet box shall be left neatly coiled in outlet _ box. 2. Open wiring runs,Type MC cable,and flexible metal conduit,where specified,shall be gathered together throughout the installation,neatly cabled with plastic cable ties, Thomas and Betts "Ty-Rap'; or equal and secured in an approved manner to the building construction. Open wiring runs, where specified, shall be run in conduit where they pass through floors,walls and roofs. These conduits shall be sealed as - required to maintain the smoke and/or fire rating of the conduit. Those portions of branch circuit wiring above accessible type suspended ceilings may consist of flexible conduit or Type MC cable. However, in all instances interconnection to wiring in conduit shall be made at accessible junction boxes above suspended ceiling. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16000H—2 17 Cronin Road - - 3.1 SLEEVES, CHASES, OPENINGS AND PATCHING A. Sleeves, chases, and openings through floors,walls, ceilings and structural members shall be arranged in conjunction with the.Architect and related trades to be installed in an approved manner. Seal all openings through fire-rated walls and floors after installation of conduits, busways, wireways, etc., in a manner to preserve fire rating that existed prior to making the opening/penetration. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to energization,test cable and wire for continuity of circuitry,and also for short circuits. Correct malfunctions when detected. B. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. END OF SECTION NO. 16000H i f F - _I J _J I ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16000H—3 - 17 Cronin Road SECTION 16010H -BASK ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of electrical related work required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division 16 sections. B. Electrical Scope The following is a general listing of work items to be provided under this Contract which is not necessarily all inclusive, nor shall it limit the extent of the work or exclude any work shown or specified and not listed: 1. Installation of conduit, fittings and miscellaneous devices for routing of HVAC controls. 2. Operationally test and check all installed equipment. C. Work also includes minor items, which may not be shown or mentioned, but are necessary = for a complete, working electrical installation. If, in the interpretation of contract documents, it appears that the drawings and specifications are not in agreement, the one (1) requiring the greater quantity or superior quality shall- prevail,as decided by the Engineer. Addenda supersede the provisions,which they amend. D. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Applicable local, state and national laws, statutes, building codes and regulations shall govern the complete installation. I Comply with standards of utility companies furnishing services to the project. Drawings and specifications shall take precedence when they are more stringent. E. Permits: Obtain permits and pay all fees required by the local inspecting authority. F. Reference Standards: The latest editions of the following codes, standards; and specifications shall be considered minimum requirements: 1. National Electrical Code (NFPA#70) 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 101, 12A, 72D, 72E, 75) 3. Life Safety Code(NFPA#101) 4. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010H—1 17 Cronin Road G. 'Tests and Adjustments: The Electrical Contractor shall furnish testing equipment, instruments and personnel to perform any test procedures and adjustments deemed necessary by the Engineer to establish proper performance and installation of electrical -- equipment and materials. 1.3 DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION A. Dimensional information used for layout and locqtions shall be taken from architectural or structural drawings used by the construction trades. B. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic and have no dimensional significance. Locations of equipment are to be as: 1. Shown on Architectural drawings 2. Directed in the field 3. Required for proper connection of equipment to be served 4. Required for proper symmetry in the space involved - 5. With deviations made only with specific approval of Architect C. Division 16 shall review the drawings of other divisions,exchange shop drawings with them, cooperate in the preparation or prepare space layouts as required, to avoid conflicts and interferences with the installation of other trades in advanced stages of construction. D. The Owner or Owner's representative reserves the right to relocate an outlet or outlets,six (6)feet in any direction from locations indicated on plans, before roughing-in,with no change in contract price. j 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit shop drawings,wiring diagrams or equipment lists _ for the following equipment and material in accordance with criteria outlined in Division 1 of the project specifications. Shop Wiring Equipment B. Description Drawings Diagram List Conduit X X Wiring Devices & Plates X X - Equipment list shall indicate mfg. and catalog/model series number of each item. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Make provisions for delivery and safe storage of all materials. Check and properly receipt material to be "furnished by others" to Contractor, and assume full responsibility for all materials while in storage with full visible identification and information. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010H-2 17 Cronin Road 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Existing Conditions: Field verify existing conditions that wilf determine exact locations, distances, levels,dimensions,elevations,etc. Review all drawings of other trades and report any conflicts to the Architect/Engineer,which will affect the project cost. B. The existing facility will be occupied and functioning during the entire duration of construction. Care should be taken when working in or around occupied spaces. There will be no interruption in utilities without written approval. 1.7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING OF WORK: A. Reference DIVISION 1, Section 1A.2, "Project Requirements' for a description of requirements regarding coordination and scheduling of work under this project. B. Prime Time Electrical Work will be required. Electrical work requiring shutdown of power, interruption of telephone,fire alarm and/or security systems are to be scheduled during prime time unless written authorization from the Owner or Owner's representative is obtain. Prime time is described as work performed beyond regular working hours such as weekends, including long holiday weekends.The following is presumed to be accomplished under prime time, however other electrical work to be performed in conjunction with other trades may require weekends or holidays to avoid disruption of Court activities: 1. Electrical Contractor is to coordinate with all other trades regarding prime time work as an electrician may be required during prime time hours to maintain temporary power, connect equipment to electrical feeders, electrically test equipment or other trade related work not directly connected to the electrical contract. PART 2-PRODUCTS I 2.1 MATERIALS I A. Acceptable electrical materials and equipment shall be new and of the type and quality specified or shown on drawings. They shall be listed.by Underwriters Laboratories,Inc.and bear their label where standards have been established. B. Permission to substitute equal or superior items of materials and equipment may be requested by following the procedure outlined in the Division 1 "Supplementary General Conditions"of the project specifications. Completion date will not be extended because of any time lost due to consideration or installation of substitutions. All coordination of - substituted equipment shall be the Contractor's responsibility. - PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTIONS A. Notify proper authorities for inspections of work required by applicable codes, rules or regulations. B. Operational test will be performed on all electrical equipment as recommended by the applicable manufacturer. Test all wiring and connection for continuity and grounds before energizing any system. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010H—3 17 Cronin Road I C. Clean up, remove all waste material,and clean all lamps, lenses, lighting fixtures,cabinets, and electrical equipment prior to final inspection. 3.2 SLEEVES, CHASES, OPENINGS AND PATCHING A. Sleeves, chases, and openings through floors,walls, ceilings and structural members shall be arranged in conjunction with the Architect and related trades to be installed in an approved manner. B. Seal all openings through fire-rated walls and floors after installation of conduits, busways, wireways, etc., in a manner to preserve fire rating that existed prior to making the opening/penetration. END OF SECTION NO. 16010H I- I j BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010H—4 17 Cronin Road SECTION 1611 OH -RACEWAYS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is a Division 16 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to electrical raceways specified herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of raceway work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of raceways specified in this section include the following: 1. Rigid Galvanized Steel (RGS) 2. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) 3. Intermediate metal conduit(IMC) 4. Flexible metal conduit 5. Liquid-tight flexible conduit(Sealtite) 6. Conduit fittings PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. General: All conduit shall be minimu_m, 1" minimum for all underground conduit and Y2' minimum for individual control circuits. B. Rigid Galvanized Steel (RGS)shall be used: 1. For all sizes larger than 2" 2. Where exposed to mechanical injury , 3. Where exposed and not supported by a wall or column 10'-0" or less above the finished floor 4. In poured concrete slabs or walls 5. Where exposed to wet, damp, or unheated areas 6. In hazardous areas C. Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT)shall be used: —` 1. In concealed, clean, dry locations 2. In exposed locations where RGS is not required _ D. Intermediate Metal Conduit(IMC) shall be used in clean, dry, exposed locations only. _ I RACEWAYS 16110H—1 17 Cronin Road E. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be used: 1. For recessed lighting pigtails 2. Where conditions preclude use of solid conduit, but shall be kept to a minimum F. Liquid Tight Flexible Conduit(Sealtite) shall be used for motor connections and for flexible connections in unheated,damp orwet locations orwhere subject to corrosive fumes,vapors or liquids. As required for connections to resiliently mounted equipment to prevent transmission of vibrations to the structure. 2.2 CONDUIT FITTINGS - A. General: Die cast, pressure cast or set screw fittings shall not be used. - B. The following fittings are intended as a guide to quality. Fittings of equal quality as manufactured by T&B,Appleton,Steel City,O.Z., Raco,Crouse-Hinds,or Pyle National may be used: Locknuts T&B 140-153 Series Bushings, insulated T&B 1200 Series -- Bushings, malleable, insulated grounding type T&B 3800 Series Chase nipples, insulated T&B 1900 Series Threadless rigid connectors, insulated T&B 8000 Series — EMT connectors, insulated, raintight T&B 5123-5623 Series EMT couplings, raintight T&B 5120-5620 Series Ground connections-pipe clamp T&B#2-#6 Conduit hub T&B 3900 Series Liquidtight flexible conduit fittings, insulated T&B 5300 Series Flexible metallic conduit fittings, insulated T&B 3100 Series PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 Installation A. Unless authorized by the Architect/Engineer, all conduit is to be concealed (except in the following areas): 1. Existing boiler room areas 2. Existing ground floor telephone room 3. New elevator machine room 4. Existing attic space B. Route concealed conduits in a direct line, with long sweep bends and offsets. Route exposed conduits parallel to or perpendicular to building lines. C. Support conduits with brackets, straps or trapeze hangers suitably anchored to building structure. Where conduit is run above a lay-in ceiling, do not support the conduit from the ceiling support system. Maintain a minimum of 6"clearance from flues,steam pipes and hot water lines. D. Conduits shall be continuous from enclosure to enclosure and terminated with double locknuts or connectors to ensure electrical continuity throughout the conduit system. RACEWAYS 16110H—2 17 Cronin Road E. Minimum size conduit shall be and all home run conduit shall be sized to carry one (1) additional future circuit. F. Cap all conduits during construction to prevent entrance of any foreign material. Swab or brush out conduits before pulling conductors. G. Install pull or junction boxes with screw covers where required to facilitate pulling or tapping of conductors. Size in accordance with N.E.C., mount in an accessible location and label cover with circuit number and destination. H. Install galvanized pipe sleeves for all conduits through interior masonry or concrete construction. Sleeves shall be caulked tight. 3.2 CONDUIT FITTINGS A. Install expansion fittings for all conduits crossing building expansion joints. B. Insulated bushings shall be installed on all conduit sizes 1%4'and larger. END OF SECTION NO. 16110H RACEWAYS 16110H—3 17 Cronin Road i -J SECTION 16120H -WIRES AND CABLES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. . Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. This section is a Division 16 Basic Materials and, Methods section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to wires and cables specified herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of electrical wire and electrical cable work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of wire and cable in this section include the following: 1. Copper conductors 2. Type MC cable C. Applications for wire, cable and connectors required for project are as follows: 1. Power distribution circuitry. 2. Lighting circuitry 3. Equipment circuitry _I 1.3 -QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical wire and cable products of types and ratings required,whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five(5)years.. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER CONDUCTORS A. General: All conductors shall conform to the latest requirements of NEC, UL, ASTM, and N EMA. B. ALL Wire shall be annealed bare copper per ANSI/ASTM B3, UL 83, and Federal Specification JC-30A with 600 volt insulation, be stranded(except for#10 AWG and smaller may be solid),and be minimum size#12 AWG(Except for control wiring and signal circuits). l C. Insulation: Provide TH H N/THWN insulation for all conductors,exceptXHHWinsulation may be used for conductors#4 and larger. i WIRES AND CABLES 16120H—1 17 Cronin Road . i D. Conductors #10 and smaller shall be factory color-coded by integral pigmentation with a separate color for each phase and neutral. #8 and larger shall have either stripes, bands, hash marks or color pressure-sensitive plastic tape according to the following chart: SYSTEM VOLTAGE CONDUCTOR 120/208V, 3 PH, 4W Phase A Black Phase B Red Phase C Blue Neutral White Ground Green E. Ampacity of conductors shall be rated for 75 degrees C regardless of temperature of conductor insulation when combining circuits in one conduit. Derate conductors and increase size per NEC when installing multiple circuits in a raceway. F. Cables provide UL-type factory-fabricated cables of sizes, ampacity ratings, and materials and jacketing/sheathing as for services indicated. Type MC: Metal-clad cable with separate insulated green ground conductor; used for dry locations; concealed in walls and/or ceilings. NOTE: The use of type AC (Armor-Clad), type NM or NMC ("Romex) will not be acceptable. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install electrical cables, wires and connectors in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions,applicable requirements of NEC and NECNs"Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices. B. Branch Circuits are identified as follows: 1. A conduit run with no identification or cross-lines indicates 2#12 AWG and 1 #12 AWG green insulated ground. 2. Home runs are indicated by arrow with circuit designated. 3. Conduit sizes other than%"and wire sizes other than#12 are called out or are indicated by note referencing the conductor and conduit schedule.C. Lighting Circuits and Controls are identified as.follows: 1. Conduit runs the same as for branch circuits. 2. In spaces where conduit runs are not shown, connect all lighting fixtures to switch or switches in space or area designated. See legend for identification. Minimum conductor size is#12. — 3. Connect circuits to phases indicated and provide a neutral with each phase conductor and/or with each group of different phase (2 or 3). WIRES AND CABLES 16120H—2 17 Cronin Road D. Phase connections to all panelboards shall be "A", "B", "C", from left to right when facing panels. E. Taps and splices for#10 wire and smaller shall be made with pressure type self-insulated spring connectors. For wire#8 and larger, taps and splices shall be insulated with rubber and/or plastic electrical tape compatible with the conductor insulation. Split bolt or"servits" shall not be allowed. Keep splices to a minimum. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to energization,test cable and wire for continuity of circuitry,and also for short circuits. Correct malfunctions when detected. B. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. END OF SECTION NO. 16120H i WIRES AND CABLES 16120H—3 17 Cronin Road SECTION 16135H - ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. This section is a Division 16 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to electrical wiring boxes and fittings specified herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of electrical box and electrical fitting work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of electrical boxes and fittings specified in this section include the following: 1. Outlet boxes 2. Junction boxes 3. Pull boxes 4. Floor boxes 5. . Bushings 6. Locknuts 7. Knockout closures 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical boxes and fittings, of types and sizes required,whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3)years. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FABRICATED MATERIALS A. Interior Outlet Boxes: Provide galvanized coated flat rolled sheet-steel interior outlet wiring boxes,of types,shapes and sizes, including box depths,to suit each respective location and installation; construct with stamped knockouts in back and sides, and with threaded screw holes with corrosion-resistant screws for securing box covers and wiring devices. B. Weatherproof Outlet Boxes:Provide corrosion-resistant cast-metal weatherproof outletwiring boxes, of types, shapes and sizes, including depth of boxes, with threaded conduit ends, cast-metal face plates with spring-hinged waterproof caps suitably configured for each application, including face plate gaskets and corrosion-resistant fasteners. C. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized code-gage sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw-on covers; of types, shapes and sizes, to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers. ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 16135H—1 17 Cronin Road D. Conduit Bodies: Provide galvanized cast-metal conduit bodies,of types,shapes and sizes, to suit respective locations and installation, construct with threaded-conduit-entrance ends, removable covers, and corrosion-resistant screws. E. Bushings, Knockout Closures and Lockouts: Provide corrosion-resistant punched-steel box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings,offset connectors, of types and sizes, to suit respective installation. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS A. General: Install electrical boxes and fittings where indicated,complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECNs"Standard of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable and raceway installation work. C. Provide weathertight outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture. D. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed. E. -Install boxes and conduit bodies in those locations to ensure ready accessibility of electrical wiring. F. Avoid using round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box, which would result in difficult and insecure connections when fastened with locknut or bushing on rounded _ surface. G. Fasten boxes rigidly to substrates or structural surfaces to which attached,or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry. H. Provide electrical connections for installed boxes. END OF SECTION NO. 16135H ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 16135H—2 17 Cronin Road I. SECTION 16190H -SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary .Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section,and is a part of _each Division 16 section making reference to supports,anchors,sleeves,and seals specified . herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 'A. Extent of supports, anchors, sleeves,seals and access doors is indicated by drawings and schedules and/or specified in other Division 16 sections. B. Types of supports,anchors,sleeves and seals specified in this section include the following: 1. Clevis hangers. 2. Riser clamps 3. C-clamps 4. I-beam clamps _5. One-hole conduit straps . _ _.6. .Two-hole conduit straps -7. >.Round steel rods '8. :::: Lead expansion anchors 9. Toggle bolts 10. Wall and floor seals C. Supports, anchors,sleeves and seals furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment,are specified as part of that equipment assembly in other Division 16 sections. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supporting devices of types, sizes, and ratings required,whose products have been in satisfactory-use in similar service for not less than three(3)years. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES A. General: Provide supporting devices which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for complete installation; and as herein specified. Where more than one(1)type of device meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option. SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190H—1 17 Cronin Road i B. Supports: Provide supporting devices of types,sizes and materials indicated;and having the following construction features: i 1. Clevis Hangers: For supporting 2"rigid metal conduit;galvanized steel;with 1/2"dia. hole for round steel rod; approximately 54 pounds per 100 units. 2. Riser Clamps: For supporting 5"rigid metal conduit; black steel;with 2'bolts and nuts, and 4"ears; approximately 510 pounds per 100 units. - 3. C-Clamps: Black malleable iron: %"rod size;approximately 70 pounds per 100 units. 4. I-Beam Clamps: Black steel, 1 Y4' x 3/16" stock; 3/8" cross bolt; flange width 2'; approximately 52 pounds per 100 units. 5. One=Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting %" rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel; . approximately 7 pounds per 100 units. 6. Two=Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting%"rigid metal conduit,galvanized steel;3/." strap width; and 2-1/8"between center of screw holes. 7. Hexagon Nuts: For Y2' rod size; galvanized steel; approximately 4 pounds per 100 units. 8. Round Steel Rod: Black steel; %2'dia:; approximately 67 pounds per 100 feet. 9. Offset Conduit Clamps: For supporting 2" rigid metal conduit; black steel; approximately 200 pounds pet 100 units. C. Anchors: Provide anchors of types, sizes and materials indicated, with, the following construction features: 1. Lead Expansion Anchors: %2'approximately 38 pounds per 160 units. 2. Toggle Bolts: Springhead; 3/16"x 4"; approximately 5 pounds per 100 units. D. Sleeves and Seals: Provide sleeves and seals,of types,sizes and materials indicated,with -the following construction features: 1. Wall and Floor Seals: Provide factory-assembled watertight wall and floor seals, of types and sizes indicated;suitable for sealing around conduit,pipe,or tubing passing _ through concrete floors and walls. Construct seals with steel sleeves, malleable iron 1 body, neoprene sealing grommets and rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws. 2.2 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one(1) of the following- 1. Sheet Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal;round tube closed with shaplock - joint, welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate sleeves from the following gage metal: 3"and smaller, 20-gage; 4"to 6", 16-gage; over 6", 14-gage. 2. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized-steel pipe; remove burrs. _ B. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation walls below grade,or in exterior walls, of one (1)of the following: 1. Lead and Oakum: Calked between sleeve and pipe I { SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190H—2 17 Cronin Road { i PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Install hangers,anchors,sleeves and seals as indicated, in accordance with manufacturers written instructions and with recognized industry practices to insure supporting devices comply with requirements. Comply with requirements of NECA and NEC and ANSUNEMA for installation of supporting devices. B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of supporting devices with other work. C. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal conduits to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings indicated. D. Tighten sleeve seal nuts until sealing grommets have expanded to form watertight seal. END OF SECTION NO. 16190H SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190H—3 17 Cronin Road SECTION 16195H -ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS' A. . Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is a Division 16 Basic Materials and Methods section,and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to electrical identification specified herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of electrical identification work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of electrical identification work specified in this section include the following: 1. Equipment/system identification signs PART2-PRODUCTS —� 2.1, GENERAL A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application. B. Engraved nameplates shall be black lamcoid with white letters and attached with sheet metal screws, rivets or epoxy glue. Do not use pressure sensitive tape to fasten nameplate. Mount nameplates indicating designation, voltage and phase on switchboards, distribution panelboards, branch circuit panelboards, and control panels with minimum %'high letters. Where equipment is flush mounted in the finished areas, mount nameplates on inside of enclosure. --` C. Embossed plastic tape will not be allowed for permanent identification. D. Identify all circuits in branch circuit panelboards with a typewritten directory mounted behind clear plastic and fastened to inside of panel door. Submit to Engineer for review. E. Identify all circuits in a junction box or pull box with a tag tied to conductors with a nylon tie wrap. Identify the circuits with the same tag on the conduit feeding the box or mark the exterior of the box cover with the circuit numbers using pressure sensitive tape. F. Identify_all circuits in switchboard and distribution panelboards with permanent labels on individual circuit units. a ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195H—1 17 Cronin Road EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION A. General Installation Requirements: 1. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces, which require finish, install identification after completion of painting. 2. Regulations: Comply with governing regulations and requests of governing authorities for identification of electrical work. B. Operational Identification and Warnings: 1. General: Install permanently attached plastic signs or similar equivalent identification, instruction or warnings on switches,outlets and other controls,devices and covers of electrical enclosures wherever reasonably required to ensure safe and efficient operation and maintenance of electrical systems, and electrically connected mechanical systems and general systems and equipment, including prevention or misuse of electrical facilities by unauthorized personnel. Where detailed instructions or explanations are needed, provide plasticized tags with clearly written messages - adequate for intended purposes. C. Equipment/System Identification: 1. Designate equipment being controlled on motor controllers, manual motor switches,. thermal overload switches, pushbutton stations, safety and disconnect switches. Where equipment is flush mounted in finished areas; engrave identification on.cover plate.-Where disconnect switches are internally mounted in equipment, label access door"Disconnect inside"..Install labels,showing proper fuse type and size, inside all fusible safety switches and panelboard switch units. END OF SECTION NO. 16195H ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195H—2 - 17 Cronin Road I SECTION 16900H -WIRING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT - PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Unless.otherwise specified on the drawings,it is the requirement of this specification to have the Heating Contractor (HC) provide and install all CONTROL work for this project in accordance with Division 16 Sections.The Electrical Contractor(EC)shall be responsible for - all the POWER work to the mechanical equipment(not to include any power wiring inside factory supplied control-cabinets). B. The CONTROL WORK specifically includes all motors, starters, relays, switches, control valves,dampers,wiring and other incidental devices for complete control and interlocking of the mechanical equipment. Control voltage includes 120 volt and below. C. The POWER WORK specifically includes all conduit,wire,disconnects and other incidental devices for complete power feeds to mechanical equipment. D. Sizes of motor,circuit breakers,and fuses shown on the drawings or in the specifications_are based on criteria available at the time of design and are for bidding purposes only. E. The Heating Contractor(HC)and the Electrical Contractor(EC)shall coordinate these sizes with the motors to actually be installed for correct motor short circuit and overload protection to ensure that the electrical equipment is sufficient for the starting current of the motor,and to ensure compliance with all prevailing-electrical codes. F. The HC shall bear all costs for electric changes caused by-equipment substitutions. PART 2-PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3-EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) END OF SECTION NO. 16900H. i r WIRING OF MECHANIAL EQUIPMENT 16900H—1 17 Cronin Road SOCIAL SECURITY ADMINISTRATION ALTERATIONS TO DISTRICT OFFICES Queensbury, New York -ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX- DIVISION 16-ELECTRICAL Section Number and Title 16010E BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS...........................................................................7 16020E ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION .......................................................................................2 16040EGROUNDING.....................................................................................................................2 16060E WIRING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.........................................................................1 16070ECUTTING & PATCHING........................................................................................... ........2 16110ERACEWAYS.......................................................................................................................3 16111E SURFACE METAL RACEWAY..........................................................................................2 16120E WIRES AND CABLES .......................................................................................................3 16121 E WIRING, GENERAL—600 VOLTS AND UNDER.............................................................7 16130E ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS .............................................................................2 16132E INTERIOR RACEWAYS, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES ..............................................7 16134E OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES.........................................................................5 16140ESUPPORTING DEVICES .--•..............................................................................................3 16141E WIRING DEVICES..............................................................................................................3 16200E OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES .......................................................................3 16220E CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS................_.................................,: :......2 16320E INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES............................................ ....4 16413E MOLDED CASE SWITCHES...........................................................................................---1. 16500E TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEM CONDUIT.................................................................1 INDEX-1 SECTION 16010-BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. All work under this title, on drawings or specified, is subject to the architectural general and special contract conditions for the entire project, and the Contractor for this portion of the work is required to refer especially thereto, and to the architectural drawings. B. Drawings and specifications are complementary and must be so interpreted to determine the full scope of work under this heading. Wherever any material,article,operation or method is either specified or shown on the drawings, this Contractor is required to provide each item and perform each prescribed operation according to the designate quality, qualification or condition, furnishing all necessary labor, equipment or incidentals. C. Wherever the designation"Architect"appears, it shall imply Architect or Engineer. 1.2 CONFLICTS A. If a conflict appears between the drawings and the specifications,the Contractor is to contact the Engineer for clarification. B. In the absence of a clarification by the Engineer, the Contractor must install his work in accordance with the more stringent application. 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF.WORK - A. Extent of electrical related work required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division 16 sections. B. Electrical Scope The following is a general listing of work items to be provided under this Contract, which is not necessarily all inclusive, nor shall it limit the extent of the work or exclude any work shown or specified and not listed: 1. Power distribution panelboards, switches, feeder protective devices, and feeder circuits 2. Branch circuit panelboards, protective devices and.branch circuit wiring 3. Light fixtures and wiring devices as shown or required 4. Power circuit wiring and devices for wiring of motors, appliances and utilization equipment furnished by other trades 5. Furnish wiring materials and labor and make complete electrical installation of equipment and devices furnished by Heating and Plumbing Contractors 6. Demolition, cutting, patching as required for electrical installation 7. Temporary electric service and lighting 8. Operationally test and check all installed equipment C. Work also includes minor items,which may not be shown or mentioned, but are necessary for a complete,working electrical installation. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010E-1 17 Cronin Road If, in the interpretation of contract documents, it appears that the drawings and specifications are not in agreement, the one (1) requiring the greater quantity or superior quality shall prevail,as decided by the Engineer. Addenda supersede the provisions,which they amend. D. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Applicable local, state and national laws, statutes, building codes and regulations shall govern the complete installation. Comply with standards of utility companies furnishing services to the project. Drawings and specifications shall take precedence when they are more stringent. E. Permits: Obtain permits and pay all fees required by the local inspecting authority. F. Reference Standards: The latest editions of the following codes, standards, and specifications shall be considered minimum requirements: 1. National Electrical Code (NFPA#70) 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 101, 12A, 72D, 72E, 75) 3. Life Safety Code (NFPA#101) 4. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) - 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 7. New York State Building Code _ 8. New York State Energy Code 9. Americans with Disabilities Act _ G. Tests and Adjustments: The Electrical Contractor shall furnish testing equipment, instruments and personnel to perform any test procedures and adjustments deemed necessary by the Engineer to establish proper performance and installation of electrical equipment and materials. 1.4 DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION A. Verify dimensions and elevations from General Construction Drawings or by actual field measurements after building construction has sufficiently progressed. B. Assume full and final responsibility for the accuracy of any or all work performed under this Division and make repairs and corrections as required or directed at no extra cost to the Owner. C. Layouts of piping, ductwork,and equipment shown on drawings are diagrammatic and shall be construed as such. D. Make actual installations in accord with said layouts, but with necessary deviations as directed or required by job conditions and field measurements in order to produce a thoroughly integrated and practical job upon completing, but make deviations only with specific approval of the Engineer/Architect. E. Take particular care to coordinate all piping and ductwork under this Division to prevent conflict and remove and relocate work as may be made necessary by such conflict at no extra cost to the Owner. F. Unless expressly permitted by the Engineer/Architect or shown otherwise on the drawings, all piping, vent piping, ducts and similar items shall be installed so that they are concealed except as permitted by the Engineer/Architect in service rooms noted on the drawings. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010E-2 17 Cronin Road G. The Owner or Owner's representative reserves the right to relocate terminal equipment six - (6)feet in any direction from locations indicated on plans, before roughing-in,with no change in contract price H. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic and have no dimensional significance. Locations of . equipment are to be as: 1. Shown on Architectural drawings 2. Directed in the field _- 3. Required for proper-connection of equipment to be served 4. Required for proper symmetry in the space involved 5. With deviations made only with specific approval of Architect I. Division 16 shall review the drawings of other divisions,exchange shop drawings with them, cooperate in the preparation or prepare space layouts as required, to avoid conflicts and interferences with the installation of other trades in advanced stages of construction. J. The Owner or Owner's representative reserves the right to relocate an outlet or outlets,six (6)feet in any direction from locations indicated on plans, before roughing-in,with no change in contract price. 1.5 APPROVAL OF MATERIAL A. Items specified have been checked by the Engineer for performance and space limitation.. B.`:. Unless the words "approved equal" appear, Contractor is .to choose from list .of .manufacturers mentioned and state the make of equipment he intends to purchase on a sheet provided at the time of the contract signing. C. In order for Engineer to consider"equal", EC must certify by letter that he has checked the - product for conformance to specifications and space limitations and assumes full responsibility thereafter. D. Engineer, not Contractor-or Vendor, shall be the final judge of equal materials-. Where product is not considered equal by the Engineer,Contractor'may offer credit.to the Ownerfor - further consideration. E. Requests for substitutions must be made in writing ten (10)days prior to bid date so that an addendum may reach all Contractors. F. If substitutions are proposed after the bids are received;the Contractor shall state amount of credit to the Owner for substitution. Contractor shall submit samples of any proposed substitution, as requested by the Architect or Engineer, without cost. G. Where equipment requiring different.arrangement of connections from those shown is approved, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish revised layouts, if requested;and install the equipment to operate properly and in harmony with the intent of the _, drawings and specifications, and to make all changes in the work required by the different arrangement of the connections at no additional cost to the Owner. Also coordinate control and power wiring and pay for any changes imposed on other trades by these changes. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010E-3 17 Cronin Road H. Upon approval of equipment list by Engineer,copies of submittal prints shall be forwarded to Engineer within thirty (30) days. a 1.6 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Check Division 16 drawings with all others. B. Anticipate and avoid interferences with other trades. C. Obtain decision for approval from project Inspector for proposed group installation before proceeding, and for clearance in structure and finish of the building. D. Verify with drawings if required. E. Running pipe over electrical equipment is prohibited. Special cases may be permitted with protecting copper drip pan. Obtain Architect or Engineer's approval. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Make provisions for delivery and safe storage of all materials. Check and properly receipt material to be "furnished by others" to Contractor, and assume full responsibility for all materials while in storage with full visible identification and information. B. Delivery of Equipment: Make the required arrangements with General Contractor for the introduction into the building of equipment too large to pass,through finished openings. Protect equipment against weather, damage, and vandalism. i BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010E-4 17 Cronin Road ti - _ 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. wiring diagrams or equipment lists for the following equipment and material in accordance with criteria outlined in Division 1 of uu: project specifications. 16110 RACEWAYS 16111 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY 16.120 WIRE&CABLES WIRING, GENERAL—600 VOLTS AND UNDER 16130' ELECTRICAL BOXES & FITTINGS 16132 INTERIOR RACEWAYS, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES 16020 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16134 OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES 16141 WIRING DEVICES 16200 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 16220 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS 16320 INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES 16413 MOLDED CASE SWITCHES 16500 TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEM CONDUIT ' ' ' Equipment list shall indicate mfg. ond |series number of each item. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Upon completion of the work, prepare and deliver to the Owner of complete operating and maintenance manuals for systems & major equipment installed os outlined in Division 1of the project apaoificoUona. / D. Record Drawing: Keep o separate set of drawings at the job site andaocurately record all changes, revisions and additions in red. At the completion of the job, submit this set to the Owner's representative 1.0 REQUIREMENTS BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT A. Lubricating Instruction 1. Hang framed lubrication chart-in Mechanical Room or adjacent to equipment installed by the Contractor. � 2. List name of equipment, recommended lubrication, and times required. 3. CartifvaUequipnnenthaobeenpnopar|y |ubhoobadphortoturnbverboOmmec BASIC ELECTRICALREQU|REMENTS 1601OE-5 17 Cronin Road B. Identification - 1. Tag all items, per Article Section. — 2. Provide typewritten directories for all new and modified panelboards. C. Certification _ 1. Submit to Engineer/Architect certificates of approval from electrical inspector or authority having jurisdiction over codes pertaining to work in this Division. 2. Submit to Engineer/Architect certificate stating any system on the project have been - installed in accordance with specification and manufacturers requirements. D. Instructional Period 1. Instruct up to two (2) of the Owner's representatives in complete operation of all components, to the satisfaction of the Owner and receive signed statement from Owner's representative certifying knowledge and understanding of all equipment and systems. E. Guarantees 1. Provide all guarantees as required by the Contract Documents with a minimum of one (1)year from the date of Substantial Completion on all labor and materials. F. Start-up Report 1. Provide start-up report for each piece of mechanical equipment including date, electrical characteristics, temperature and pressure readings;etc. 2. This is intended for all items not specifically included in the Balancing Report G. Operational Booklets (Maintenance Manuals) 1. Provide the Owner with two (2) Operation Booklets,which contain the following: a. Approved shop drawings b. Wiring diagrams - c. Test date d. Operational instructions - e. Start-up report PART PRODUCTS ! 2.1 MATERIALS A. Acceptable electrical materials and equipment shall be new and of the type and quality specified or shown on drawings. They shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, I nc.and bear their label where standards have been established. B. Permission to substitute equal or superior items of materials and equipment may be requested by following the procedure outlined in the Division 1 "Supplementary General Conditions"of the project specifications. Completion date will not be extended because of any time lost due to consideration or installation of substitutions. All coordination of substituted equipment shall be the Contractor's responsibility. - i BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010E-6 17 Cronin Road i PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTIONS A. Notify proper authorities for inspections of work required by applicable codes, rules or regulations. B. Operational test will be performed on all electrical.equipment as recommended by the applicable manufacturer. Test all wiring and connection for continuity and grounds before energizing any system. C. Insulation resistance tests shall be performed on all services entrance and feeder conductors, including neutrals, using a megohmeter. Apply 1000 volts D.C. to each conductor and maintain one (1) minute. Minimum value for each conductor shall be 100 megohms at 60 degrees F. Furnish written report of test data to Architect/Engineer. D. Panelboard tests, before occupancy, energize all lighting and equipment loads for not less than eight hours, check all circuit breakers and fuses for excessive heating and/or faulty tripping, measure phase currents on all feeders, measure panelboard voltages (phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral), tabulate all readings, reconnect branch circuits on any feeder with over five (5) per cent variation between high and low phase current measurements, reconnect taps at any transformer as required to correct for high or low voltage readings, present six copies of voltage and current measurements to Engineer. E. Clean up, remove all waste material,and clean all lamps, lenses, lighting fixtures,cabinets, and electrical equipment prior to final inspection. = F. Guarantee/Warranty: The electrical-system and facilities shall be delivered to the Owner.:-' complete in perfect working order,tested and balanced in full accordance with the contract documents. 3.2 SLEEVES, CHASES, OPENINGS AND PATCHING A. Sleeves, chases, and openings through floors,walls, ceilings and structural members shall be arranged in conjunction with the Architect and related trades to be installed in an approved manner. B.' Seal all openings through fire-rated walls and floors after installation of conduits, busways, wireways, etc., in a manner to preserve fire rating that existed prior to making the opening/penetration. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Wherever any material,operation, method or device is mentioned, listed or noted within this Division of the specification or on the plans, unless specifically mentioned as furnished by others, said material, operation or device (including all necessary labor, materials and appliances in connection with same) shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor. END OF SECTION NO. 16010E BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS '16010E-7 17 Cronin Road SECTION 16020- ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions .of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. : This section is a Division 16 Basic Materials.and Methods. section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to electrical identification specified herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A: Extent of electrical identification work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of electrical identification work specified in this section include the following: 1. Equipment/system identification signs. PART2-PRODUCTS -� 2.1 GENERAL A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each,application. B. Engraved nameplates shall be black lamcoid with white letters and attached with sheet metal screws, rivets or epoxy glue. Do not use pressure sensitive tape to fasten nameplate. Mount -i nameplates indicating designation, voltage and phase on switchboards, distribution panelboards, branch circuit panelboards, and control panels with minimum W"'high letters. Where equipment is flush mounted in the finished areas, mount nameplates on inside of enclosure. C. Embossed plastic tape will not be allowed for permanent identification. D. Identify all circuits in branch circuit panelboards with a typewritten directory mounted behind I clear plastic and fastened to inside of panel door. Submit to Engineer for review. E. Identify all circuits in a junction box or pull box with a tag tied to conductors with a nylon tie j wrap. Identify the circuits with the same tag,on the conduit feeding the box or mark the exterior of the box cover with the circuit numbers using pressure sensitive tape. F. Identify all circuits in switchboard and distribution panelboards with permanent labels on _ individual circuit units. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16020E-1 17 Cronin Road PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION A. General Installation Requirements: 1. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces,which require finish, install identification after completion of painting. 2. Regulations: Comply with governing regulations and requests of governing authorities for identification of electrical work. B. Operational Identification and Warnings: 1. General: Install permanently attached plastic signs or similar equivalent _ identification, instruction or warnings on switches,outlets and other controls,devices and covers of electrical enclosures wherever reasonably required to ensure safe and efficient operation and maintenance of electrical systems,and electrically connected mechanical systems and general systems and equipment, including prevention or misuse of electrical facilities by unauthorized personnel. Where detailed instructions or explanations are needed, provide plasticized tags with clearly written messages adequate for intended purposes. C. Equipment/System Identification: 1. Designate equipment being controlled on motor controllers,manual motor switches, Thermal overload switches, pushbutton stations, safety and disconnect switches. Where equipment is flush mounted in finished areas, engrave identification on cover plate. Where disconnect switches are internally mounted in equipment,label access — door"Disconnect Inside".11ristall labels,showing proper fuse type and size,inside all fusible safety switches and panelboard switch units. i END OF SECTION NO. 16020E ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16020E-2 17 Cronin Road i SECTION 16040-GROUNDING . .PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is a Division 16 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to grounding specified herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of grounding work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Two (2) separate and isolated systems shall be installed as shown on the drawings. The only common points shall be the ground bus located in the main switchboard and at the secondary terminals of transformers creating separately derived systems. These systems are A.C. Neutral Ground System and A.C. Equipment Ground System. - PART 2-PRODUCTS I 2.1 GROUND SYSTEMS A.. _Materials and Components: General: Except as"otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding and'bondingsystems: indicated;with assembly of materials,including,-but not limited to,cables/wires,connectors, terminals(solderless lug), grounding rods/electrodes,and plate electrodes, bonding jumper braid,surge arresters,and additional accessories needed fora complete installation. Where more than one (1) type component product meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option: Where materials or components are not indicated,provide products,which comply with NEC, UL, and"IEEE requirements and with established industry standards for _ applications indicated. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 A.C. NEUTRAL GROUND SYSTEM: A. The A.C.system shall be grounded in main distribution panelboard and atthe entrance meter cabinet. Take all special precautions, such as removal of-all neutral bonding screws in panelboards,disconnecting switches,etc. System neutral shall be tested before energization j (with the disconnect links removed)for any possible ground with a"Megger". Perform this test in the presence of Owner's representative. 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING;SYSTEM i A. All conduits entering metal enclosures.shall have double locknuts or, if enclosure does not 'have provision-for connecting by locknuts; provide a ground.bushing, wire jumper and solderless lug to bond enclosure. All conduits leaving the main switchboard enclosure shall be grounded to the ground bus by means of a grounding bushing,wire jumper and solderless lug. GROUNDING 16040E-1 17 Cronin Road B. A separate ground conductor (green wire) shall be installed in all raceways for feeders, power and receptacle branch circuits, and where called for on Drawings. C. All distribution and branch circuit panels shall have a separate ground bar, "ILSCO" or approved equal. D. All metallic conduits 1 Y4'or larger shall have grounding bushings. E. All Type SO cord, or equivalent, shall have a separate ground wire(green) of equal size to circuit conductor. F. Equipment ground conductor shall be copper with Type THHN insulation, green only, up to and including#4; larger sizes may be bare conductor,or black and identified with green tape. G. Paint, grease or other contaminates shall be cleaned from all surfaces before bonding ground conductor. (Painted surfaces shall be sanded clean.) 3.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. The grounding electrodes shall be as shown on the drawings, utilizing the main water system, the building steel and as detailed, bonded to the main ground bar in the electrical room. Conductors from the main ground bar shall be insulated and installed in rigid PVC conduit. Any valve,water meter,etc., between the conductor attachment and earth shall be jumpered with an equivalent cable. B. All connections to all underground connections shall be done by thermite welding process, "Cadweld"or equal. 3.4. " FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding and bonding systems, test ground resistance with ground resistance tester. Where tests show resistance to ground is over 5 ohms, take appropriate action to reduce resistance to 5 ohms, or less, by driving additional ground rods and/or by chemically treated soil encircling ground rod; then retest to demonstrate compliance. END OF SECTION NO. 16040E i GROUNDING 16040E-2 17 Cronin Road i SECTION 16060-WIRING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT i - PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, it is the requirement of this specification to have the Heating Contractor (HC) provide and install all CONTROL work for this project in accordance with Division 16 Sections.The Electrical Contractor(EC)shall be responsible for all the POWER work to the mechanical equipment(not to include any power wiring inside factory supplied control cabinets). B. The CONTROL WORK specifically includes all motors, starters, relays, switches, control valves,dampers;wiring and other incidental devices for complete control and interlocking of the mechanical equipment. Control voltage includes 120 volt and below. C. The POWER WORK specifically includes all conduit,wire,disconnects and other incidental devices for complete power feeds to mechanical equipment. D. Sizes of motor,circuit breakers,and fuses shown on the drawings or in the specifications are based on criteria available.at the time of design and are for bidding purposes only. E. The Heating Contractor and the Electrical Contractor(EC)shall coordinate these sizes with the motors to actually be installed for correct motor short circuit and overload protection to ensure that the electrical equipment is sufficient for the starting current of the motor;.and to ensure compliance with all prevailing electrical codes. F. The EC shall size motor, circuit breakers, and fuses as directed'by HC's coordination. -The HC shall bear all costs for electric changes caused by equipment substitutions. -' PART 2-PRODUCTS(NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3-EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) END OF SECTION NO. 16060E I i _I j WIRING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 16060E-1 - 17 Cronin Road SECTION 16070-CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 MATERIALS A. Provide materials;which result in equal or better work than the work being cut or patched in terms of performance characteristics and visual effect where applicable. B. Use materials identical with the original materials where feasible and where recognized that satisfactory results can be produced thereby. C. Comply with specifications and standards for each specific product involved. D. Firestop Material 1. Through-Penetration Firestop Devices, Forming Materials, and Fill,Void or Cavity Materials: As listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory, Warnock Hersey Certifications Listings Book, or the Omega Point Laboratories Listings Directory. . 2. Labels: Manufactured of suitable material for permanent field identification of through-penetration firestops; - stating "WARNING - FIRESTOP MATERIAL (Company Name, Product Catalog Number)". PART 2- EXECUTION A.. Inspection Inspect existing conditions of the project including elements subject to damage or to movement during cutting and patching. 2. After uncovering work, inspect conditions affecting installation of products or performance of work. 3. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to Architect in writing. Do not proceed with work until Architect has provided further instruction. B. Preparation 1. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure structural value or ,integrity of affected portions of work. 2. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of project from damage. 3. Provide.protection from elements for that portion of the project, which may be exposed by cutting and patching work and maintain excavations free from water. C. Performance 1. Execute cutting and demolition by methods,which will prevent damage to otherwork and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs. 2. Employ original installer or fabricator to perform cutting and patching work,orwhere original installer fabricator is not available (e.g., for work of a prior time), engage recognized expert entities to perform cutting and patching work. 3. For all openings in masonry construction not otherwise detailed or scheduled including mechanical openings, minimum lintels to be for each 4"of masonry width, one L 3%x 5/16 for spans up to 6 feet; one L 5 x 3'/z"x 5/26 for spans up to 8 feet. - CUTTING AND PATCHING 16070E-1 17 Cronin Road For spans less than 2 feet provide a 5/16" plate. All angles installed with long leg vertical. 4. Restore work, which has been cut or removed. Install new products to provide completed work in accord with requirements of Contract Documents.. 5. Perform patching around items penetrating in-place construction in a manner that will maintain the fire resistive capability of the existing construction. 6. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetration through - surfaces. 7. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent — finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. For assembly, refinish entire unit. D. Firestop Installation 1. Use through-penetration firestop devices, forming materials and fill, void or cavity materials to form through-penetration firestops to prevent the passage of flame, ` smoke, fumes and hot gases as detailed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory, Warnock Hersey Certifications Listings Book, or the Omega Point Laboratories Listings Directory. Where applicable design is not detailed in the Directories, use forming materials and fill, void or cavity material to form appropriate through- penetration firestop in accordance with printed details and installation instructions from the Company producing the approved forming materials and fill,void or cavity material. 2. Firestop all through-penetrations of fire rated walls,floors,ceilings and partitions. In the event fire ratings are not indicated on Construction Drawings,obtain clarification from Architect or Engineer. - END OF SECTION NO. 16070E CUTTING AND PATCHING 16070E-2 17 Cronin Road SECTION 16110-RACEWAYS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and,general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is a Division 16 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to electrical raceways specified herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of raceway work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of raceways specified in this section include the following-. 1. Rigid Galvanized Steel (RGS) 2. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) 3. Intermediate metal conduit(IMC) 4. Flexible metal conduit 5. Liquid-tight flexible metal.conduit 6. Rigid non-metallic conduit(PVC) 7. Liquid-tight flexible conduit(Sealtite) 8. Conduit fittings - PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING -` A. General:, All conduit shall be V minimum, T'minimum for all underground conduit and Y2" minimum for individual control circuits. B. Rigid Galvanized Steel (RGS)shall be used: 1. For all sizes larger than 2" 2. Where exposed to mechanical injury 3. Where exposed and not supported by a wall or column 10'-0" or less above the finished floor 4. -in poured concrete slabs or walls 5. Where exposed to wet, damp, or unheated areas --I 6. In hazardous areas C. Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT)shall be used: - 1. In concealed, clean, dry locations 2. In exposed locations where RGS is not required D. Intermediate Metal Conduit(IMC) shall be used in clean, dry, exposed locations only. 4 - RACEWAYS 16110E-1 17 Cronin Road E. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be used: I 1. For recessed lighting pigtails 2. Where conditions preclude use of solid conduit, but shall be kept to a minimum i F. Liquid Tight Flexible Conduit(Sealtite)shall be used for motor connections and for flexible connections in unheated,damp orwet locations orwhere subject to corrosive fumes,vapors or liquids as required for connections to resiliently mounted equipment to prevent transmission of vibrations to the structure. 2.2 NON-METALLIC CONDUIT(PVC) A. General: Non-metallic conduit shall be heavy wall, rigid, polyvinyl chloride(PVC),schedule 40, approved for 90 degrees C conductors. Non-metallic conduit(PVC) may be used: - 1. In or below concrete slabs on grade or in earth when riser elbows and conduit risers are RGS with bonded PVC or bituminous paint coating 2. For ground system conductors 2.3 CONDUIT FITTINGS A. General: Die cast, pressure cast or set screw fittings shall not be used. B. The following fittings are intended as a guide to quality. Fittings of equal quality as - manufactured by T&B,Appleton,Steel City, O.Z., Raco,Crouse-Hinds,or Pyle National may be used: Locknuts T&B 140-153 Series Bushings, insulated T&B 1200 Series Bushings, malleable, insulated grounding type T&B 3800 Series Chase nipples, insulated T&B 1900 Series - Threadless rigid connectors insulated T&B 8000 Series EMT connectors, insulated, raintight T&B 5123-5623 Series EMT couplings, raintight T&B 5120-5620 Series Ground connections-pipe clamp T&B#2-#6 Conduit hub T&B 3900 Series Liquidtight flexible conduit fittings, insulated T&B 5300 Series Flexible metallic conduit fittings, insulated T&B 3100 Series - PVC Conduit fittings Same as conduit manufacturer Expansion fittings, with bonding jumper Appleton "XJ" Series i Conduit seals Crouse-Hinds - PART 3-EXECUTION - i 3.1 Installation A. Install underground conduits a minimum of 30"below finished grade. Minimum 1"diameter for all underground conduits. RACEWAYS 16110E-2 17 Cronin Road i B. Unless authorized by the architect, all conduit is to be concealed (except in the following areas): 1. Mechanical and Electrical Rooms C. Route concealed conduits in a direct line, with long sweep bends and offsets. Route exposed conduits parallel to or perpendicular to building lines. D. Support conduits with brackets, straps or trapeze hangers suitably anchored to building structure. Where conduit is run above a lay-in ceiling, do not support the conduit from the ceiling support system. Maintain a minimum of 6"clearance from flues,steam pipes and hot water lines. E. Conduits shall be continuous from enclosure to enclosure and terminated with double locknuts or connectors to ensure electrical continuity throughout the conduit system. F. Minimum size conduit shall be'%" and all home run conduit shall be sized to'carry one (1) additional future circuit. G. Cap all conduits during construction to prevent entrance of any foreign material. Swab or brush out conduits before pulling conductors. H. Install pull orjunction boxes with screw covers where required to facilitate pulling or tapping of conductors. Size in accordance with N.E.C., mount in an accessible location and label cover with circuit number and destination. I. . .Flash and seal all conduits passing through roof. .Use pitch cups around conduits passing through built-up and gravel roofs. J. Install galvanized pipe sleeves for all conduits through interior masonry or concrete construction. Sleeves shall be caulked tight. K. Conduits passing through exterior concrete walls or footings below grade shall have conduit entrance seal O.Z. type FSK and assembly shall be watertight. 3.2 CONDUIT FITTINGS A. All fittings in wet locations (i.e., exposed to weather, buried in concrete or fill) shall be watertight. B. Install expansion fittings for all conduits crossing building expansion joints. C. Seal all conduits in hazardous areas per N.E.C. Seal all conduits between areas of widely different temperatures with seal on warmer side of wall. D. PVC conduits fittings, elbows and cement shall be produced.by the same manufacturer as the conduit. Fittings shall be solvent welded in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. Insulated bushings shall be installed on all conduit sizes 1%4'and larger. END OF SECTION NO. 16110E RACEWAYS 16110E-3 17 Cronin Road SECTION 16111 E-SURFACE METAL RACEWAY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. This specification covers a surface metal raceway system used for branch circuit and/or . data network voice,video and other low-voltage wiring.The surface metal raceway system shall consist of raceway base, cover, appropriate fittings and device mounting plates necessary to complete the installation per electrical drawings. 1.2 CLASSIFICATION AND USE A. Surface metal raceway is for use in dry interior locations only as covered in Article 352 of the National Electrical Code.4000 surface metal raceway and fittings`are listed by Underwriter's Laboratories under File Number E4376, Listing & Classification Guide Number RJBT and File Number E41751, Listing&Classification Number RJPR respectively,all in accordance with publication UL 5 for Surface Metal Raceways. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 Shop Drawings —� For prewired installations, submit drawings for approval showing the complete layout of all products that make up the complete system for each floor prior to installation with -`' raceway lengths, device type (power or data), locations and circuits identified. 1.3.2 Built Drawings ? If variations from approved shop drawings occur during the installation of the system,final as built drawings shall be submitted for each floor that has been altered. PART 2-PRODUCT 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. The surface metal raceway specified herein shall be Wiremold 4000 System. Systems of other manufacturers may be considered if equal, by written approval of the specifying Engineer and shall meet all the performance standards specified herein.The color selection of raceway and/or fittings, components shall be by Architect. 2.2 MATERIALS I A. The raceway and all the system components must be UL Listed. Steel shall be galvanized. Finish shall be gray and shall be suitable for�field repainting to match surroundings. Color selection by Architect. 2.2.1 Raceway The raceway shall be of a two(2) piece design with a metal base;and snap on metal cover. Base shall be a minimum of 0.050"[1.3mm]wall thickness and cover shall be a minimum of 0.040"[1 mm]wall thickness.Assembled base and cover shall be 4.750" [12mm]wide by 1.750"[45mm] high with a cross section area of 7.50 square inches [484mm2]. Base shall be dividable by means of a removable barrier section into two(2) equal compartments.A cutting tool shall be available for the base and cover to ensure clean square cuts. SURFACE METAL RACEWAY 16111E-1 17 Cronin Road A full line of fittings must be available, including, but not limited to flat, internal and external elbows, couplings for joining raceway sections, wire clips, blank end fitting and a full compliment of device mounting brackets and plates. The fittings shall be colored to match the raceway. 2.2.2 Device Brackets and Plates Device brackets shall be available to install single or two(2) gang devices both horizontal or vertical within the raceway. Devices both power and data/communications shall have the capacity of mounting flush or in conjunction with faceplates. Device brackets and plates shall be colored to match the raceway. 2.2.3 Plastic Overlapping Cover Bracket and Faceplates A plastic device mounting bracket and trim plate shall be available to install devices horizontally. Trim plate shall overlap cover eliminating seam. Faceplates shall be available to accept a variety of power and data/communication devices. Plastic must be compatible with UL 94 for Plastic Materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Prior to and during installation, refer to system layout or approval drawings containing all elements of the system. Installer shall comply with detailed manufacturer's instruction sheets,which accompany system components as well as complete system instruction sheets,whichever is applicable. 3.1.1 Use surface metal raceway system of size required for number of wires to be installed therein. (Use specific size when indicated on the drawings). 3.1.2 Do not run raceway through walls which have a plaster finish nor through masonry walls or floors. Install a pipe sleeve,or a short length of conduit with junction boxes or adapter fittings for raceway runs through such areas. Run raceway along top of baseboards, care being taken to avoid telephone and other signal wiring. Where raceway crosses chair railing or L picture molding, cut the chair railing or picture molding to permit the raceway to lie flat against the wall. Run raceway around door frames and other openings. Run raceway on ceiling or walls perpendicular to or parallel with walls and floors. 3.1.3 Secure raceway at intervals not exceeding thirty-six(36) inches. 3.1.4 Install separate equipment grounding conductor for grounding of equipment. The raceway alone will not be considered suitable for use as an effective path to ground. 3.1.5 Completeness All raceway systems shall be installed complete, including insulating bushings and inserts where required by manufacturer's installation sheets.All unused raceway openings shall be closed. 3.1.6 Coordination Coordinate data face plates with data receptacle supplier for a complete finish. END OF SECTION NO. 16111E SURFACE METAL RACEWAY 16111E-2 17 Cronin Road SECTION 16120-WIRES AND CABLES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. This section is a Division 16 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to wires and cables specified herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of electrical wire and electrical cable work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of wire and cable in this section include the following: 1. Copper conductors 2. Fixture wires 3. Switchboard wires 4. Type MC cable C. Applications for wire, cable and connectors required for project are as follows: A. Power distribution circuitry 2. -Lighting circuitry 3. Equipment circuitry 4. Motor-branch circuitry 5. System Circuitry 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical wire and cable products of types and ratings required,whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5)years. PART 2-PRODUCTS -� 2.1 COPPER CONDUCTORS A. General: All conductors shall conform to the latest requirements of NEC, UL, ASTM, and NEMA. _. B. Wire shall be annealed bare copper per ANSI/ASTM B3, UL 83, and Federal Specification JC-30A with 600 volt insulation, be stranded(except for#10 AWG and smaller may be solid), and be minimum size#12 AWG (Except for control wiring and signal circuits). I C. Insulation: Provide THHN/THWN insulation for all conductors,exceptXHHW insulation may be used for conductors#4 and larger. WIRES AND CABLES 16120E-1 17 Cronin Road D. Conductors #10 and smaller shall be factory color-coded by integral pigmentation with a separate color for each phase and neutral. #8 and larger shall have either stripes, bands, hash marks or color pressure-sensitive plastic tape according to the following chart: SYSTEM VOLTAGE CONDUCTOR 120/208V, 3 PH, 4W - Phase A Black _ Phase B Red Phase C Blue Neutral White Ground Green E. Ampacity of conductors shall be rated for 75 degrees C regardless of temperature of conductor insulation when combining circuits in one (1) conduit. Derate conductors and increase size per NEC when installing multiple circuits in a raceway. F. Cables provide UL-type factory-fabricated cables of sizes, ampacity ratings, and materials and jacketing/sheathing as for services indicated. Type MC: Metal-clad cable with separate insulated green ground conductor; used for dry locations; concealed in walls and/or ceilings. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install electrical cables,wires and connectors in compliance with manufacturer's -written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's"Standard of.Installation", -and in accordance with recognized industry practices. Unless otherwise indicated,all wiring shall be in conduit exposed on wall,concealed in walls, - and above ceiling. B. Branch Circuits are identified as follows: 1. Branch circuit run with no identification or cross-lines indicates 2#12 AWG and 1 #12 AWG green insulated ground, type MC cable unless otherwise noted. ` 2. Home runs are indicated by arrow with circuit designated. 3. Conduit sizes other than %" and wire sizes other than #12 are called out or are indicated by note referencing the conductor and conduit schedule. C. Lighting Circuits and Controls are identified as follows: 1. Branch circuit runs the same as for branch circuits. _ 2. In spaces where conduit runs are not shown,connect all lighting fixtures to switch or switches in space or area designated. See legend for identification. Minimum conductor size is#12. 3. Connect circuits to phases indicated and provide a neutral with each phase conductor and/or with each group of different phase (2 or 3). D. Phase connections to all panelboards shall be "A", "B", "C", from left to right when facing panels. WIRES AND CABLES 16120E-2 17 Cronin Road - E. Taps and splices for#10 wire and smaller shall be made with pressure type self-insulated spring connectors. For wire#8 and larger, taps and splices shall be insulated with rubber and/or plastic electrical tape compatible with the conductor insulation. Split bolt or"servits" shall not be allowed. Keep splices to a minimum. F. Wires shall not be installed in conduits until any masonry, concrete or plaster is fully dried. G. Lubrication shall not be used to facilitate pulling wires into conduits except wire pulling compound specifically formulated for the purpose and compatible with the cable installation. Lubrication shall not be used to pull wiring connected to the secondary side of an isolation transformer serving an isolated distribution system. H. Unused wires in any outlet box shall be left neatly coiled in outlet box. I. Open wiring runs, Type MC cable, and flexible metal conduit, where specified, shall be gathered together throughout the installation, neatly cabled with plastic cable ties,Thomas. and Bets"Ty-Rap";or equal and secured in an approved manner to the building construction. Open wiring runs,where specified, shall be run in conduit where they pass through floors, walls ad roofs. These conduits shall be sealed as required to maintain the smoke and/or fire rating of the conduit. J. Those portions of branch circuit wiring above accessible type suspended ceilings may consist of flexible conduit or Type MC cable. However, in all instances interconnection to wiring in conduit shall be made at accessible junction boxes above suspended ceiling. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL -A. =Prior to energization,test cable and wire for continuity of circuitry,and also for short circuits.. Correct malfunctions when detected. B. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. END OF SECTION NO. 16120E _I I WIRES AND CABLES 16120E-3 17 Cronin Road SECTION 16121 -WIRING, GENERAL-600 VOLTS AND UNDER PART GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions. 1.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY A. Mark and tag insulated conductors for delivery to the site. Include: 1. Contractor's-name 2. Project title and number 3. Date of manufacture(month&year) 4. Manufacturer's name -_ 5. Data, which :explains the meaning of coded identification (UL assigned electrical reference numbers, UL assigned combination of color marker threads, etc.) PART PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATED CONDUCTORS -� A. Date of Manufacture: No insulated conductor more than one (1)year old when delivered to the site will be acceptable. B. Acceptable Companies: American Insulated Wire Corp., Cablec Corp., Cerro Wire&Cable . 1 Corp., Collyer Insulated Wire Co., Philadelphia'Insulated Wire Co., Pirelli Cable Corp., Rome Cable Corp., Royal Electric,Southwire Co., or Triangle PWC Inca C. Conductors: Annealed uncoated copper or annealed coated copper in conformance with the applicable standards for the type of insulation to be applied on the conductor. Conductor sizes No. 8 and larger shall be stranded. D. Types: 1. Electric Light and Power Wiring, and Class 1 Circuits: a. RHW: Rubber insulation-rated 600 V conforming to UL requirements for type RHW insulation (75 degrees C). b. THW: Polyvinylchloride insulation rated 600 V conforming to UL requirements for type THW insulation (75 degrees C). I C. XHHW- Moisture and heat resistant cross-linked polyethylene insulation rated i 600 V conforming to UL requirements for type XHHW insulation (75 degrees C wet and 90 degrees C dry). d. THWN: Polyvinylchloride insulation rated 600 V with nylon jacket conforming to UL requirements for type THWN 'insulation(75 degrees C). e: :THHN: .Polyvinylchloride insulation rated 600 V with nylon jacket conforming -- to UL requirements for type THHN insulation (90 degrees C). f. THWN Gasoline and Oil Resistant: Polyvinylchloride insulation rated 600 V with nylon jacket conforming to UL requirements"fortype THWN insulation, with the words"GASOLINE AND OIL RESISTANT II"marked thereon. 7 g. USE: Dual.rated heat and moisture resistant insulation rated 600 V with jacket j or dual purpose insulation/protective covering conforming to UL requirements for type USE service entrance cables. WIRING,GENERAL—600 VOLTS AND UNDER.... 16121 E-1 17 Cronin Road h. MC: Insulated conductors with flexible metal armor conforming to UL requirements for type MC metal-clad, having: 1) Galvanized steel strip formed into interlocking armor sheath 2) Copper conductors insulated with color coded polyvinylchloride insulation rated 600 V with nylon jacket conforming to UL requirements for type THHN insulation(90 degrees C) - 3) Internal full size copper ground conductor with green insulation 4) Connectors for MC cable; Arlington Industries Inc.'s Saddle Grip, Electroline Mfg. Co.'s L-67, L17, L-18, L-19, ETP Div. of Burger Industries Inc.'s AMC, or Thomas & Betts Co.'s Tite-Bite. Anti-short bushings; Electroline Mfg. Co.'s AS i. MI: Pyrotenax USA Inc.'s Mineral Insulated Pyrotenax Cable, having: 1) Solid copper conductors 2) Twisted pair solid copper conductors No. 18 AWG. 3) Seamless copper sheath 4) Stainless steel Alloy 825 sheath 5) PVC jacket 6) Moisture resistant fittings 7) Two hour fire resistive rating UL classified 8) Fire rated joints-250 degrees C 9) Fittings for hazardous locations to suit degree of hazard 10) 600 volt rating 11) Accessories as required for a complete system to suit installation conditions 2. Types for Class 2 Circuits: NEC Type CL2P, CL2R, CL3, PLTC. 3. Types for Class 3 Circuits: - a. Single Conductor. 1) . No. -18 and 16•AWG: Rated 600 V, -minimum 75 degrees C; Type RFH-2, RFHH-2, RFHH-3, FFH-2,TF,TFF,TFN,TFFN, PF, PFF, PGF, - PGFF, PTF, PTFF, SF-2, SFF-2, PAF, PAFF,ZF,ZFF, KF-2, or KFF-2 2) No. 14 AWG and Larger. Same as Class 1 circuits b. Multiconductor Cables: Rated 300 V minimum, NEC Type CL3P, CL3R, CL3, PLTC 2.2 CONNECTORS A. General: Connectors specified are part of a system. Furnish connectors and components, and use specific tools and methods as recommended by connector manufacturer to form complete connector system. B. Splices: 1. Spring Type: Buchanan Construction Products Inc.'s B-Cap, Electrical Products Div./3M's Scotchlok Type Y, R, G, or B, or Ideal Industries Inc.'s Wing Nuts or Wire Nuts ) 2. Indent Type with Insulating Jacket: Amerace Corp. Elastimold Div.'s Buchanan _- Pressure Connectors, Ideal Industries Inc.'s Crimp Connectors, or Thomas & Betts Corp.'s STA-KON 3. Indent Type (Uninsulated): Bumdy.Corp.'s Hydent, or Thomas & Betts Corp.'s Compression Connectors - 4. Resin Splice Kits: Electrical Products Div./3M's Scotchcast Brand Kit Nos. 82A Series, 82-B1 or 90-131, or Scotchcast Brand Resin Pressure Splicing Method WIRING,GENERAL-600.VOLTS AND UNDER 16121 E-2 17 Cronin Road F-1 5. Heat Shrinkable Splices: Electrical Products Div./3M's ITCSN, Raychem Corp.'s Thermofit Type WCS,-or Thomas&Betts Corp.'s SHRINK-KON Insulators 6. Cold Shrink Splices: Electrical Products Div./3M's PST C. Gutter Taps: Bumdy Corp's Polytap KPU-C, H-Crimpit Type YF, Dossert Mfg. Corp.'s Series GTC,°or OZ/Gedney Co.'s PMX or PT with covers PMXC, PTC D. Terminals: Nylon insulated pressure terminal connectors as manufactured by Amp Special Industries, Bumdy Corp., Electrical Products Div./3M, Ideal Industries Inc., Panduit Corp., Thomas&Betts Corp., or Wiremold Co. E. Lugs: 1.. Single Cable (Compression Type Lugs): Copper, one or 2 hole style (to suit conditions), long barrel; Bumdy Corp.'s Hylug YA, Electrical Products Div./3M Scotchlok 31036 or 31145 Series, Ideal Industries Inc.'s CCB or CCBL, or Thomas& Betts Corp.'s 54930BE or 54850BE Series. 2. Single Cable (Mechanical Type Lugs): Copper, one or.2 hole style (to suit conditions); Burndy Corp.'s Quicklug Series, or Thomas & Betts Corp.'s Locktite Series 3. Multiple Cable (Mechanical Type Lugs): Copper, configuration to suit conditions; Burndy Corp.'s Quicklug Series, or Thomas&Betts Corp.'s Locktite Series 2.3 TAPES A. Insulation Tapes: 1. Plastic Tape: ' -Electrical Products Div./3M's Scotch 88, Plymouth Rubber Co.'s -Plymouth Bishop Premium 85CW •. 2. .Rubber Tape: -.Electrical Products Div./3M s Scotch -:23,-or Plymouth Rubber Cc Cs Plymouth Bishop W963 Plysafe B. Moisture Sealing Tape: Electrical Products Div./3M's Scotch 2200 or 2210, or Plymouth --' Rubber Co.'s Plymouth Bishop 4000 Plyseal V ? C. Electrical Filler Tape: Electrical Products Div./3M's Scotchfil, or Plymouth Rubber Co.'s r 1 Plymouth Bishop 125 Electrical Filler Tape D. Color Coding Tape: Electrical Products Div./3M's Scotch 35, or Plymouth Rubber Co.'s Plymouth Bishop Premium 37 Color Coding E. Arc Proofing Tapes: 1. Arc Proofing Tape: Electrical Products Div./3M's Scotch 77, Mac Products Inc.'s AP30-30 or AP, Plymouth Rubber Co.'s Plymouth .Bishop 53 Plyarc, or Quelcor Inc.'s Quelpyre. 2. Glass Cloth Tape: Mac Products Inc.'s TAPGLA 5066„ or Plymouth Rubber Co.'s Plymouth Bishop 77 Plyglas. 3. Glass-Fiber Cord: Mac Products Ines MAC 0527,.or Quelcor Inc.'s QTC-250. I 2.4 WIRE-PULLING COMPOUNDS A. To suit type of insulation; American Polywater Corp.'s Polywater, Greenlee Textron Inc.'s j Green 80, or Ideal Industries Inc.'s Aqua-Gel Il, Agua-Gel CW, Electric Products Div./3M's _ WL,Yellow 77,Yellow 190, or Wire-Lube. WIRING,GENERAL—600 VOLTS AND UNDER 16121E-3 17 Cronin Road 2.5 TAGS A. Precision engrave letters and numbers with uniform margins, character size minimum 3/16 inches high. 1. Phenolic: Two (2) color laminated engraver's stock, 1/16 inch minimum thickness, machine engraved to expose inner core color(white) 2. Aluminum: Standard aluminum alloy plate stock, minimum .032 inches thick, engraved areas enamel filled or background enameled with natural aluminum engraved characters PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install conductors in raceways after the raceway system is completed. Exceptions: Type MC, MI,or other type specifically indicated on the drawings not to be installed in raceways. B. No grease, oil, or lubricant other than wire-pulling compounds specified may be used to facilitate the installation of conductors. C. Use nylon line, polyethylene line, or manila rope as pull wires when installing conductors in rigid nonferrous metal conduit or rigid nonmetallic conduits. _ 3.2 CIRCUITING A. Do not change, group or combine circuits other than as indicated on the drawings. - _ -- S. Do not change, group or combine circuits other:than as indicated on the drawings except as permitted under Section 16110 when reusing existing raceways. 3.3 COMMON NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR i A. A common neutral may be used for two(2) or three(3) branch circuits where the circuits are indicated on the drawings to be enclosed within the same raceway, provided each branch - circuit is connected to different phase busses in the panelboard. B. Exceptions-The following circuits shall have a separate neutral: 1. Circuits containing ground fault circuit interrupter devices 2. Circuits containing solid state dimmers 3. Circuits recommended by equipment manufacturers to have separate neutrals 3.4 CONDUCTOR SIZE A. Conductor Size: Install conductors of size shown on drawings. Where size is not indicated, ;r the minimum size allowed is: 1. For Electric Light and Power Branch Circuits: No. 12 AWG. 2. For Class 1 Circuits: No. 14 AWG. - 3. For Class 2 Circuits: Any size to suit application 4. For Class 3 Circuits: No. 18 AWG. _ WIRING,GENERAL—600 VOLTS AND UNDER 16121 E-4 17 Cronin Road 3.5 COLOR CODING A. Color Code For Electric Light and Power Wiring: 1. Color Code for Branch Circuits: Install color coded insulated conductors for branch circuits as follows: a. 120/208 Volt Circuits: 2 wire circuit-white*, black 3 wire circuit-white*, black, red 4 wire circuit-white*, black, red, blue *White to be used only as neutral. If neutral not required use black and red, or black, red and blue for phase to phase circuits. 2. Color Code for Feeders: Install color coding tapes on feeders at terminations and at TO"intervals in gutters, pullboxes and manholes. Color code as follows: a. 120/208 Volt Feeder. 2 wire circuit-white*, black 3 wire circuit-white*, black, red -; 4 wire circuit-white*, black, red, blue *White to be used only as neutral. If neutral not required use black and red, or black, --- red and blue for phase to phase circuits. B. Color Code For Wiring Other Than Electric Light and Power. In accordance with } ICEA/NEMA WC-30 "Color:Coding of Wires and Cables". Other coding methods may,be' used, as approved. - 3.6 IDENTIFICATION A. Identification: Use tags to identify feeders and designated circuits. Install tags so that they are easily read without moving adjacent feeders or requiring removal of arc proofing tapes. Attach tags with non-ferrous wire or brass chain. i 1. Interior Feeders: Identify each feeder in pullboxes and gutters_. Identify by feeder number and size. 2. Exterior Feeders: Identify each feeder in manholes and in interior.pullboxes and gutters. Identify by feeder number and size, and also indicate building number and _ panel designation from which feeder originates. . 3. Street and'Grounds Lighting.Circuits: Identify each circuit in manholes and lighting M standard bases. Identify by circuit number and size, and also indicate building number and panel designation from which circuit originates. 1 3.7 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR A. Install equipment grounding conductor. 1. Where specified in other Sections or indicated on the drawings. 2. In conjunction with circuits recommended by equipment manufacturers to have equipment grounding conductor. WIRING,GENERAL—600 VOLTS AND UNDER 16121E.75 17 Cronin Road B. Equipment grounding conductor may be bare or identified with a continuous green color insulation. This conductor is not intended as a current carrying conductor under normal operating circumstances. 3.8 ARC PROOFING A. Arc proof feeders installed in a common pullbox or manhole as follows: 1. Arc proof new feeders 2. Arc proof existing feeders that are spliced to new feeders 3. Arc proof each feeder as a unit (except feeders consisting of multiple sets of conductors) 4. Arc proof feeders consisting of multiple sets of conductors by arc proofing each set of conductors as a unit 5. Arc proof feeders with half-lapped layer of 55 mils thick arc proofing tape and random wrapped or laced with glass cloth tape or glass-fiber cord. For arc proofing tape less _ than 55 mils thick, add layers to equivalent of 55 mils thick arc proofing tape 3.9 INSULATED CONDUCTOR SCHEDULE -TYPES AND USE A. Electric Light and Power,And Class 1 Circuits: -- 1. RHW, THW, XHHW, THWN or THHN: Wiring in dry locations (except where special - type insulation is required). 2. RHW, THW, XHHW, or THWN: Wiring in damp locations(except where special type insulation is required). 3. THWN, XHHW, or USE: 'Wiring in wet locations (except where type USE insulated conductors are specifically required,-or special type insulation is required). 4. THWN: Wiring-installed in existing raceway systems (except where special type insulation is required). - 5. THHN or XHHW: Wiring for electric discharge lighting circuits(fluorescent, HID). 6. THWN Marked"Gasoline and Oil Resistant': Wiring to gasoline and fuel oil pu mps. i 7. USE: a. Service entrance wiring from overhead service to the service equipment b. Wiring exposed to the weather and unprotected (except where special type insulation is required) C. Wiring indicated on drawings to be direct burial in earth 8. MC: a. Branch circuit wiring in wood framed construction (wood joists and wood stud partitions). Install conductors parallel with joists or studs and attach to the side of these timbers by galvanized straps or staples spaced not more than 4 feet apart Install conductors through holes bored in the center of the timbers when running at right angles to joists or studs. Do not attach the conductors to the edge of joists or studs. b. Branch circuit wiring in movable metal partitions and movable gypsum - partitions. Install conductors in accordance with partition manufacturers recommendations. 9. MI: a. Wiring for underplaster extensions b. Wiring in areas where indicated on drawings B. Class 2 Circuits: CL2P, CL2R, CL3, PLTC WIRING,GENERAL-600 VOLTS AND UNDER 16121E-6 17 Cronin Road - C. Class 3 Circuits: For circuits meeting parameters for National Electrical Code Class 3 circuits and where the Class 3 power supply unit has been durably marked by the - manufacturer where plainly visible to indicate the class of supply and its electrical rating: 1. No. 16 and 18 AWG single conductor circuits, use: a. RFH-2, RFHH-2, RFHH-3, FFH-2, TF, TFF, TFN, TFFN, PF, PFF, PGF, PGFF, PTF, PTFF, SF-2, SFF-2, PAF, PAFF, ZF, ZFF, KF-2 or KFF-2 for wiring in dry locations(except where special type insulation is required). b. RFH-2, RFHH-2, RFHH-3, FFH-2, TF, TFF, TFN, TFFN, PF, PFF, PGF, PGFF, PTF, PTFF, SF-2, SFF-2, ZF, or ZFF for wiring in:damp locations (except where special type insulation is required). C. TFN, TFFN, SF-2, or SFF-2 for wiring in wet locations (except where.special -_ type insulation is required). 2. No. 14 AWG and Larger Single Conductors: Same as Class 1. 3. Multiconductor Circuits: CL3P, MR, CL3, PLTC.- 3.10 CONNECTOR SCHEDULE -TYPES AND USE A. Splices: 1. Dry Locations: a.. For Conductors No. 8 AWG or Smaller. Use spring type pressure connectors or indent type pressure connectors with insulating jackets (except where special type splices are required). b. For Conductors No. 6 AWG or Larger. Use uninsulated indent type pressure connectors.' Fill indentions with electrical filler tape and apply insulation tape to - - ..insulation equivalent of the conductor, or insulate with heat shrinkable splices =or cold shrink splices: . - C. Gutter Taps in Panelboards: Install gutter tap,fill indentions with electrical filler tape and apply insulation tape to insulation equivalent of the conductor, or insulate with gutter tap cover. 2. Damp Locations: As Specified for dry locations, except apply moisture sealing tape over the entire insulated connection (moisture sealing tape not required if heat - shrinkable splices are used). r 3. Wet Locations: Use uninsulated indent type pressure connectors and insulate with resin splice kits or heat shrinkable splices. Exception: Splices above ground which are totally enclosed and protected in NEMA 3R,4,4X enclosures may be spliced as specified for damp locations. B. Terminations: - 1. For Conductors No. 10 AWG or Smaller. Use terminals for: a. Connecting wiring to equipment designed for use with terminals 2. For Conductors No. 8 AWG or Larger. Use compression or mechanical type lugs for. a. Connecting cables to flat bus bars b. Connecting cables to equipment designed for use with lugs 3. For Conductor Sizes Larger Than Terminal Capacity On Equipment: Reduce the larger conductor to the maximum conductor size that terminal can accommodate 1 (reduced section not longer than one foot). Use compression or mechanical type connectors suitable for reducing connection. END OF SECTION NO. 16121E. WIRING,GENERAL—600 VOLTS AND UNDER 16121 E-7 17 Cronin Road ,I SECTION 16130-ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract,,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. This section is a Division 16 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to electrical wiring boxes and,fittings specified herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of electrical box and electrical fitting work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of electrical boxes and fittings specified in this section include the following: 1. Outlet boxes -�� 2. Junction boxes 3. Pull boxes 4. Floor boxes 5.. Bushings 6. Locknuts 7. Knockout closures .1.3, .QUALITY ASSURANCE. . A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical boxes and fittings, of types and sizes required,whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3)years. _ PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FABRICATED MATERIALS A_ Interior Outlet Boxes: Provide galvanized coated flat rolled sheet-steel interior outlet wiring boxes,of types,shapes and sizes, including box depths,to suit each respective location and installation; construct with stamped knockouts in back and sides, and with threaded screw -� holes with corrosion-resistant screws for securing box covers and wiring devices. B. Weatherproof Outlet Boxes:Provide corrosion-resistant cast-metal weatherproof outlet wiring boxes, of types, shapes and sizes, including depth of boxes, with"threaded conduit ends, cast-metal face plates with spring-hinged waterproof caps suitably configured for each _ application, including face plate gaskets and corrosion-resistant fasteners. - C. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized code-gage sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw-on covers; of types, shapes and sizes, to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers. ELECTRICAL BOXES&FITTINGS 16130E-1 17 Cronin Road D. Conduit Bodies: Provide galvanized cast-metal conduit bodies,of types,shapes and sizes, to suit respective locations and installation,construct with threaded-conduit-entrance ends, removable covers, and corrosion-resistant screws. E. Bushings, Knockout Closures and Lockouts: Provide corrosion-resistant punched-steel box knockout closures,conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings,offset connectors, of types and sizes, to suit respective installation. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS A. General: Install electrical boxes and fittings where indicated,complying with manufacturer's written instructions,applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's"Standard of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable and raceway installation work. C. Provide weathertight outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture. D. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed. E. Install boxes and conduit bodies in those locations to ensure ready accessibility of e!ectrical wiring. F. Avoid using round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box-,-which-would . result in difficult and insecure connections when fastened with locknut or bushing on rounded surface. G. Fasten boxes rigidly to substrates or structural surfaces to which attached,or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry. H. Provide electrical connections for installed boxes. END OF SECTION NO. 16130E i i ELECTRICAL BOXES&FITTINGS 16130E-2 17 Cronin-Road SECTION 16132-INTERIOR RACEWAYS, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. NEMA,ANSI, and UL. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions. 1.3 MAINTENANCE A. Spare Parts: Furnish the following items in the manufacturer's original containers labeled with the names of the items and locations where the items would be used. Store them at the site where directed: 1. Touch up coating compound for plastic coated rigid metal conduit(one spray type can and one non-spray can with brush top). PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 RACEWAYS A. Rigid Ferrous Metal Conduit:. Steel, galvanized on the outside and enameled on the inside or hot dipped galvanized on the outside and inside, UL categorized as Rigid Ferrous Metal Conduit (identified on UL Listing Mark as Rigid Metal Conduit =Steel or Rigid Steel Conduit), by Allied Tube & Conduit, OCAL, Inc., Robroy Industries, Inc., Triangle Wire & Cable, Inc., Wheatland Tube Co. or Galvite by LTV Steel, Tubular Division. B. Intermediate Ferrous Metal Conduit: Steel, galvanized on the outside and enameled on the inside .or galvanized on the outside and inside, UL categorized as Intermediate Ferrous Metal Conduit (identified on UL Listing Mark as Intermediate Metal Conduit or IMC), by Allied Tube & Conduit Corp., Cerro Conduit Co., ETP Div. of Berger Industries, Inc., Triangle Wire &Cable, Inc.,Wheatland Tube Co., or LTV Steel, Tubular Division. i C. Electrical Metallic Tubing: Steel, electro-galvanized on the outside and enameled on the inside, UL categorized as Electrical Metallic Tubing (identified on UL Listing Mark as Electrical Metallic Tubing), by ETP Div. of Burger Industries, Inc., Robroy Industries, Inc., Triangle Wire &Cable, Inc., Wheatland Tube Co., or LTV Steel, Tubular Division. D. Flexible Metal Conduit: Galvanized steel strip shaped into interlocking convolutions, UL _. categorized as Flexible Metal Conduit (identified on UL Listing Mark as Flexible Steel Conduit or Flexible Steel.Conduit Type RW), by American Flexible Conduit Co., Anamet Electrical, Inc., Electri-Flex Co., or International Metal Hose Co. I E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Anamet-Electrical, Inc.'s Sealtite Type UA, Electri-Flex Co.'s Type LA, LA/LOR Liquatite, or Universal Metal Hose Co.'s Universal Sealflex-U. F. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit, Fittings, and Accessories: Carlon's Plus 40, CertainTeed Corp.'s Schedule 40, or Queen City Plastics, Inc.'s Schedule 40. INTERIOR RACEWAYS; FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES 16132E-1 17 Cronin Road G. Wireways, Fittings and Accessories: Hoffman Engineering Co.'s Bulletin F-40 (without knockouts), Electromate/Robroy EW&EWHC Lay-In Wreway System(without knockouts), or Square D Co.'s Square-Duct Combination Lay-In Wireway System LDWK. _ H. Plastic Coated Rigid Metal Conduit, Fittings, and Accessories: Rigid ferrous metal conduit, fittings, and accessories coated with 40 mils thick polyvinylchloride coating; OCAL, Inc.'s Ocal 40, PCD, Inc.'s Kor-Kap, or Robroy Industries' Plastibond System. I. Chrome Plated Conduit: 1. Everdur conduit by Farmer's Copper& Industrial Supply, Inc. Cut conduit to size required, thread, ream, etc. so that conduit is finished and ready for installation except for chrome plating. Chrome plate Everdur conduit with .2 mils copper followed by .5 mils nickel and .1 to .2 mils chromium. a. Fittings, hangers, etc. made of Everdur metal by Crouse Hinds Co., chrome plated as specified for Everdur conduit. 2.2 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES A. Insulated Bushings: Appleton Electric Co.'s BU501 Series, OZ/Gedney Co.'s IBC-50 Series, Raco Inc.'s 1132 Series, or Thomas & Betts Corp.'s 1222 Series. B. Plastic Bushings for Y2 and 3/ Inch Conduit:Appleton Electric Co.'s BBU50, BBU75, OZ/Gedney Co.'s IB-50, IB-75, Raco Inc.'s 1402, 1403, or Thomas& Betts Corp.'s 222, . 223. C. Insulated Grounding Bushings: Appleton Electric Co.'s GIB-50 Series, Midwest Electric Mfg. Corp.'s GLL Series, OZ/Gedney Co.'s IBC-50L Series, Raco Inc.'s 1212.Series, or Thomas & Betts Corp.'s 3870 or BG Series. D. Connectors and Couplings: 1. Locknuts: Appleton Electric Co.'s BL-50 Series, OZ/Gedney Co.'s 1-50S Series, - Raco Inc.'s 1002 Series, or Thomas& Betts Corp.'s 141 Series 2. Grounding Wedge: Thomas & Betts Corp.'s 3650 Series 3. Couplings (For Rigid Metal and IMC Conduit): Standard threaded couplings as furnished by conduit manufacturer, or Allied Tube&Conduits' Kwik-Couple 4. Three(3) Piece Conduit Coupling (For Rigid Metal and IMC Conduit): Appleton Electric Co.'s EC-50 Series, OZ/Gedney Co.'s 4-50 Series, Raco Inc.'s 1502 Series, or Thomas& Betts Corp.'s 675 Series 5. Electrical Metallic Tubing Connectors and Couplings (Compression Type): - Appleton Electric Co.'s TW-50CS1, TWC-50CS Series, ETP Div. Berger Industries Inc.'s 2241, 2231-IC Series, Raco Inc.'s 2912, 2922 Series, orTomic Electric's TW120, TW140 Series, or EMT TAP-ON Raintight with bushing for Y2 to one (1) inch tubing 6. Flexible Metal Conduit Connectors: Arlington Industries Inc.'s Saddle-Grip SG38, SG50, OZ/Gedney Co.'s C-8T, 24-34T,ACV-50T Series, or Thomas& Betts Corp.'s Nylon Insulated Tite-Bite Series - 7. Liquidtight Connectors (For Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit): Appleton Electric Co.'s STB Series, Crouse-Hinds Co.'s LTB Series, Ideal Industries Inc. 75-521 Series, OZ/Gedney Co.'s 4Q-50T Series, Raco Inc.'s 3512 Series, or Thomas& Betts Corp.'s 5332 Series INTERIOR RACEWAYS, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES 16132E-2 17 Cronin Road I E. Conduit Bodies (Threaded): 1. Malleable Iron/Zinc Electroplate: Zinc electroplate malleable iron or cast iron alloy bodies with zinc electroplate steel covers; Appleton Electric Co.'s Unilets, Crouse-Hinds Co.'s Condulets, or OZ/Gedney Co.'s Conduit Bodies. F. Expansion Fittings: 1. Zinc Electroplate Finish: Appleton Electric Co.'s XJ, Crouse-Hinds Co.'s XJ, or OZ/Gedney Co.'s AX(TX for EMT),with external bonding jumper. 2. Electrogalvanized Steel: Crouse Hinds Co.'s XJG, with internal grounding. G. Deflection Fittings: Crouse-Hinds Co.'s XD,-or OZ/Gedney Co.'s Type DX. H. Expanding Silicone Foam: Chase Technology Corp.'s CTC PR-855, Dow Corning's Silicone RTV Foam, or General Electric Co.'s PENSIL 851. I. Vertical Conductor Supports: Kellems Div. Harvey Hubbell Conduit Riser Grips, or OZ/Gedney Co.'s Type M, Type R. J. Pulling-In-Line: Polypropylene monofilament utility line for use with power or conventional fish tape systems to pull rope through conduit. Not for pulling wire or cable. American Synthetic Ropes' Flotorope, Greenlee Textron, Inc.'s 2 ply Rope 431, or Thomas Industries' Jet Line Products Rope 232. .K. Wire Pulling Rope: 3/16" minimum diameter twisted polypropylene rope; Crowe Rope Industries. 1:. 'Pulling Lubricant:' Gel or cream type, Greenlee Textron Co.'s Type GELJCRf4t. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY INSTALLATION -GENERAL r A. Number of Circuits in Raceway: Each raceway shall enclose one (1)circuit unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. B. Number of Raceways: Do not change number of raceways too less.than the number indicated on.the drawings. C. Number of Raceways:.Do not change number of raceways to less than the number _; indicated on the drawings except when appropriate for advantageous reuse of existing exposed and concealed raceways (The contract documents do not indicate location, number, size or condition of existing raceways). Existing raceways may be reused if the I following conditions are met: 1. The existing raceway must be of adequate size for the new conductors to be installed therein (NEC Chapter 9, Tables 1, 4, &5; Appendix C, Tables C1- C12a). More circuits may be enclosed.by existing raceways than the circuiting shown on the drawings provided conductor sizes are increased to compensate for derating required by NEC Note 8 to Tables 310-16 through 310-19. 2. Remove existing conductors. 3. Demonstrate to the Director's representative that the existing raceway is clear of obstructions and in good condition. INTERIOR RACEWAYS, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES 16132E-3 17 Cronin Road 4. Check ground continuity. When ground continuity of existing raceway is inadequate install insulated grounding bushings, grounding wedges, bonding straps, grounding jumpers or equipment grounding conductors to establish effective path to ground. 5. Install insulated bushings to replace damaged or missing bushings. Replace non-insulated bushings with insulated bushings on raceway sizes one(1) inch and larger. 6. Install vertical conductor supports to replace existing or missing vertical conductor supports. 7. Install extension rings on existing boxes when the number of new conductors installed therein exceeds NEC requirements. 8. Furnish the Director's representative with marked up drawings showing size and routing of existing raceways with number and size of new conductors installed therein. The drawings will be forwarded to the design engineer for verification of NEC compliance. D. Raceways for Future Use(Spare Raceways and Empty Raceways): Draw fish tape through raceways in the presence of the Director's representative to show that the raceway is clear of obstructions. 1. Install a pulling-in line in each raceway. E. Conduit Installed Concealed In Existing Construction: - 1. Install conduit concealed in existing chases and hung ceilings unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 2. If conduit cannot be installed concealed due to conditions encountered in the building, report such conditions and await approval in writing-before proceeding. -F. Conduit Installed Concealed in New Construction: 1. Ceilings, Walls, Partitions: Install conduit concealed in the ceilings,walls, and partitions of the building unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Concrete - slabs that are both ceilings and floors shall be treated as floor slabs. 2. If any portions of the conduit system,cannot be installed concealed due to conditions encountered in the building, report such conditions and await approval in writing before proceeding. G. Conduit Installed Exposed: 1. Install conduit exposed where indicated on the drawings. 2. Install conduit tight to the surface of the building construction unless otherwise indicated or directed. 3. Install vertical runs perpendicular to the floor. 4. Install runs on the ceiling perpendicular or parallel to the walls. 5. Install horizontal runs parallel to the floor. 6. Do not run conduits near heating pipes. 7. Installation of conduit directly on the floor will not be permitted. H. Conduit Size: Not smaller than 'h inch electrical trade size. Where type XHHW, THWN or THHN conductors are specified for use under Section 16121, the minimum allowable conduit size for new Work shall be based on Type THW or RHW conductors. INTERIOR RACEWAYS, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES _16132E-4 17 Cronin Road I. Conduit Bends: For and inch conduits, bends may be made with manual benders. For all conduit sizes larger than inch, manufactured or field fabricated offsets or bends may be used. Make field fabricated offsets or bends with an approved hydraulic bender. J. Raceways Exposed to Different Temperatures: Where portions of an interior raceway system are exposed to widely different temperatures, seal raceway with expanding silicone foam to prevent circulation of air from a warmer to a colder section through the raceway. 1. Refrigerated Rooms: Install conduit body or junction box in the raceway system on warm side of refrigerated room. After conductors are installed, inject expanding silicone foam into the raceway at the conduit body or junction box. 2. Heated Areas to Unheated Areas: After conductors are installed, inject expanding silicone foam into the raceway at the nearest conduit body, outlet or junction box in the heated area adjoining the unheated area. 3.2 RACEWAY SCHEDULE A. Rigid Ferrous Metal Conduit: Install in all locations unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings. B. Intermediate Ferrous Metal Conduit: May be installed in all dry and damp locations except: 1. Hazardous areas 2. Where other type raceways are specified or indicated on the drawings Electrical Metallic Tubing: 1. May be installed concealed as branch circuit conduits above suspended ceilings . 2. May be installed concealed as branch circuit conduits in hollow areas in dry j locations, including: a. Hollow concrete masonry units, except where cores are to be filled. b. Drywall construction with sheet metal studs, except where studs are less than 3Y2 inches deep. 3. May be installed exposed as branch circuit conduits at elevations over 10'-0" above finished floor. _ D. Flexible Metal Conduit: Install equipment grounding conductor in the flexible metal conduit and bond at each box or equipment to which conduit is connected: 1. Use for final conduit connection to recessed lighting fixtures in suspended ceilings: Use four(4)to six(6)feet of flexible metal conduit(minimum size Y2 - inch) between junction box and fixture. Locate junction box at least 1 foot from fixture and accessible if the fixture is removed. 2. Use one (1)to three (3)feet of flexible metal conduit for final conduit connection to: a. Emergency lighting units b. Dry type transformers C. Motors with open, drip-proof or splash-proof housings d. Equipment subject to vibration (dry locations) e. Equipment requiring flexible connection for adjustment or alignment(dry locations) INTERIOR RACEWAYS, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES 16132E-5 17 Cronin Road I 3. Use for concealed branch circuit conduits above existing non-removable suspended ceilings where rigid type raceways cannot be installed due to inaccessibility of space above ceiling. 4. May be installed concealed as branch circuit conduits in drywall construction with - sheet metal studs, except where studs are less than 3'/2 inches deep. E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Install equipment grounding conductor in liquidtight flexible metal conduit and bond at each box or equipment to which conduit is connected: 1. Use one(1)to three (3)feet of liquidtight flexible metal conduit for final conduit connection to: a. Motors with weather-protected or totally enclosed housings b. Equipment subject to vibration (damp and wet locations) C. Equipment requiring flexible connection for adjustment or alignment (damp and wet locations) F. Multi-Outlet Assembly: Use at locations indicated on drawings. 1. Do not run multioutlet assembly through walls or floors. Install a pipe sleeve, or a short length of conduit with junction boxes or adapter fittings for runs through such areas. 2. Secure multioutlet assembly every thirty (30) inches alternately with two(2) hole straps and fasteners through back of multioutlet assembly (2 hole strap, fastener through back, 2 hole strap, etc.). -3. Secure multioutlet assembly at intervals not exceeding thirty-six(36) inches. 4. Install separate equipment grounding.conductor for grounding of equipment. The multioutlet assembly alone will.not be considered suitable for use as an effective path to ground. G. Chrome Plated Conduit: Use in operating, autopsy and x-ray rooms where conduit is required to be installed exposed. Install conduit and fittings with special tools to avoid damaging chrome finish. Install Work in accordance with NEC Article 500(Hazardous Locations) and Article 517(Health Care Facilities) of the National Electrical Code. 3.4 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE A. General: 1. Use zinc electroplate or hot dipped galvanized steel/malleable iron or cast iron alloy fittings and accessories in conjunction with ferrous raceways in dry and damp locations unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings. 2. Use insulated grounding bushings or grounding wedges on ends of conduit for terminating and bonding equipment grounding conductors (when required) if cabinet or boxes are not equipped with grounding/bonding screws or lugs. 3. Use caps or plugs to seal ends of conduits until wiring is installed (to exclude foreign material). 4. Use insulated grounding bushings on the ends of conduits, which are not directly connected to the enclosure(such as stub-ups under equipment, etc.)and bond between bushings and enclosure with equipment grounding conductor. 5. Use expansion fittings where raceways cross expansion joints. _- 6. Use deflection fittings where raceways cross expansion joints, which move in more than one (1) plane. 7. Use two (2) locknuts and an insulated bushing on end of each conduit entering sheet metal cabinet or box in dry or damp locations. INTERIOR RACEWAYS, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES 16132E-6 17 Cronin Road a. Plastic bushing may be used on and%inch conduit in lieu of insulated bushing- b. Terminate conduit ends within cabinet/box at the same level. B. For Rigid and Intermediate Metal Conduit: Use threaded fittings and accessories. Use three(3) piece conduit coupling where neither piece of conduit can be rotated. C. For Electrical Metallic Tubing: Use compression type connectors and couplings. Tap-on type may be used for tubing size'/2t o one(1) inch. D. For Flexible Metal Conduit: Use flexible metal conduit connectors. E. For Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Use liquidtight connectors. F. For Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit: Use conduit manufacturer's standard fittings and accessories. G. For Multi-Outlet Assembly: Use manufacturer's standard fittings and accessories. H. For Wreways: Use wireway manufacturers standard fittings and accessories. I. For Plastic Coated Rigid Metal Conduit: Use conduit manufacturer's PVC coated fittings and accessories. - '.END OF SECTION�NO.--°16132E i I INTERIOR RACEWAYS, FITTINGS AND'ACCESSORIES 16132E-7 - 17 Cronin Road i i i SECTION 16134.-OUTLET, JUNCTION,AND PULL BOXES PART GENERAL - 1.1 ,REFERENCES A. NEMA, and UL. 1.2 SUBMITTALS - A. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions. For fire rated construction, prove that materials and installation methods proposed for use are in accordance with the listing requirements of the classified construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS , 2.1 GALVANIZED STEEL OUTLET BOXES A. Standard galvanized steel boxes and device covers by Appleton Electric Co., Beck . Mfg./Picoma Industries, Cooper/Crouse-Hinds, Raco/Div. of Hubbell, or Steel City/T& B Corp. 2.2 GALVANIZED STEEL JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES A. Code gage, galvanized steel screw cover boxes by Delta Metal Products Inc., Hoffman Enclosures Inc.; Hubbell Wiegmann, Lee Products Co.;or Rittal/Electromate. 2.3 THREADED TYPE BOXES: A. Outlet Boxes: - 1. . For Dry, Damp Locations: Zinc electroplate malleable iron or cast iron alloy boxes by Appleton Electric Co., Cooper/Crouse-Hinds Co., or OZ/Gedney Co., - with zinc electroplate steel covers to suit application. 2. For Wet Locations: Malleable iron or cast iron alloy boxes with hot dipped galvanized or other specified corrosion resistant finish as produced by Cooper/Crouse-Hinds(hot dipped galvanized or Corro-free epoxy powder coat), or OZ/Gedney Co. (hot dipped galvanized), with stainless steel cover screws, - and malleable iron covers gasketed to suit application. B. Junction And Pull Boxes: For Dry, Damp Locations: Zinc electroplate cast iron boxes by Appleton Electric Co., Cooper/Crouse-Hinds, or OZ/Gedney Co.,-with zinc electroplate steel or cast iron cover. -, 2. For Wet Locations: Cast iron boxes by Cooper/Crouse-Hinds' (hot dipped galvanized or Corro-free epoxy powder coat), or OZ/Gedney Co. (hot dipped galvanized),with stainless steel cover screws and cast iron cover gasketed to suit application. OUTLET,JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES 16134E-1 -- 17 Cronin Road C. Conduit Bodies, Threaded (Provided with a Volume Marking): 1. For Dry, Damp Location: Zinc electroplate malleable iron or cast iron alloy bodies with zinc electroplate steel covers;Appleton Electric Co.'s Unilets, Cooper/Crouse-Hinds'Condulets, or OZ/Gedney Co.'s Conduit Bodies. 2. For Wet Locations: Malleable iron or cast iron alloy bodies with hot dipped galvanized or other specified corrosion resistant finish; Cooper/Crouse-Hinds' Condulets(hot dipped galvanized or Corro-free epoxy power coat), or OZ/Gedney Co.'s Conduit Bodies(hot dipped galvanized)with stainless steel cover screws and malleable iron covers gasketed to suit application. 2.4 CORROSION RESISTANT BOXES A. Plastic Coated Outlet and Junction Boxes: Threaded type malleable iron boxes coated with 40 mils thick polyvinylchloride coating; Ocal/T&B Corp.'s Ocal-Blue System, PCD Inc.'s KorKap, KorKap XL, or Robroy Industries' Plastibond or Perma-Cote System. _ B. Non-Metallic Junction and Pullboxes: Glass fiber reinforced polyester; Carlon/Div. of Lamon and Sessions' Himeline Series, Cooper/Crouse-Hinds' Krydon Products, or Robroy Industries' Stahlin Enclosures. 2.5 SPECIFIC PURPOSE OUTLET BOXES A. As fabricated by manufacturers for mounting their equipment. 2.6 FINISHING COLLAR OR COMBINATION FINISHING COLLAR/OUTLET BOX(SURFACE MOUNTED EQUIPMENT USED WITH EXPOSED RACEWAY): A. Finishing Collar: Same finish and peripheral dimensions as the equipment base, including provisions for mounting, slots to.fit.over raceway and of depth to cover outlet. box and extend back to ceiling or wall. B. Combination Finishing Collar/Outlet Box: Same finish and peripheral dimensions as the equipment base, gage or thickness of metal as required by National Electrical Code, - including provisions for mounting, and knockouts or threaded bosses for entrance of raceway. 2.7 OUTLET BOXES AND RELATED PRODUCTS FOR FIRE RATED CONSTRUCTION A. Parameters For Use of Listed Metallic Outlet or Switch Boxes: UL Electrical Construction Equipment Directory-Metallic Outlet Boxes (QCIT). B. Wall Opening Protective Materials: As listed in UL Fire Resistance Directory-Wall Opening Protective Materials (CLIV), or UL Electrical Construction Equipment Directory- Wall Opening Protective Materials(QCSN). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before proceeding with the installation of junction and pull boxes, check the locations with the Director's representative and have same approved. - OUTLET;JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES 16134E-2 17 Cronin Road I 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Position of Wall Outlets For Wiring Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, install boxes so that the long axis of each wiring device will be vertical. B. Height of Wall Outlets: Unless otherwise indicated, locate outlet boxes with their center lines at the following elevations above finished floor: Lighting Fixtures - xit Lights - where ceiling height allows a minimum of 6 me clearance between ceiling and top of exit light. Otherwise mount exit light so that it's top is 6 inches below finished ceiling. Adjust height and clearances as required to suit installation over doors. Night Lights - Switches Single& Duplex Receptacles Clock Receptacles Thermostats -0" Manual Fire ATarm oxes 4 Audible oti ication Appliances _T-T where ceiling height allows a minimum of 6 inc clearance between ceiling and top of appliance. Otherwise mount appliance so that it's top is 6 inches below finished ceiling. Visible NotificationAppliances Install outlet sothat-the ottom of the visible lens will e - 8"AFF. Combination AudibleNisible Notification Install outlet sot at the boffo—mof the visual ens will e 6-8- Appliances AFF;and the audible section will be above the visible -section. - I e ecommunications Telephone - Telephone are nsta outlet sot at the highest operable part of the wall mounted telephone will not be more.than 4'=0"AFF. n areas containing heating convectors, install outlets above convectors at heightin irate on drawings. C. Supplementary Junction and Pull Boxes: In addition to junction and pull boxes indicated on the drawings and required by NFPA 70, provide supplementary junction and pull boxes as follows: ( 1. When required to facilitate installation of wiring 2. At every third to (90) degree turn in conjunction with raceway sizes over one (1) inch 3. At intervals not exceeding 100 feet in conjunction with raceway sizes.over one (1) inch 3.3 OUTLET, JUNCTION, AND PULL BOX SCHEDULE A. Boxes For Concealed Conduit System: 1: Non-Fire Rated Construction: a. Depth: To suit job conditions and comply with NFPA 70 Article 370 b. For Lighting Fixtures: Use galvanized steel outlet boxes designed for the purpose. 1) For Fixtures Weighing 50 lbs. or Less: Box marked "FOR FIXTURE SUPPORT" OUTLET,JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES 16134E-3 17 Cronin Road I 2) For Fixtures More Than 50 Ibs: Box listed and marked with the weight of the fixture to be supported (or support fixture independent of the box). C. For Ceiling Suspended Fans: 1) For Fans Weighing 35 Ibs or Less: Marked"Acceptable for Fan Support." 2) For Fans Weighing More Than 35 Ibs, up to 70 Ibs: Marked "Acceptable for Fan Support up to 70.Ibs(or support fan independent of the box)." d. For Junction and Pull Boxes: Use galvanized steel boxes with flush covers. e. For Switches, Receptacles, Etc: 1) Plaster or Cast-In-Place Concrete Walls: Use 4 inch or 4-11/16 inch galvanized steel boxes with device covers. 2) Walls Other Than Plaster or Cast-In-Place Concrete: Use type of galvanized steel box which will allow wall plate to cover the opening made for the installation of the.box. 2. Recessed Boxes in Fire Rated (2 hour maximum) Bearing and Nonbearing Wood or Steel Stud Walls (Gypsum Wallboard Facings): a. Use listed single and double gang metallic outlet and switch boxes. The surface area of individual outlet or switch boxes shall not exceed sixteen (16) square inches. b. The aggregate surface area of the boxes shall not exceed 100 square inches per 100 square feet of wall surface.C. Securely fasten boxes to the studs. Verify that the opening in the wallboard facing is cut so that the clearance between the box and the _ wallboard does not exceed 1/8 inch. d. Separate boxes located on opposite sides of walls or partitions by a minimum horizontal distance of twenty-four(24) inches. This minimum separation distance may be reduced when wall opening protective materials are installed according to the requirements of their classification. e. Use wall opening protective material in conjunction with boxes installed on opposite sides of walls or partitions of staggered stud construction in accordance with the classification requirements for the protective material. 3. Other Fire Rated Construction: Use materials and methods to comply with the listing requirements for the classified construction. B. Boxes For Exposed Conduit System: 1. Dry and Damp Locations: Use zinc electroplate or hot dipped galvanized — threaded type malleable iron or cast iron alloy outlet,junction, and pullboxes or conduit bodies provided with a volume marking in conjunction with ferrous raceways unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings. a. Galvanized steel boxes may be used in conjunction with conduit sizes over one (1) inch in non-hazardous dry and damp locations. b. Galvanized steel boxes may be used in conjunction with electrical metallic tubing where it is allowed (specified)to be installed exposed as branch circuit conduits at elevations over 10'-0" above finished floor. 2. Wet Locations: Use threaded type malleable iron or cast iron alloy outlet junction, and pullboxes or conduit bodies (provided with a volume marking)with _ hot dipped galvanized or other specified corrosion resistant coating in conjunction with ferrous raceways unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings. OUTLET,JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES 16134E-4 17 Cronin Road - a. Use corrosion resistant boxes in conjunction with plastic coated rigid ferrous metal conduit. 3. Finishing Collar or Combination Finishing Collar/Outlet Box(Surface Mounted Equipment Used With Exposed Raceway): a. Use finishing collar where surface mounted equipment is installed on an exposed raceway outlet box and the equipment base is larger than the outlet box. b. Use combination finishing collar/outlet box where surface mounted equipment is not indicated to be installed on an exposed raceway outlet _- box, but raceway cannot be run directly into equipment body due to equipment design. C. Specific Purpose Outlet Boxes: Use to mount equipment when available and suitable for job conditions. Unless otherwise specified, use threaded type boxes with finish as specified for exposed conduit system, steel (painted)for surface metal raceway system and galvanized steel for recessed installations. D. Stencil cover of pullboxes used on systems over 600 V, in white lettering minimum yz inches high, the words"DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE-KEEP OUT". END OF.SECTION NO. 16134E OUTLET,JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES 16134E-5 17 Cronin Road I SECTION 16140-SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS, A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1.Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section,and is a part of each Division 16 section making-reference to supports,anchors,sleeves,and seals specified herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of supports, anchors,sleeves, seals and access doors is indicated by drawings and schedules and/or specified in other Division 16 sections. B. Types of supports,anchors,sleeves and seals specified in this section include the following: 1. Clevis hangers 2. Riser clamps - 3. C-clamps 4. - I-beam clamps 5. One-hole conduit straps 6. Two-hole conduit straps 7. Round steel rods 8. Lead expansion anchorssw 9. Toggle,bolts' -` 10. Wall and floor seals C. Supports,anchors,sleeves and seals furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment,are specified.as part of that equipment assembly in other Division 16 sections. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE. - A. Manufacturers:. Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supporting devices of types, sizes, and ratings required,whose products have been in satisfactory-use in similar service for not less than three (3)years. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES . i A. General: Provide supporting devices which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information,and as'required --, for complete installation; and as herein specified. Where more than one(1)type of device meets indicated requirements, selection is lnstaller's option. SUPPORTING DEVICES 16140E-1 17 Cronin Road - B. Supports: Provide supporting devices of types,sizes and materials indicated;and having the following construction features: I 1. Clevis Hangers: For supporting 2" rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel; with '/2" diameter. hole for round steel rod; approximately 54 pounds per 100 units. 2. Riser Clamps: For supporting 5" rigid metal conduit; black steel; with 2 bolts and nuts, and 4"ears; approximately 510 pounds per 100 units. 3. C-Clamps: Black malleable iron: '/2' rod size; approximately 70 pounds per 100 - units. 4. I-Beam Clamps: Black steel, 1%4' x 3/16" stock; W cross bolt; flange width 2"; approximately 52 pounds per 100 units. 5. One-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting 3/4"rigid metal conduit;galvanized steel; approximately 7 pounds per 100 units. 6. Two-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting rigid metal conduit, galvanized steel; W strap width; and 2%8' between center of screw holes. 7. Hexagon Nuts: For Y2" rod size; galvanized steel; approximately 4 pounds per 100 units. 8. Round Steel Rod: Black steel; '/2"diameter.;approximately 67 pounds per 100 feet. 9. Offset Conduit Clamps: For supporting 2" rigid metal conduit; black steel; approximately 200 pounds per 100 units. C. Anchors: Provide anchors of types, sizes and materials indicated, with the following construction features: 1. Lead Expansion Anchors: %'approximately 38 pounds per 100 units 2. Toggle Bolts: Springhead; 3/16"x 4'; approximately 5 pounds per 100 units D. Sleeves and Seals: Provide sleeves and seals,of types,sizes and materials indicated,with the following construction features: 1. Wall and Floor Seals: Provide factory-assembled watertightwall and floor seals,of types and sizes indicated; suitable for sealing around conduit, pipe, or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. Construct seals with steel sleeves, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets and rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws. i 2.2 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one(1) of the following- 1. Sheet Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock joint,welded spiral seams,or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate sleeves - from the following gage metal: 3"and smaller, 20-gage;4"to 6", 16-gage; over 6", 14-gage. 2. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs B. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation walls below grade,or in exterior walls, of one(1) of the following: 1. Lead and Oakum: Caulked between sleeve and pipe SUPPORTING DEVICES 16140E-2 17"Cronin Road I ' PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Install hangers,anchors,sleeves and seals as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to insure supporting devices comply with requirements. Comply with requirements of NECA and NEC and ANSI /NEMA for installation of supporting devices. B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work,as necessary to interface installation of supporting devices with other work. C. Install hangers, supports; clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal conduits to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings indicated. D. Tighten sleeve seal nuts until sealing grommets have expanded to form watertight seal. END OF SECTION NO. 16140E i I 1 SUPPORTING DEVICES 16140E-3 17 Cronin Road SECTION 16141 -WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SWITCHES A. Local Switches, Single Pole: 1. 20A, 120/277 V ac; Bryant's 4901, Crouse-Hinds/AH's 1991, General Electric's GE _ 5951-1G, Hubbell's 1121/1221, Leviton's 1121/1221, Pass & Seymour's 20AC1, or Woodhead's 1991. B. Local Switches, Three-Way: 1. 20A, 120/277 V ac; Bryant's 4903; Crouse-Hinds/AH's 1993, General Electric's GE5953-1G, Hubbell's 1223/1123, Leviton's 1223-2/1123-2, Pass & Seymour's --- 20AC3, or Woodhead's 1993. i C. Local Switches, Four-Way: .1. 20A, 120/1277 V ac; Bryant's 4904, Crouse-Hinds/Aks' 1994, General Electric's GE5954-1G, Hubbell's 1224/1124, Leviton's 1224-211124-2, Pass "& Seymour's 20AC4, or Woodhead's 1994. D. Momentary Contact Switches: 1. Three position, center off, toggle, 15A, 120/277 V ac, single pole; Bryant's 4821, ll Crouse-Hinds/AH's 1895, General Electric's .GE5935-10, Hubbell's 1556, Leviton's 1256, or Pass&Seymour's 1250. 2. Three position, center off, key operated, 15A, 120/277 V ac, single pole; Bryant's 4821-L, Crouse-Hinds/AH's 1895-L, General Electric's GE5935-OLG, Hubbell's 1556-L, or Pass&Seymour's 1250-L. 3. Momentary contact switch with neon pilot. Switch similar to momentary contact switch previously specified,with separate neon pilot(requires 2 gang installation). a. Neon Pilot 125 V, 1/125W, Bryent's 48071-R, Crouse-Hinds/AH's 1720-RED, General Electric's GE4218-0, or Pass&Seymour's 437. 2.2 RECEPTACLES A. Specification Grade Receptacles: 1. Single receptacle, NEMA 5-15R (15A, 125 V, 2P, 3"; Bryant's 5251, Crouse- -- Hinds/AH's 5251, General Electric's 5251-1, Hubbell's 5251, Leviton's 5251, or Pass &Seymour's 5251. 2. Duplex receptacle, NEMA 5-15R(15A, 125 V,2P, 3W); Bryant's 5252/5242, Crouse- Hinds/AH's 5252/5242, General Electric's GEN5252-1, Hubbell's 5252/5242, Leviton's 5252/5242, Pass&Seymour's 5252/5242. WIRING DEVICES 16141 E-1 17 Cronin Road 3. Single receptacle, NEMA 5-20R (20A, 125 V, 2P, 3W); Bryant's 5361/5351, Crouse- Hinds/AH's 5361/5351, General Electric's GE4103-1, Hubbell's 536115351, Leviton's 5361/5351, or Pass&Seymour's 5351. 4. Duplex receptacle, NEMA 5-20R (20A, 125 V, 2P, 3W); Bryant's 5362, Crouse- Hinds/AH's 5352/5342, General Electric's GE5352-1, Hubbell's 5352, Leviton's 5352, or Pass&Seymour's 5352. B. Federal Spec./NEMA Grade Receptacles: 1. Single receptacle, NEMA 5-15R (15A, 125 V, 2P, 3W); Bryant's 5261, Crouse- - Hinds/AH's 5261, General Electric's GE5261-1, Hubbell's 5261, Leviton's 5261, or Pass&Seymour's 5261. 2. Duplex receptacle, NEMA 5-15R (15A, 125 V, 2P, 3W); Bryant's 5262, Crouse- Hinds/AH's 5262, General Electric's GEN5262-1, Hubbell's 5262, or Pass & Seymour's 5262. 3. Single receptacle, NEMA 5-20R (20A, 125 V, 2P, 3"; Bryant's 5361, Crouse- Hinds/AH's 5361, General Electric's GE4102-1, Hubbell's 5361, Leviton's 5361, or Pass&Seymour's 5361. 4. Duplex receptacle, NEMA 5-20R (20A, 125 V, 2P, 3"; Bryant's 5362, Crouse- Hinds/AH's 5739-S, General Electric's GE5362-1, Hubbell's 5362, Leviton's 5362, Pass&Seymours 5362, or Daniel Woodhead's 5362 DW. i C. Ground Fault Interrupter Receptacles: 1. Duplex receptacle rated 20A (NEMA 5-20R), circuit ampacity MA; Bryant's GFR53FT, Crouse-Hind/AH's GF5342, General -Electric's GF5342, Hubbell's GF - 5352, Leviton's*6899, Pass&Seymour's 2091 S, or Daniel Woodhe ads 5352GF. -D. Isolated Ground Receptacles: 1. Single receptacle, NEMA 5-15R (15A, 125 V, 2P, 3"; Bryant's 5261-IG, Crouse- Hinds/AH's IG5261, General Electric's GE-82104G, Hubbell's IG4710 &, Leviton's 5261-IG, or Pass&Seymour's IG5261. 2. Duplex receptacle, NEMA 5-15R (15A, 125 V, 2P, 3"; Bryant's 5262-IG, Crouse- Hinds/AH's IG-5262, General Electric's GE-8200-IG, Hubbell's IG-5262, Leviton's 5262-IG, Pass&Seymour's IG-6200. 3. Single receptacle, NEMA 5-20R (20A, 125 V, 2P, 3W); Bryant's or equal, Crouse- Hinds/AH's or equal, General Electric's GE8310-IG2, Hubbell's or equal, Leviton's 5361-IG, or Pass&Seymour's or equal. 4. Duplex receptacle, NEMA 5-20R (20A, 125 V, 2P, 3"; Bryant's or equal, Crouse- Hinds/AH's or equal, General Electric's GE83004G, Hubbell's or equal, Leviton's 5362-IG, or Pass&Seymour's or equal. 2.3 WALL PLATES A. Stainless Steel Wall Plates: Type 302 stainless steel with satin finish; Bryant's 93 Series, j Crouse-Hinds/AH's 93 Series, General Electric's 93 Series, Hubbell's 93 Series, Leviton's 910_40 Series, or Pass&Seymour's 93-Series. - B. Covers for Threaded Type Boxes: Stamped sheet steel, gasketed device covers as produced by Crouse-Hinds Co., or OZ/Gedney Co. WIRING DEVICES 16141 E-2 17 Cronin Road '_ - 2.4 NAMEPLATES A. Phenolic Type: Standard phenolic nameplates with 3/16 inch minimum size lettering engraved thereon. B. Embossed Aluminum: Standard stamped or embossed aluminum tags, 3/16 inch minimum size lettering, as produced by Seton Name Plate Corp. or Tech Products Inc. PART 3 EXECUTION - 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install wiring devices in outlet boxes. B. Local Switches: 1. Install local switches rated 20A, 120/277 V ac for switches unless otherwise shown on the drawings or specified. 2. Install switches indicated Sa, Sb, Sc, etc, for control of outlets, with corresponding letters on the same circuit. 3. Where more than one switch occurs at same location in a 120volt system, arrange switches in gangs and cover with one faceplate. 4. Install single and double pole switches so that switch handle is up when switch is in the"On"position. C.- Receptacles: 1. Install Specification.Grade receptacles, NEMA 5-15R, 15A, 125 V,2P,.3W, for duplex j -"receptacles and single-:receptacles"unless otherwise shown on the drawings or. specified. 2. Install receptacles with ground pole in the down position. D. Wall Plates: - 1. Install wall plates on all wiring devices in dry locations, with finish to match hardware in each area. 2. Install blank wall plates on outlet boxes, which are for future equipment except telephone outlets. 3. Install 5/8 inch bushed wall plates on telephone outlets. 4. -Fasten wall plates with vandal resistant screws in offices and public access areas. For all other locations pop rivet wall plates to the wiring devices. Deliver 10 screw - keys to the facility.. -' E. Nameplates: Provide phenolic or embossed aluminum nameplate for each special purpose receptacle indicating phase, ampere and voltage rating of the circuit. Attach nameplate with _I rivets or.tamperproof fasteners to wall plate or to wall above receptacle. Wall plates may be engraved with required data in lieu of separate nameplates. F. Mats: Where flush plates are required over outlet boxes that cannot be set deep enough for i the plates to fit closely over the finished wall surfaces, provide oak mats to fill the space between the finished wall surface and the plate. END OF SECTION NO. 16140E WIRING DEVICES 16141 E-3 17 Cronin Road. SECTION 16200-OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES - PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification.sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is a Division 16 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of,each Division 16 section making reference to overcurrent protective devices specified herein. - 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of overcurrent protective device work indicated by drawings.&schedules B. Types of overcurrent protective devices in this section include the following: Circuit breakers Molded-case Fuses Class R time-delay Class L current limiting -C. Refer to other Division 16 sections for cable/wire and connector work required in conjunction =with overcurrent protective devices; not work of this section 1.3 -QUALITY ASSURANCE A: Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of overcurrent protective devices, -of types sizes,andYatings required,whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5)years. B. NEC Compliance: Comply with ,NEC requirements as applicable to construction and installation of overcurrent protective devices. C. UL Compliance: Comply with requirements of UL 489,"Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures". Provide overcurrent protective devices which are UL-listed and labeled. D. NEMA Compliance: Comply with requirements of NEMA Stds. Pub. No.AB 1, pertaining to molded-case and low-voltage power type circuit breakers. - E. ANSI Compliance: 'Comply with.applicable requirements of ANSI C97.1 pertaining to low- voltage cartridge fuses. 1.4 SUBMITTALS _I A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data,on overcurrent protective devices, including: �! amperes,voltages,current ratings,interrupting ratings,current limitations,internal inductive 4 &non-inductive loads, time-current trip characteristic,curves, and mounting requirements. OVERCU_ RRENT.PROTECTIVE DEVICES 16200E-1 17 Cronin Road B. Maintenance Stock, Fuses: For types and ratings required, furnish additional fuses, amounting to 1 unit for every 5 installed units, but not less than 1 of each. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one (1)of the following (for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device): Circuit Breakers: Same manufacturer as panelboard or recommended compatible manufacturer. Fuses: Bussman Div.; McGraw-Edison Co. Gould, Inc. Reliance 2.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated,provide circuit breakers and ancillary components,of types, sizes, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design,materials,components,and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for a complete installation. B. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers: Provide factory-assembled, bolt-on molded case circuit breakers of frame size indicated. Provide breakers with permanent thermal and instantaneous magnetic trips in each pole,and with fault-current limiting protection, ampere ratings as indicated. Construct with overcenter,trip-free,toggle type operating mechanisms with quick-make, quick-break action and positive handle indication. Provide push-to-trip button on cover for mechanically tripping circuit breakers. Construct breakers for mounting and operating in any physical position and operating in an ambient temperature of 40 degrees C. Provide breakers with mechanical screw type removable connector lugs,AUCU rated. 2.3 FUSES A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide fuses of types, sizes, ratings and average - time/current and peak let-through current characteristics indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials, and construction in accordance with published product information, and with industry standards and configurations. B. Class R Time-Delay Fuses: Provide UL Class RK1 time-delay fuses rated 600 V,60 Hz, 1 to 600 amperes,with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for protecting motors and circuit breakers. Use Class J fuses where needed for series-protection of circuit breakers. i C. Class L Current-limiting Fuses: Provide UL Class KLP"Current Limiting"fuses rated 600 V, 60 Hz, 800 amperes, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating. OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 16200E-2 17 Cronin Road r PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Install overcurrent protective devices as indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that protective devices comply with requirements. B. Coordinate with other work, including electrical wiring work, as. necessary to interface installation of overcurrent protective devices with other work. C. Fasten circuit breakers without mechanical stresses,twisting or misalignment being exerted by clamps, supports, or cables. D. Set field-adjustable circuit breakers for trip settings as indicated,subsequent to installation of devices. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Inspect circuit-breaker operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and, where necessary, adjust units for free mechanical movement. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to energization of overcurrent protective devices,test devices for continuity of circuitry and for short-circuits. Correct malfunctioning units, and then demonstrate compliance with requirements. END OF SECTION NO. 16200E OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 16200E-3 17 Cronin Road SECTION 16220-CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS PART 1 -'GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections; apply to this Section. B. Division 16 Basic Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of circuit and motor disconnect switch work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of circuit and motor disconnect switches in this section include the following: 1. Equipment disconnects 2. Appliance disconnects 3. Motor-circuit disconnects 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of circuit and motor disconnect switches of types and capacities required,whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three(3)years. B. NEC.Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements pertaining to construction and installation of electrical circuit and motor disconnect devices. C. UL Compliance: Comply with requirements of UL 98,"Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches". Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches which have been UL-listed and labeled. D. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds. Pub. No. KS 11 "Enclosed Switches"and 250,"Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum). PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 Heavy-Duty Safety Switches: Provide surface-mounted,heavy-duty type,sheet-steel enclosed safety _ switches, of types, sizes and electrical characteristics indicated; rated 240 volts, 60 hertz; incorporating quick-make,quick-break type switches;so constructed that switch blades are visible in OFF position with door open. Equip with operating handle which is an integral part of enclosure b ase and whose position is easily recognizable, and is padlockable in OFF position; construct current carrying parts of high-conductivity copper, with silver-tungsten type switch contacts, and positive pressure type reinforced fuse clips. All fusible switches shall have a short circuit rating of 200,000 r.m.s. amperes with Class R rejection feature installed in the fuseholders. Provide NEMA type 1A —i enclosure for dry locations and NEMA type 3R for wet locations and where specified weather-proof. Square D or approved equal. Fuses: Provide fuses for safety switches: Type RK-JTD and ratings needed to fulfill electrical requirements for service indicated. CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS. 16220E-1 17 Cronin Road I PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Install circuit and motor disconnect switches where indicated,complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate circuit and motor disconnect switch installation work with electrical raceway and - cable work and equipment plan, as necessary for proper interface. C. Install disconnect switches used with motor-driven appliances, and motors and controllers within sight of controller position unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION NO. 16220E • i_ i CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS 16220E-2 17 Cronin Road { SECTION 16320-INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Division 16 Basic Materials and Methods sections apply to work specified in this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.. Extent of lighting fixture work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of lighting fixtures in this section include the following: 1. Fluorescent 2. Incandescent C. Applications of lighting fixtures required for this project include the following: 1. General lighting 2. Supplementary lighting .3. Accent lighting 4. Emergency.lighting 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE !: A. 'Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture,"of,_-jig hting fixtures of types and ratings required,whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five(5)years. B. Installers: Qualified with at least three (3) years of successful installation experience on projects with lighting work similar to that required for project. C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation and construction of building lighting fixtures. D. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds.Pub. No.LE 1 and LE 2 pertaining to lighting equipment. E. NYSECCC Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of the New York State Energy Conservation Construction Code Article 11 of the Energy Law of the State of New York including amendments effective March 1, 1991. F. ANSI/IES Compliance: Comply with ANSI 132.1 pertaining to lighting fixtures. G. ANSI/UL Compliance: Comply with ANSI/UL standards pertaining to lighting fixtures for hazardous locations. H. UL Compliance: Provide lighting fixtures, which have been UL-listed and labeled. INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES .16320E-1 17 Cronin Road I. CBM Labels: Provide fluorescent lam ballasts which comply with Certified p p y Ballast Manufacturers Association standards and carry the CBM label. PART 2- PRODUCTS 1 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of the manufacturers specified in "Schedule of Luminaires", where indicated. B. Luminaires listed in schedule of luminaires,showing specified manufacturer catalog number, shall conform to all claims of materials and quality of construction published in manufacturer's literature, and stated elsewhere in this specification, or both. Materials not conforming to manufacturer's claims, received damaged,or otherwise deficient in content or quality will not be accepted. 2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. General: Provide lighting fixtures, of sizes, types and ratings indicated; complete with, but not necessarily limited to, housings, lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, louvers, ballasts, starters, wiring and hardware, clips, mounting brackets, pendants, canopies, cover plates, etc. 2.3 BALLASTS A. Fluorescent, General: Provide each fluorescent lighting fixture with an electronic ballast, type and size as required to.be compatible with lamps served. 1. High Frequency,'20KHz or higher without flicker 2. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)of less that 13% 3. Power Factor of greater than 98% _ 4 Lamp Current Crest Factor of less than 1.4 5. Shall conform to ANSI C82.11 (latest version) for integral leads, color coding, harmonics 6. Sound rating of Class A - 7. Shall conform to ANSI C62.41 (latest version)for transient protection 8. As Manufactured by Advance Co., Mark V series; or equal B. Fluorescent, Dimming: Provide each fluorescent lighting fixture, identified with dimming ballast,with a controllable, integrated circuit electronic ballast, type and size as required to !be compatible with lamps served. 1. High Frequency, 20KHz or higher without flicker 2. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of less that 13% 3. Power Factor of greater than 98% 4 Lamp Current Crest Factor of less than 1.4 5. Shall conform to ANSI C82.11 (latest version) for integral leads, color coding, harmonics 6. Sound rating of Class A 7. Shall conform to ANSI C62.41 (latest version)for transient protection 8. No intermediate control between ballast and control device INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES 16320E-2 17 Cronin Road _ i 9. Dimmable range between 100% and 20% with no flicker and full filament heat throughout dimming range 10. As Manufactured by Advance Co., Mark VII series; or equal C. Fluorescent, Compact: Provide each compact fluorescent lighting fixture with an electronic ballast, type and size as required to be compatible with lamps served. 1. High Power Factor 2. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of less that 10% 3. Power Factor of greater than 95% 4. Shall conform to ANSI C82.11 (latest version) for integral leads, color coding, harmonics 5. Sound rating of Class A 6. Shall conform to ANSI C62.41 (latest version)for transient protection 7. As Manufactured by Magnetek Co.; or equal 2.4 LAMPS A. Provide each lighting fixture with lamps.as indicated on the schedule and as listed herein. 1. Fluorescent, the catalog numbers listed below are based on Sylvania Co. TYPE CATALOG NUMBER 32 Watt(General) F032/835, 3500K 31 Watt(U-Tube) F13031/835, 3500K 26 Watt(Compact) CF26DD/E/827, 2700K PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION LIGHTING FIXTURES _. A. Install lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's"Standard of Installation", NEMA standards,and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements. + ' B. Coordinate.with Architect as noted on drawings and other electrical work as appropriate to properly interface installation of.lighting fixtures with other work. - C. Fasten fixtures to indicated structural support;and check to ensure that pendant.fixtures are square& plumb. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN - A. Clean lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation. Handle all louvers with white gloves avoiding contact with skin or other oil producing surfaces. Louvers installed with fingerprints or other foreign blemishes shall not be accepted. B. Protect installed fixtures from damage during construction period. i INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES 16320E-3 17 Cronin Road 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures, and after building circuitry has been energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting. I B. At the Time of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in lighting fixtures,which are observed to be noticeably dimmed after Contractor's use and testing as judged by the Architect. Furnish Stock or replacement lamps amounting to 15%(but not less than one lamp in each case) of each type and size lamp used in each type fixture. Deliver replacement stock as directed to Owner's storage space. 3.4 GROUNDING A. Provide tight equipment grounding connections for each lighting fixture installation. Ground all ballasts. END OF SECTION NO. 16320E i I (— INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES 16320E-4 17 Cronin Road SECTION 16413-MOLDED CASE SWITCHES PART GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Waiver of Submittals: The "Waiver of Certain Submittal Requirements" in Section 01330 does not apply to this Section. B. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MOLDED CASE SWITCHES A. Enclosed non-automatic circuit breaker assembly as produced by Cutler-Hammer/Eaton Corp., Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp., General Electric Co., Siemens/ITE, Square-D Co., or Westinghouse Electric Corp., having: 1. Non-automatic molded case circuit breaker("Q" frame not acceptable). Frame size and number of poles as indicated on drawings. 2. NEMA enclosure, type as indicated on drawings. 3. Solid neutral bus when neutral conductor is included with circuit. 4. Ground bus when equipment grounding conductor is included with circuit. 2.2 NAMEPLATES A. General:. - Precision engrave letters .and numbers with uniform margins, character-size minimum 3/16 inch high. 1. Phenolic: Two (2) color laminated engraver's stock, 1/16 inch minimum thickness, machine engraved to expose inner core color(white). 2. Aluminum: Standard aluminum alloy-.plate stock, minimum .032 inches thick, engraved areas enamel filled or background enameled with natural aluminum engraved characters. 3. Materials for Outdoor Applications: As recommended by nameplate manufacturer to - suit environmental conditions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install switches so that the maximum height above the floor to the center of the operating handle does not exceed 6-6". B. Identify each switch, indicating purpose or load served: 1. NEMA 1 Enclosures: Rivet or bolt nameplate to the cover. .2. NEMA 12 Enclosures: Rivet or bolt and gasket nameplate to the cover. 3. NEMA 3R, 4, 4X, 7, 9 Enclosures: Attach nameplates to the cover using adhesive specifically designed for the purpose, or mount nameplate on wall. or other conspicuous location adjacent to switch. Do not penetrate enclosure with fasteners. r - — END OF SECTION NO.16413E MOLDED CASE SWITCHES 16413E-1 17 Cronin Road SECTION 16500-TELEPHONE& DATA SYSTEM CONDUIT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Electrical Contractor shall provide all outlet boxes and cover plates with (2)W C.to 6"above ceiling for telephone(voice)/data access, for each outlet location as indicated on drawings. All connections to be made by Owner's representative. Provide pull string in each empty conduit, terminate each conduit with a plastic bushing. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide products that conform to applicable sections of this specifications. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION A. Electrical Contractor to coordinate all work with Architect and Owner's representative. B. Install outlet boxes and pull string prior to the enclosure of walls. _-� END OF SECTION NO. 16500E TELEPHONE&DATA SYSTEM CONDUIT 16500E-1 17 Cronin Road. -- SOCIAL SECURITY ADMINISTRATION ALTERATIONS TO DISTRICT OFFICES Queensbury, New York -PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS INDEX- DIVISION 15-PLUMBING Section Number and Title 15000P SCOPE OF WORK...........................................................................................................1 15005P BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS.............................................................................4 15015P CUTTING AND PATCHING..............................................................................................2 1510013 VALVES.............................................................................................................................3 15140P PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS .................................................................................6 15191 P PIPE AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION...............................................................................3 15260P PIPING INSULATION ......................................................................................................6 — 15410P PLUMBING PIPING..........................................................................................................7 15440P PLUMBING FIXTURES 2 15951 P CLEANING AND TESTING..............................................................................................2 I I --i INDEX-1 SECTION 15000P-SCOPE OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK Extent of plumbing related work required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specifications in other Division 15 sections. The following is a general listing of work items to be provided under this Contract which is not necessarily all inclusive, nor shall it limit the extent of the work or exclude any work shown or specified and not listed: A. Temporary water as required B. Complete hot water and cold water distribution systems as indicated on plans for all new plumbing fixtures and equipment C. Complete sanitary drainage and vent piping as indicated on plans for all new plumbing fixtures and equipment D. Complete natural gas piping from meter to all gas fired equipment E. Furnishing and installing of plumbing fixtures, equipment and specialties F. Insulation and Identification of piping and valves G. Cleaning and testing _-. H. All cutting and patching as required for removal or installation of plumbing work I END OF SECTION NO. 15000P i SCOPE OF WORK 15000P-1 17 Cronin Road i SECTION 15005P- BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS PART 1GENERAL 1.1 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. All work under this title, on drawings or specified,,is subject to the architectural general and special contract conditions for the entire project, and the Contractor for this portion of the work is required to refer especially thereto, and to the architectural drawings. B. Drawings and specifications are complementary and must be so interpreted to determine the full scope of.work under this heading: Wherever any material,article,operation or method is either specified or shown on the drawings, this Contractor is required to provide each item and perform each prescribed operation according to the designate quality, qualification or condition, furnishing all necessary labor, equipment or incidentals. C. Wherever the designation "Architect"appears, it shall imply Architect or Engineer. 1.2 CONFLICTS A. If a conflict appears between the drawings and the specifications,the`Contractor is to contact - the Engineer for clarification. B. In the absence of a clarification by the Engineer, the Contractor must install his work in accordance with the more stringent application. 1.3 DIMENSIONS,_LAYOUTS AND OBSTACLES' _ A. Verify dimensions and elevations from General Construction Drawings or by actual field measurements after building construction has sufficiently progressed. B. Assume full and final responsibility for the accuracy of any or all work performed under this, Division and make repairs and corrections as required or directed at no extra cost to the Owner. C. Layouts of piping, ductwork, and equipment shown on drawings are diagrammatic and shall i be construed as such. D. Make actual installations in accord with said,layouts, but with necessary .deviations as directed or required by job conditions and field measurements in order to produce a thoroughly integrated and practical job upon completing, but make deviations only with specific approval of the Engineer/Architect. E. Take particular care to coordinate.all piping under this Division to prevent conflict and remove and relocate work as may be made necessary by such conflict at no extra cost to the Owner. F. Unless expressly permitted by the Engineer/Architect or shown-otherwise on the drawings, all piping,vent piping and similar items shall be installed so that they are concealed except as permitted by the Engineer/Architect in service rooms noted on the drawings. BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 15005P-1 17 Cronin Road G. The Owner or Owner's representative reserves the right to relocate terminal equipment six (6)feet in any direction from locations indicated on plans, before roughing-in,with no change T in contract price. 1.4 APPROVAL OF MATERIAL A. Items specified have been checked by the Engineer for performance and space limitation. B. Unless the words "approved equal" appear, Contractor is to choose from list of manufacturers mentioned and state the make of equipment he intends to purchase on a sheet provided at the time of the contract signing. C. In order for Engineer to consider"equal", PC must certify by letter that he has checked the product for conformance to specifications and space limitations and assumes full .responsibility thereafter. D. Engineer, not Contractor or Vendor, shall be the final judge of equal materials. Where product is not considered equal by the Engineer, Contractor may offer credit to the Owner for further consideration. E. Requests for substitutions must be made in writing ten (10)days prior to bid date so that an addendum may reach all contractors. F. If substitutions are proposed after the bids are received,the Contractor shall state amount of credit to the Owner for substitution. G. Where equipment requiring different arrangement of connections from those.shown is approved, it shall be' the'responsibility of the Contractor to furnish revised layouts;-If.; requested;and install the equipment to operate properly and in harmony with the intent of the.. drawings and specifications; and to make all changes in the work required by the different arrangement of the connections at no additional cost to the Owner. Also coordinate control I and power wiring and pay for any changes imposed on other trades by these changes. _ H. Upon approval of equipment list by Engineer, copies of submittal prints shall be forwarded to Engineer within thirty (30) days. 1.5 PERMITS, CODES AND ORDINANCES A. The Plumbing Contractor shall arrange and pay for all permits, inspections, etc.,as required by local utilities or applicable agencies. B. All work and material shall be in complete accordance with the ordinances, regulations, codes, etc., of all political entities exercising jurisdictions, specifically including the NYS Energy Code. C. In event of discrepancy, the Contractor shall observe the more stringent requirements. 1.6 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Check Division 15P drawings with all others. B. Anticipate and avoid interferences with other trades. BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 15005P-2 17 Cronin Road i _ C. Obtain decision for approval from project inspector for proposed group installation before proceeding, and for clearance in structure and finish of the building. D. Verify-with drawings if required. E. Running pipe over electrical equipment is prohibited: Special cases may be permitted with protecting.copper drip pan. Obtain Architect's or Engineers approval. 1.7 .DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Make provisions for delivery and safe storage of all materials. Check and properly receipt material to be "furnished by others" to Contractor, and assume full responsibility for all materials while in storage with'full visible identification and information. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Existing Conditions: Field verify existing conditions that will determine exact locations, distances;levels,dimensions,elevations,etc. Review all drawings of other trades and report any conflicts to the Architect/Engineer,which will affect the project cost. 1.9 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING OF WORK: A. Reference DIVISION 1, for a description of requirements regarding coordination and scheduling of work under this project: -1.10 REQUIREMENTS BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT: .'A. Identification 1. Tag all starters, etc., per Article Section 15191 P, "Identification". 2. Hang typewritten list in equipment rooms where directed. B. Certification 1. Submit to Engineer/Architect certificates of approval from plumbing inspector or authority having jurisdiction over codes pertaining to work in this Division. r C. Instructional Period 1. Instruct Owner's representative in complete operation of all components,and receive - signed statement from Owners representative certifying knowledge and understanding of all equipment and systems. D. Provide all guarantees as required by the Contract Documents with a minimum of one (1) s year from the date of Substantial Completion on all labor and materials. I BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 15005P-3 17 Cronin Road E. Operational Booklets 1. Provide the Owner with two (2) Operation Booklets, which contain the following: a. Approved shop drawings b. Test date C. Operational instructions d. Valve charts 1.11 REQUIRED SUBMITTALS MATERIALS L 15100P VALVES , 15140P PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15191 P PIPE AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION 15260P PIPING INSULATION 1541 OP PLUMBING PIPING 15440P PLUMBING FIXTURES 15951 P CLEANING AND TESTING END OF SECTION NO. 15005P BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 15005P-4 17 Cronin Road SECTION 15015P-CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 MATERIALS A. Provide materials,which result in equal or better work than the work being cut or patched in terms of performance characteristics and visual effect where applicable. B. Use materials identical with the original materials where feasible and where recognized that satisfactory,results can be produced thereby. C. Comply with specifications and standards for each specific product involved. D. Firestop Material 1. Through-Penetration Firestop Devices, Forming Materials, and Fill,Void or Cavity Materials: As .listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory, Warnock Hersey - ` Certifications Listings Book, or the Omega Point Laboratories Listings Directory. 2. Labels: Manufactured of suitable material for permanent field identification of through-penetration firestops; stating "WARNING - FIRESTOP MATERIAL (Company Name, Product Catalog Number)". . PART 2 EXECUTION A. Inspection 1. Inspect existing conditions of the project including elements subject to damage orto - - _r - -movement during cutting and patching. 2. After uncovering work,. inspect conditions affecting installation of products or performance of work. 3. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to Architect in writing. Do not proceed with work until Architect has provided further instruction. B. Preparation 1. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure structural value or integrity of affected portions of work. 2. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of project from damage. 3. Provide protection from elements for that portion of the project, which may be exposed by cutting and patching work and maintain excavations free from water. C. Performance 1. Execute cutting and demolition by methods,which will prevent damage to otherwork _- and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs. 2. Employ original installer or Fabricator to perform cutting and patching work,orwhere original installer fabricator is 'not available (e.g., for work of a prior time), engage recognized expert entities to perform cutting and patching work. 3. For all openings in masonry construction not otherwise detailed or scheduled including mechanical openings, minimum lintels to be for each 4"of masonry width, ' one L 3'h x 5/16 for spans up to 6 feet; one L 5 x 3Y2"x 5/26 for spans up to 8 feet. For spans less than 2 feet provide a 5/16" plate. All angles installed with long leg vertical. CUTTING AND PATCHING 15015P-1 17 Cronin Road 4. Restore work, which has been cut or removed. Install new products to provide - completed work in accord with requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Perform patching around items penetrating in-place construction in a manner that will maintain the fire resistive capability of the existing construction. 6. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetration through surfaces. 7. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. For assembly, - refinish entire unit. D. Firestop Installation 1. Use through-penetration firestop devices, forming materials and fill, void or cavity materials to form through-penetration firestops to prevent the passage of flame, smoke, fumes and hot gases as detailed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory, Warnock Hersey Certifications Listings Book, or the Omega Point Laboratories Listings Directory. Where applicable design is not detailed in the Directories, use forming materials and fill, void or cavity material to form appropriate through- penetration firestop in accordance with printed details and installation instructions from the Company producing the approved forming materials and fill,void or cavity material. 2. Firestop all through-penetrations of fire rated walls,floors,ceilings and partitions. In the event fire ratings are not indicated on Construction Drawings,obtain clarification from Architect or Engineer. END OF SECTION NO. 15015P 1 CUTTING AND PATCHING 15015P-2 17 Cronin Road SECTION 15100P-VALVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1.2 ABBREVIATIONS A. IBBM: Iron body, bronze mounted B. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke C. WOG: Water, oil, gas D. WSP: Working steam pressure 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions for each valve type. B. Valve Schedule: List type of valve, manufacturers model number, and size for each service application. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Quality Control: 1. The Director,.may at'his discretion, require manufacturers to submit for,approval . mill certificates, laboratory test and manufacturing reports relating to chemical -� and mechanical properties of valve components. i --i 1.5 MAINTENANCE A. Special Tools: One(1)-wrench for each type and size wrench operated plug valve. -.l PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVES-GENERAL A. Valve Standardization: Valves from one (1)or more manufacturers may be used, however valves supplied for each specific valve type shall be the product of one(1) manufacturer.. B. Valves shall be first quality, free from all imperfections and defects,with body markings indicating manufacturer and rating.. C. Valve parts of same manufacturer, size and type shall be interchangeable. D. Manually operated gate, globe and angle valves shall be of rising stem type, unless otherwise specified.. _I • i VALVES 15100P-1 17 Cronin Road E. Valves,which use packing, shall be capable of being packed when wide open and under full working pressure. F. Size valves the same size as the piping in which they are installed, unless otherwise specified. I 2.2 MATERIALS A. Body: 1. Cast Iron: ASTM A 126 66, Class B, higher strength cast iron 2. Bronze: For use up to 150 psig WSP, ASTM B 62 and over 150 psig to 300 psig WSP,ASTM B 61 - 3. Cast Steel: ASTM A 216 Grade WCB 4. Forged Steel: ASTM A 105 Grade 2 B. Stem: 1. Cast Manganese Bronze: ASTM B 584 2. Cast Silicon Brass: ASTM B 584 3. Rolled Silicon Brass: ASTM B 98 Alloy D 4. Rolled Aluminum Bronze: ASTM B 150 Alloy 1 5. Rolled Manganese Bronze: ASTM B 138 Alloy A(half hard) - 6. Naval Brass: ASTM B 21 Alloy A or Alloy C (hard) 7. Carbon Steel: As specified for particular type of valve 8. - Stainless Steel: As specified for particular type of valve C. 'Trim: As specified for particular type of valve 2.3 PLUG VALVES A. Type AA: 200 psig WOG, lubricated type with standard port opening, cast iron or semi- steel body, sealed lubrication system with lubricant fitting and dial indicator, cylindrical plug or teflon tapered plug, lubricant grooves in body or plug, threaded or flanged ends depending on size, and capable of lubrication with valve under pressure and plug in any position. i 1. Acceptable Valves: a. '/inch to three (3) inch size: Homestead 611 &612;Powell 2202 & 2203, Resun R1430 & R1431, Rockwell 142 & 143, and Walworth 1796 & 1797F B. Type AB: 100 psig WOG, gas cock type with cast iron or bronze body, bronze plug, square head, wrench operator, and threaded ends. Acceptable Manufacturers: Crane, Eclipse Combustion, Lunkenheimer, and McDonald. 2.4 BALL VALVES A. Type BV: Two (2) piece bronze body, solid blow-out proof stem, teflon seats, chrome plated brass ball, teflon seals, corrosion resistant steel lever handles with vinyl grips, balancing stop, and threaded or solder ends. Acceptable Manufacturers: Conbraco, Jenkins, Milwaukee, Nibco, and Watts. VALVES 15100P-2 17 Cronin Road 1. Pressure Ratings: a. 2 inch size and Less: 125 psig WSP, 600 psig WOG. b. 2'/inch size and Up: 125 psig WSP,400 psig WOG. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install valves at locations noted on the drawings or specified. 3.2 VALVE APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Schedule of valve applications for the different services is as follows: I 1. Cold Water in Buildings (CWS): a. 3"and Less: Solder end, BV balls 2. Domestic Hot Water(HWS): a. 3"and Less: Solder end 3. Gas-Natural, Manufactured or Mixed Fuel (G) 125 psig and less: a. 2"and Less: Screwed end, AB plug valves b. 2'/"and Up: Flanged-end, AA plug valves _ END OF SECTION NO. 15100P i _I f —1 l VALVES 15100P-3 17 Cronin Road SECTION 15140P-PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Companion high density filler pieces for installation over the top 180 degree surface of pipe or tubing, at points of support where a combination clevis hanger, insulation shield and high density insulating saddle are installed.. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Piping Insulation: Section 15260P 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Catalog-sheets, specifications and installation instructions for each item specified except fasteners. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Combination clevis hanger, pipe insulation shield and vapor barrier jacketed high density insulating saddle with companion high density filler piece. 1. Insulating saddles and filler pieces shall be of the same thickness and materials as _ ! the adjoining pipe insulation: Saddles shall coverthe-lower 180 degrees of the pipe or tubing, and companion filler pieces shall cover the upper 180 degrees of the pipe or tubing. Physical sizes, gages, etc. of the components of insulated hangers shall be in accordance with the following schedule: "PIPE OR :, SHIELD` SADDLE _VAPOR BARRIER , TUBING SIZE R� LENGTH , SHIELD LENGTH � JACKET.LENGTH 3 � s GAGE i _ . �- (Inches) (Inches) (Inches) Up to 2% 4 16 6 10 B. Pipe Insulation Shields: Fabricated of.steel, with a.minimum arc of 180 degrees, unless otherwise indicated. Shields for use with ,hangers and supports, with the exception of combination clevis type hangers, shall be in accordance with the following schedule: PIPE OR�TUBING SIZE i SHIELD LENGTH,"- - #;F SHIELD GAGE _(Inches) w j . Up to2Y 8 18 C. Pipe Covering Protection Saddles: 3/16 inch thick steel, of sufficient depth for the insulation thickness specified, notched so that saddle contact with the pipe is approximately fifty (50) percent of the total axial cross.section. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15140P-1 17 Cronin Road D. Pipe Hangers: Height adjustable standard duty clevis type, with cross bolt and nut E. Adjustable Floor Rests and Base Flanges: Steel F. Hanger Rods: Mild, low carbon steel,fully threaded or threaded at each end,with two(2)nuts at each end for positioning rod and hanger, and locking each in place 2.2 FASTENERS A. Sleeve Anchors (Group II, Type 3, Class 3): Molly's Div./USM Corp. Parasleeve Series, Ramset's Dynabolt Series, or Red Head/Phillips AN1405, HN-1614, FS-1411 Series B. Wedge Anchors (Zinc Plated, Group II, Type 4, Class 1): Hilti's Kwik Bolt Series, Molly's Div./USM Corp. Parabolt PB Series, Ramset's Trubolt T Series,or Red Head/Phillips WS-3822 - C. Self-Drilling Anchors(Group III,Type 1): Ramset's RD Series, or Red Head/Phillips Series S-14 D. Non-Drilling Anchors(Group VIII, Type 1): Ramset's Dynaset DS Series, Hilti's HDI Series, or Red Head/Phillips J Series 2.3 SHOP PAINTING AND PLATING A. Hangers, supports, rods, inserts and accessories used for pipe supports, unless chromium plated,cadmium plated or galvanized shall be shop coated with red lead orzinc chromate primer paint. Electroplated copper hanger rods,hangers and accessories may be used with copper pipe or copper tubing.. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Do not hang or support one (1) pipe from another or from ductwork. B. Support all insulated horizontal piping conveying fluids below ambient temperature, by means of hangers or supports with insulation shields installed outside of the insulation. C. Space hangers or supports for horizontal piping on maximum center distances as listed in the following hanger schedules, except as otherwise specified, or noted on the drawings. 1. For Steel Pipe Gas Lines: Space hangers or supports on maximum centers of 6 feet for Y2 inch pipe size; 8 feet for inch and 1 inch pipe sizes and 10 feet for 1%4 inch =- pipe size and above. 2. For Copper Pipe and Copper Tubing: PIPE,OR TUBING SIZE MAXIMUM SPACING 3/and under 5 1% 7 I1 Y2 and 2 8 I PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15140P-2 17 Cronin Road i -- 3. . For Cast Iron Soil Pipe: Space hangers'or support pipe at each joint or on maximum centers of five(5)feet. Support pipe in continuous ten(10)foot lengths or longer,on -maximum centers often (10)feet. Place hangers or supports as close as possible to joints and when hangers or supports do not come within one(1)foot of a branch line,fitting, install an additional hanger or.support at the fitting. 4. For Hubless Cast Iron Pipe: Space hangers or supports at every other joint,except when the horizontal distance between hangers exceeds four (4) feet, hangers or supports shall be provided at each joint. Place hanger or supports as close as possible to joints and when hangers or supports do-not come within one(1)foot of a branch line fitting, install an additional hanger or support at the fitting_ Where piping is suspended on centers in excess of eighteen (18) inches by means of non-rigid hangers, provide sway bracing to prevent horizontal pipe movement Submit details of sway,braces. 5. For Directional Changes: Install a hanger or support close to the point of change of direction of all pipe runs in either a horizontal or vertical.plane. 6. For Concentrated Loads: Install additional hangers or supports,spaced as required and directed, at locations where concentrated loads such as in-line pumps,valves, fittings or accessories occur, to support the concentrated loads. 7. For Branch Piping Runs and Runouts Over 5 feet In Length: Install a minimum of one(1)hanger,and additional hangers if required by the hanger spacing schedules. 8. Parallel Piping Runs: Where several pipe lines run parallel in the same plane and in close proximity to each other,trapeze hangers may be submitted for approval. Base hanger spacing for trapeze type hangers on the smallest size of pipe being supported. Design the entire hanger assembly based on a safety factor of five(5), for the ultimate strength of the material being used. D. _:.Size hanger rods in accordance with the following: .PIPE OR TUBING :-,:SINGLE ROD HANGER SIZE. -•D.O�IBLE ROD.MANGER SIZE SIZE (Inches) (Inches) (Inches) 777 Pipe 'Tub Tutiin # � _ _ 9 to 2 - _ % _ �4 - - 2 %and3 % % - 4 and 5 % Y2 1. Secure hanger rods as follows: Install one nut under clevis, angle or steel member; one(1)nut on top of clevis,angle or steel member;one(1)nutinside insert or on top of upper hanger attachment and one (1) nut and washer against insert or on lower side of upper hanger attachment. A total of four(4) nuts are required for each rod, two (2) at upper.hanger attachment and two (2) at hanger. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15140P-3 17 Cronin Road E. Vertical Piping: 1. Support vertical risers of piping systems, by means of heavy-duty hangers installed close to base of pipe risers unless otherwise specified. Install riser clamps above floor slabs, with the extension arms resting on floor slabs. 2. Support extension arms of riser clamps, secured to risers to be insulated for cold service, four (4) inches above floor slabs, to allow room for insulating and vapor sealing around riser clamps. 3. Support cast iron risers, by means of heavy-duty hangers installed close to the base of the pipe risers, and % inch thick malleable iron or steel riser clamps with extension arms at each floor level,with the distance between clamps not to exceed twenty-five (25) feet. Support cast iron risers in vertical shafts equivalent to the aforementioned. 4. Support hubless cast iron risers, by means of heavy duty hangers installed close to the base of the pipe risers, and by malleable iron or steel riser clamps with the extension arms at each floor level,with the distance between clamps or intermediate supports not to exceed twelve (12)feet. F. Underground Cast Iron Pipe Supports: Firmly bed pipe laid underground, on solid ground , along bottom of pipe. Install masonry piers for pipe laid in disturbed or excavated soil or where suitable bearing cannot be obtained. 3.2 UPPER HANGER ATTACHMENTS .A. General: 1. In all cases,secure upper hanger attachments to overhead structural steel,steel bar . joists, or other suitable structural members. 2: Do.not attach hangers to steel decks, which are not to-receive concrete fill. 3. Do not attach hangers to precast concrete plank decks less than 23/inches thick. 4. Do not use flat bars or bent rods as upper hanger attachments. B. Attachment to Steel Frame Construction: Provide intermediate structural steel members where required by pipe support spacing. Select steel members for use as intermediate supports based on a minimum safety factor of five (5). 1. Do not use drive-on beam clamps. - 2. Do not support piping over four(4)inches in size from steel bar joists. Secure upper hanger attachments to steel bar joists at panel points of joists. 3. Do not drill holes in main structural steel members. - 4. "C"clamp type of upper hanger attachments with restraining straps may be used as upper hanger attachments for the support of piping up to a maximum of three (3) inches in size and a temperature from 50 degrees F to 200 degrees F. C. Attachment to Wood Construction: Secure hangers to the sides(only)of wood members,by means of malleable iron side beam connectors, or malleable iron or steel side beam brackets. Do not secure hanger attachments to nailing strips resting on top of steel beams. 1. Secure side beam connectors to wood members with two No. 18 x 1%Z inch long wood screws,or two No. 16 x 1%inch long drive screws. Do not support piping over 1'/z inches in size from side beam connectors. Do not hammer in wood screws. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15140P-4 17 Cronin Road 2. Secure side beam brackets to wood members with steel bolts or lag screws. Do not use lag screws in wooden members having a nominal thickness(beam face)under two(2)inches in size. Install bolts or lag screws, in the sides of a timber or a joist,at the mid-point or above, not less than 2Y inches from the lower .edge when supporting branch lines and not less than three(3)inches from the lower edge when supporting mains. Install heavy gage steel washers under all nuts. 3. Secure side beam brackets to wooden.beams or joists, with lag screws or bolts of size as follows: PIPE SIZE ` LAG SCREW SIZE BOLT;DIAMETER ,(Inches) hes) .(Inches) 2 and under 3/diam x 1% % 2Y2 and 3 Y2 diam x 2 Y2 4 and 5 Use bolt % a. Do not support piping larger than three(3)inches with lag screws. Pre-drill holes for lag screws%inch in diameter less than the root diameter of the lag screw thread. b. The minimum width of the lower face of wood beams or.joints in which lag screws of size as specified may be used is as follows: � LAGSCREW�DIAMETER_�.�� NOMINAL WIDTH OF BEAM Y/2 3 4. Do not secure hanger attachment to the diagonals or vertical members of the trusses. 3.3 ANCHORS, RESTRAINTS, RIGID SUPPORTS, STAYS AND SWAY BRACES A. Install pipe anchors, restraints and sway braces,at locations noted on the drawings. Design anchors so as to permit piping to expand and contract freely in opposite directions, away from anchor points. Install anchors independent of all hangers and supports, and in a manner, which will not affect the structural integrity of the building. B. In hubless cast iron piping systems,where piping is suspended on centers in excess of 18 inches by means of non-rigid hangers, provide sway braces, in number and location as required to prevent horizontal pipe movement. 3.4 COMBINATION CLEVIS HANGER, PIPE INSULATION SHIELD AND VAPOR BARRIER JACKETED HIGH DENSITY INSULATING SADDLES A. Install a combination clevis hanger, pipe insulation shield and vapor barrier jacketed high density,insulating saddles,at all points of support for piping or tubing to be insulated for cold service. Furnish companion high density vapor barrier jacketed saddle pieces,of the same material, thickness and length, for installation over the top 180 degree surface of pipe or tubing, at each point of support where an insulated clevis hanger is utilized. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15140P-5 17 Cronin Road 3.5 PIPE INSULATION SHIELDS A. Install a pipe insulation shield,at all points of support,for insulated piping. Centershields on all hangers and supports,and install in such a manner so as not to cut,puncture or compress insulation. END OF SECTION NO. 15140P PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15140P-6 17 Cronin Road I i f--1 SECTION 15191 P- PIPE AND VALVE'IDENTIFICATION ~� PART 1 GENERAL i 1.1 REFERENCES A. ANSI A13.1 -Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems 1.2 SUBMITTALS. A. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions for each item specified PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. W.H. Brady Co., Milwaukee,WI. . B. Emed Co., Buffalo, NY. C. Panduit Corp., Tinley Park, IL. D. Seton Nameplate Corp., New Haven, CT. - 2.2 PIPE MARKERS AND ACCESSORIES A. Snap-on Marker: One (1) piece wrap around.type constructed of precoiled acrylic plastic with clear polyester coating, integral flow arrows, legend printed in alternating directions,% inch adhesive strip on inside edge, and 360 degree visibility. B. Stick-On Marker: Pressure sensitive adhesive backed type constructed of vinyl with clear -� polyester coating, and integral flow arrows for applications where flow arrow banding tape is not being used. C. Pipe Marker Legend and Color Field Sizes: OD of Pipe or ;_} Letter Size Length of:Color Feld y Insulation a (Inches) �' (Inches LL '/to 1%incl. '/2 8 I1%to 2 incl 3/ 8 I D. Banding Tapes: Pressure sensitive adhesive backed type constructed of vinyl with clear polyester coating. 1. Plain Tape: Unprinted type;'color to match pipe marker background. 2. Flow Arrow Tape: Printed type with integral flow arrows;color to match pipe marker background. PIPE AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION 15191 P-1 17 Cronin Road E. Pipe Size Labels: Pressure sensitive adhesive backed type constructed of vinyl with clear polyester coating, vertical reading pipe size in inches, and legend size matching adjacent pipe marker. 2.3 PIPE SERVICE IDENTIFICATION TAGS A. Type: No. 19 B&S gage brass,with%inch high pipe service abbreviated legend on one(1) line, over inch high pipe size legend in inches, both deep stamped and black filled; and 3/16 inch top hole for fastener B. Size: Two (2) inch square tag C. Fasteners: Brass"S" hook or brass jack chain of size as required for pipe to which tag is attached 2.4 VALVE SERVICE IDENTIFICATION TAGS A. Type: No. 19 B&S gage brass,with %inch high valve service abbreviated lettering on one (1)line over%2 inch high valve service chart number, both deep stamped and black filled;and with 3/16 inch top-hole for fastener. B. Sizes: 1. Plumbing Use: 1'/Z inch hexagon C. Fasteners: Brass"S".hook or brass jack chain of size as required for valve stem or handle to -which tag is attached, 2.5, `VALVE SERVICE IDENTIFICATIOM'CWARI"'FRAMES A. Type: Satin finished extruded aluminum frame with rigid clear plastic glazing,size to fit 8%x 11 inches valve chart PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION _ A. Complete testing, insulation and finish painting Work P 9� p g prior to completing the Work of this Section. B. Clean pipe surfaces with cleaning solvents prior to installing piping identification. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install the Work of this Section in accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation instructions, unless otherwise specified. B. Stick-On Pipe Markers: 1. Install minimum of two (2) markers at each specified location, 90 degrees apart on visible side of pipe. 2. Encircle ends of pipe markers around pipe or insulation with banding tape with one (1) inch lap. Use plain banding tape on markers with integral flow arrows, and flow arrow banding tape on markers without integral flow arrows. PIPE AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION 15191 P-2 17 Cronin Road C. Pipe Size Labels: Install labels adjacent to each pipe marker and upstream from flow arrow. Install a minimum of two(2) pipe size labels at each specified location, 90 degrees apart on _7 visible side of pipe. I D. Pipe Service Identification Tags: Attach tags to piping being identified with"S"hooks or jack chains. 3.3 PIPING IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Piping Identification Types: i 1. Piping or Insulation under%inch od: Pipe identification tags - 2. Piping or Insulation%inch to 5 inch od: Snap-on marker or stick-on marker B. Identify exposed piping, bare or insulated, as to content, size of pipe and direction of flow, with the following exceptions: 1. Piping in furred spaces or gypsum board ceilings, except at valve access panels where valves and piping shall be identified as specified for exposed piping systems. 2. Piping in finished spaces and spaces as specified. C. Locate piping identification to be visible from exposed points of observation. Locate piping identification at valve locations;.at points where piping enters and leaves a partition, wall, floor or ceiling, and at intervals of twenty (20)feet on straight runs. Where two(2)or more . pipes run in parallel, place the printed legend and other markers in the same relative location. -3.4 =<VALVE IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Valve Service Identification Tags: 1. Tag valves, except valves at equipment, with a brass tag fastened to the valve handle or stem, marked to indicate service and numbered in sequence for the following applications: a. Domestic water valves controlling mains, risers and branch runouts _ b. Gas valves controlling mains, risers, and.branch runouts B. Valve Service Identification Charts: I 1. Provide two(2)framed valve charts for each piping system specified to be provided with valve identification tags. Type charts on 8% x 11 inches heavy white bond paper, indicating valve number, service and location. 2. Hang framed charts at locations as directed. END OF SECTION NO. 15191 P 1 PIPE AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION 15191 P-3 17 Cronin Road i I SECTION 15260P-PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Hangers and Supports: Section 15140P 1.2 DEFINITIONS i A. Cold Service Insulation: Insulation on piping conveying fluids at below ambient temperatures. B. Hot Service Insulation: Insulation on piping conveying fluids at above ambient temperatures. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog sheets,specifications,and installation instructions for each item specified, excluding Miscellaneous Materials. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE - A. Manufacturers: Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Certainteed Corp. Mansville Sales Corp. B. Installer: A firm with at least five(5)years successful installation experience on projects with mechanical insulations similar to that required for this project. 1. Upon request, furnish to the Owner, the names and addresses of five (5) similar - projects,which the foregoing people have worked within the past three (3)years. i PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Insulation shall not be applied until all surfaces are clean and dry and released for insulation application. B. Vapor Seal 1. A complete moisture and vapor seal shall be provided on cold surfaces where vapor J jackets or coatings are required. 2. Anchors, hangers, and other projections shall be insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation. _ I C. Fire Barriers 1. Pipe insulation shall be continuous through walls and floor openings except where walls or floors are required to be firestopped or required to have a fire resistance rating. PIPING INSULATION 15260P-1 17 Cronin Road D. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flamespread ratings of 25 or less, and smoke developed rating of 50 or less, as tested by ANSI/ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method. E. Low Temperature (below 60°F) 1. Insulated piping shall be supported by hangers and metal shields to be installed with the piping. 2. Inserts shall be provided and installed between the pipe and the shields. 3. Inserts shall consist of rigid pipe insulation equal in thickness to the adjoining insulation and shall be vapor sealed into the adjoining insulation. 4. Where hangers are in direct contact with low temperature piping, the hanger and supporting rod shall be wrapped with foil-faced blanket insulation and vapor sealed. 5. Hanger rod insulation and vapor barrier shall extend up the rod a minimum distance equal to the diameter of the pipe. 2.2 HOT PIPING SYSTEMS Hot water piping A. Hot piping insulation 1 1. 3-%lb. nominal density with white all service jacket(ASJ)with factory applied self- sealing laps 3" matching butt strips with self sealing laps. 2. Refer to piping insulation thickness schedule. B. Hot Service Fittings, Valves, Flanges and Irregular Surfaces: 1. Pre-molded polyvinylchloride fitting jackets:.One-piece, high-impact jackets having a puncture resistance of over 200 Beach Units,an operating temperature range from 33 to 450°F. Complying with Fed Spec. L-P-535, Comp. A, Type ll, Grade GU, installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Provide fittings inserts of 1Y21b./cu. ft., HH-1-558B, Form B, Type 1; thermal conductivity (k value at 75°F) of 0.27". i 2.3 COLD PIPING SYSTEMS Cold water piping A. Cold Piping Insulation 1. 3-% lb. density with white all-service jacket (ASJ) with self-sealing lap and self- sealing butt strips. 2. Insulation ends to be sealed off at valves,fittings,and flanges,with lagging adhesive (BF-30-36). 3. Install at 12 ft. intervals, Benjamin Foster 30-35 adhesive. 4. Refer to piping insulation thickness schedule. PIPING INSULATION 15260P-2 17 Cronin Road B. Cold Service Fittings, Valves, Flanges and Irregular Surfaces: 1. Pre-molded polyvinylchloride fitting jackets: One-piece, high-impact jackets having, a puncture resistance of over 200 Beach Units,an operating temperature range from 33 to 450°F. Complying with Fed Spec. L-P-535, Comp. A, Type II, Grade GU, installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Provide fittings inserts of 1Y2 Ib./cu.ft., HH-1-558B, Form B, Type 1;. thermal conductivity (k value at 75°F)of 0.27". 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS f A. Adhesive: 1. Vapor Barrier Jacket Adhesive: Foster Products Division, 85-20, Childers, CP-82, Epolux, Cad-o-prene, 400. - 2. Canvas Jacket Adhesive: Foster Products Division,30-36,Childers,CP-50;Epolux, -I Cadalag, 336. 3. Reinforcing Membrane Adhesive: Foster Products Division 30-36;Childers,CP-50; Epolux, Cadalag 336. 4. Flexible Elastomeric Foam Adhesive:." Foster Products,Division, 85775; Epolux, j Cad-o-prene, 488; Armstrong, 520. B. Joint Sealant for Fiberglass Insulation: Foster Products Division, 30-45; Childers, CP-30; Epolux, 670. - C. Vapor Barrier Coating: Foster Products Division, 30-35; Childers:'CP-30; Epolux,.�670. D. ::Cement: 1. Insulating Cement: ASTM C195, asbestos free 2. Finishing Cement: ASTM C449/C449M E. Reinforcing Membrane: 1. Polyester Cloth: 8 x 8 mesh per sq.in.,0.7_oz. per sq.yd.; Foster Products Division, Mast-a-fab. 2. Glass Yarn Cloth: 20 x 20 mesh per sq. in.; Johns-Manville, Duramesh fabric F. Sealing Tape: Vapor barrier,.color matching,of same material as the pipe or fitting cover to which applied; as manufactured by Arno Inc., Compac Corp., Fasson Adhesive Co.; or as i recommended by the manufacturer of the jacket material to which applied. G. Thumb Tack Fastener: Stainless steel,with serrated shank PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Do not install insulation until the piping Work has been tested and approved. B. Clean and dry all Work to be insulated prior to applying insulation. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL PIPING1NSULATION 15260P-3 17 Cronin Road A. Install the Work of this section in accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation instructions, except as specified otherwise. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FIBERGLASS INSULATION A. Seal jacket longitudinal flap with vapor barrier jacket adhesive. Rub out all wrinkles and smooth excess sealant flush with outer surface of jacket. B. Apply a coating of vapor barrier jacket adhesive to each section of insulation to.be joined, and apply butt strips in like manner as above. Apply butt strips to overlap 1A"on each side of the sections joined. C. PVC/Fiberglass Fitting Insulation: Tuck the ends of the pre-cut insulation batt snugly into the - throat of the fitting, tuft and tuck-in the edges adjacent to the pipe insulation. Install fitting cover and seal as follows: 1. Cold Service Insulation: Seal the overlap in the throat of the fitting cover, and the butt joint of the cover with the adjacent pipe insulation,with 2"wide sealing tape(a product of the fitting cover manufacturer). Extend the tape 1"over the adjacent pipe insulation and overlap upon itself at least 2"on the downward side. 2. Hot Service Insulation: Secure the cover with staples, thumbtack fasteners, or sealing tape. D. Pre-Molded Fitting Insulation: Insulate to the same thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation... Apply joint sealant to the mating edges of the sections, and to the butt joint. Secure sections. together with banding wire; bend twisted ends into the insulation. Apply a leveling coat of. insulating cement to fill the voids and smooth irregularities. -1. .'Cold Service Insulation: Cover fitting insulation with two(2) %8'thick applications of vapor barrier coating,with a layer of reinforcing membrane bedded between coats. Lap membrane at least 2"over itself, and the adjacent pipe insulation. Apply a six (6)ounce canvas jacket over the fitting,secured with adhesive. Lap canvas at least 2"over itself, and the adjacent pipe insulation. a. Omit canvas on concealed installations. 2. Hot Service Insulation: Apply a six 6 ounce canvas jacket to the fitting insulation PP Y O J 9 secured with adhesive. Lap canvas at least 2"over itself. a. Omit canvas on concealed installations. i PIPING INSULATION 15260P-4 17 Cronin Road E. Vapor Stop for Cold Service Insulation: 1. Pipe Insulation: At twenty-one (21) foot intervals of horizontal, and nine (9) foot intervals of vertical pipe insulation, also at each fitting insulated with pre-molded or miter cut fitting insulation,apply a 1/16"thickness ofvapor barrier coating to the butt end, and 2" into the bore of each joining section before assembling. 2. Insulation Termination; Metal to Insulation Joints; Protrusions Through Insulation: a. Apply a vapor barrier coating to completely seal the joint and extend over adjacent insulation and metal a maximum of three(3) inches. b. Embed reinforcing membrane into the coating, covering the complete coated surface; smooth out wrinkles. C. Apply a heavy application of vapor barrier coating over the entire surface, leaving a large bead or fillet at the joint between metal and insulation. 3.4 INSTALLATION AT HANGERS -- A. Reset and realign hangers and supports if they are displaced while installing the piping insulation. B. Install insulation filler pieces at all hangers for cold service piping, to prevent crushing the insulation. 1. Fiberglass Insulation: Use insulated clevis hangers specified with built-in filler pieces. 2. Flexible Elastomeric Foam Insulation: Install wood blocking orwood dowel plug filler pieces of the same thickness as the insulation. Slot the insulation, insert-the filler. . pieces between the pipe and insulation shield, and secure in.place with adhesive. Install filler pieces as follows: - PIPE/TUBING SIZE SJILFILLER PIECES �_ POSITION Through 1'/z" 2 dowel plugs 6 o'clock; in tandem 2"through 4" 1 block 6 o'clock, and 2 dowel plug 4 &8 o'clock, respectively I i PIPING INSULATION 15260P-5 17 Cronin Road I , 3.5 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULES - TI N INSULA SCHEDULE O S E ULE Insulating materials and thickness for piping, equipment, vessels and appurtenances for conveying,_storing or processing materials. Thicknesses listed are minimum (Nominal). Piping Systems Temperature =l Run <1" 1'/.to �; 2'/Z to ' S" >8" 4 to,6 Hot Piping Hot Water 80 to 110 Y2.1 1" 1" 1 1Y211 Hot Water 110 to 140 1" 1 Y211 I Y2" 2" 2" 2'/z' Cold Piping Cold Water 40 to 55 Y211 Y211 1" NOTE: Manufacturers may submit alternative thickness schedule per published catalog date if desired. A. Install cold service insulation intact through pipe sleeves, and openings in building construction, maintaining the vapor barrier integrity of the system. B. Insulate valve bodies up to but not including the packing nuts. C. On hot service piping, fill.voids in insulation at hangers,with insulating cement. END OF SECTION NO. 15260P i PIPING INSULATION 15260P-6 17 Cronin Road SECTION 15410P-PLUMBING PIPING ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 07840:Through Penetration'Firestops B. Section 07900: Sealants 1.2 REFERENCES A. NFPA 13-Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems -,I B. NFPA 14-.Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. N_ 1.3 SUBMITTALS A.. Product Data: 1. Catalog sheets and specifications.indicating manufacturer name, type, applicable reference standard, schedule, or class for specified pipe and fittings. 2. Material Schedule: Itemize pipe and fitting materials for each specified application in -� Pipe and Fittings Schedule in Part 3 of this Section. Where optional materials are specified, indicate option selected. PART 'PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe for Threading: Standard weight, Schedule 40, black or galvanized;ASTM A53 or ASTM A135 j B. Malleable Iron, Steam,Pattern Threaded Fittings: -, 1. 150,Ib Class: ASME 916.3 2. 300 lb Class: ASME 1316.3 C. Cast Iron Fittings: 1. Drainage Pattern, Threaded: ASME B16.12 2. Steam Pattern,Threaded: ASME B16.4 j a. Standard Weight: Class 125 b. Extra Heavy.Weight: Class 250 - 3. Flanged Fittings and Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1 a. Standard Weight: Class 125 b. Extra Heavy: Class 250 i D. Unions: Malleable iron, 250 lb class, brass to iron or brass to brass seats i PLUMBING PIPING 15410P-1 17 Cronin Road E. Couplings: Same material and pressure rating as adjoining pipe, conforming to standards for fittings in such pipe. Use taper tapped threaded type in screwed pipe systems operating in excess of fifteen (15) psig. F. Nipples: Same material and strength as adjoining pipe, except nipples having a length of less than one(1) inch between threads shall be extra heavy. - 2.2 COPPER AND BRASS PIPE, TUBING AND FITTINGS A. Copper Tube,Type L,: ASTM B 88 B. Wrot Copper Tube Fittings, Solder Joint: ASME B16.22 C. Cast Copper Alloy Tube Fittings, Solder Joint: ASME B16.18 D. Drainage Tube,Type DWV: ASTM B 306 E. Wrot Copper Drainage Tube Fittings, Solder Joint: ASME B16.29 i F. Cast Copper Alloy Drainage Fittings, Solder Joint: ASME B16.23 G. Unions: Cast bronze, 150 lb Class, bronze to bronze seats, threaded or solder joint H. Plumber's Tube: Seamless, semi-ahnealed, minimum 65 percent copper, No. 18 B & S Gage I. Flared Tube Fittings: 1. Water Tube Type: ASME B16.26 2. Refrigerant Tube Type: SAE J513 2.3 CAST IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Bell and Spigot Soil Pipe: Service Weight, Bitumin coated;ASTM A 74 B. Bell and Spigot Soil Pipe Fittings: Service Weight, Bitumin coated;ASTM A 74 C. Hubless Pipe: Bitumin coated; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standard No. 301 D. Hubless Pipe Fittings: Drainage Pattern, Bitumin coated; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standard No. 301 E. Hubless Joint Couplings: Stainless steel shield and clamp assembly, and elastomer sealing sleeve; CISPI-310 - 2.4 JOINING AND SEALANT MATERIALS A. Thread Sealant: 1. LA-CO Industries', Slic-rite Paste with Teflon 2. Loctite Corp.'s No. 565 Thread Sealant 3. Thread sealants for potable water shall be NSF approved PLUMBING PIPING 15410P-2 17 Cronin Road B. Thread Sealant(Natural Gas Piping): Rectorseal Corp.'s T Plus 2 non-hardening pipe dope - with teflon. C. Solder: Solid wire type conforming to the following: 1. Type 3: Lead-free tin-silver solder(ASTM B32 Alloy Grade E,AC, or HB); Engelhard - Corp.'s Silvabrite 100, Federated Fry Metals' Aqua Clean, or J.W. Harris Co. Inc.'s Stay-Safe Bridgit. D. Soldering Flux for Soldered Joints: All-State Welding Products .Inc.'s Duzall, Engelhard Corp.'s General Purpose Liquid or Paste, Federated Fry Metals' Water Flow 2000, or J.W. Harris Co. Inc.'s Stay-Clean. E. Gaskets For Use With Ductile Iron Water Pipe and Cast Iron Drainage Pipe: Synthetic rubber rings (molded or tubular): Clow Corp.'s Belltite, Tyler Pipe Industries Inc.'s Ty-Seal, or U.S..Pipe and foundry Co.'s Tyton F. Anti-Seize Lubricant: Bostik Inc.'s Never Seez or Dow Corning Corp.'s Molykote 1000 2.5 DIELECTRIC CONNECTORS A. Unions: Rated 250 psi at 210 degrees F;ASME 1316.39 B. Flange Electrical Insulation Kit: Consisting of dielectric sleeves and washers, and dielectric l gasket 1. Rated 250 psi at 210-degrees F. Flange Unions: Rated.175 psi at 210 degrees F;ASME'B16.42{iron):and 1316.24_(bronze) 2.6 PIPE SLEEVES A. Type A: Schedule 40 steel pipe B. Type B: No. 16 gage galvanized sheet steel 2.7 FLOOR,WALL AND CEILING PLATES . A. Cast Brass: Polished chrome plated finish,with-set screw —I 1. Solid Type: Models 5-and'5T by Pegasus Mfg. Inc., Cheshire, CT; and Models 951 960(inclusive) by Bridgeport Plumbing Products, Moutrie, GA, 2. Split Type: Models 3 and 3T by Pegasus Mfg. Inc., Cheshire, CT. B. Cast-iron: Solid type, unplated,with set screw; Model 395 by Grinnell Corp., Cranston, RI. PART 3 EXECUTION -- 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install piping at approximate locations indicated, and at maximum height. B.. Install piping clear of door swings, and above sash heads. C. Make allowances for expansion and contraction. PLUMBING PIPING 15410P-3 17 Cronin Road D. Allow for a minimum of one (1) inch free air space around pipe or pipe covering, unless otherwise specified. E. Install horizontal piping with a constant pitch, and without sags or humps. i 1. Water Piping: Pitch % inch per ten (10) feet upward in direction. of flow, unless otherwise noted. If it is not possible to maintain constant pitch, establish a new low point and continue. At the low point, provide a Y2 inch drip leg and gate valve with a hose bibb end. Provide an air vent at the high point. 2. Drainage Piping: Pitch % inch per foot downward, in direction of flow, unless otherwise noted. 3. Vent Piping: Pitch %inch per foot upward, unless otherwise noted. F. Install vertical piping plumb. G. Use fittings for offsets and direction changes, except for Type K soft annealed copper temper water tube, and mechanically extracted joints in Type L copper tubing. H. Cut pipe and tubing ends square; ream before joining. I. Threading: Use American Standard Taper Pipe Thread Dies. 1. Thread brass pipe with special brass threading dies 3.2 DRAINAGE SYSTEMS A. Fittings: 1. Use long turn drainage pattern-fittings, unless space conditions prohibit their use; in =:such cases, short turn-pattern fittings may be used. 2. Vertical Offsets: Make vertical offsets with 45 degree elbows, or bends. 3. Tucker Fittings: Tucker fittings may only be installed in vertical piping. B. Cleanouts: 1. Install cleanouts with sufficient side and end clearance to allow for the removal of the - cleanout plug, and the use of cleaning tools. 2. Lubricate cleanout plugs with anti-seize lubricant. 3.3 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Connect runouts to the upper quadrant of the main, and run upward at not less than forty- five(45)degrees before extending laterally. B. Make final connections to plumbing fixtures and equipment with unions, or flanges: 1. Do not use unions in ferrous piping larger than three(3) inches. 2. Do not use unions in brass or copper piping larger than two(2) inches. 3.4 NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM A. Install gas piping system in conformance with the National Fuel Gas Code, NFPA 54, or as required by the serving gas supplier. B. Use non-hardening pipe dope on threads. Do not use thread seal tape. PLUMBING PIPING 15410P-4 17 Cronin Road - 7 3.5 PIPE JOINT MAKE-UP A. Threaded Joint: Make up joint with a pipe thread compound applied in accordance with manufacturer's printed application instructions for the intended service. 1. Chrome Plated Brass Pipe: Tighten'joint with a strap or Parmalee wrench; do not mar pipe finish. Install piping so that no threads are visible. B. Soldered Joint: Thoroughly clean tube end and inside of fitting with emery cloth, sand cloth, or wire brush. Apply flux to the pre-cleaned surfaces. Install fitting, heat to soldering temperature, and join the metals with type solder specified. Remove residue. 4 C. Rubber Ring Push-on Joint: Clean hub, bevel spigot, and make up joint with lubricated - gasket in conformance with the manufacturer's printed installation instructions. i i - D. Hubless CI Pipe Joint: Make up joint with hubless fitting and couplings, in conformance wi th the manufacturer's printed installation instructions. -_ E. Dissimilar Pipe Joint: _ 1. Joining Bell and Spigot and Threaded Pipe: Install a half coupling on the pipe or tube end to form a spigot, and calk into the cast iron bell. 2. Joining Dissimilar Threaded Piping: Make up connection with a threaded coupling or with'companion flanges. 3. Joining Dissimilar Non-Threaded Piping: Make up connection with adapters recommended by the manufacturers of the piping to be joined. .3.6 PIPING PENETRATIONS . - - A. Sleeve Schedule: Unless otherwise shown, comply with the following schedule forrthe type of sleeve to be used where piping penetrates wall or floor construction: ! CONSTRUCTION SLEEVE TYPE j 1. Frame construction None Required 2. Foundation walls A* 3. ' Non-waterproof interior walls B* 4. Non-waterproof interior floors not on metal decks B* 5. Earth supported concrete floors None Required - 6. Exterior concrete slabs on grade A 7. Fixtures with floor outlet waste piping None Required 8. Non-metal roof decks A 9. Waterproof.floors not on metal decks A 10. Waterproof walls A *Core drilling is permissible in lieu of sleeves where marked with asterisks. I PLUMBING PIPING 15410P-5 17 Cronin Road i B. Diameter of Sleeves and Core Drilled Holes: 1. Unless otherwise specified, size holes thru floors and walls in accordance with the through penetration fire stopping system being used. 2. Size holes thru exterior walls or waterproofed walls above inside earth or finished floors, and exterior concrete slabs in accordance with the following: a. Uninsulated (Bare) Pipe: Inside diameter of sleeve or core drilled hole Y2 inch greater than outside diameter of pipe, unless otherwise specified. b. Insulated Pipe: Inside diameter of sleeve or core drilled hole Y2 inch greater than outside diameter of insulation, unless otherwise specified. C. Mechanical Modular Seals: Size holes in accordance with the - manufacturer's recommendations. C. Length of Sleeves (except as shown otherwise on Drawings): 1. Walls and Partitions: Equal in length to total finished thickness of wall or partition. 2. Floors, Finished: Equal in length to total finished thickness of floor and extending inch above the finished floor level, except as follows: a. In furred spaces at exterior walls, extend sleeve one (1) inch above the finished floor level - 3. Roofs: Equal in length to the total thickness of roof construction, including insulation and roofing materials, and extending one (1) inch above the finished roof level. D. Packing of Sleeves and Core Drilled Holes: 1. Unless otherwise specified, pack sleeves or cored drilled holes in accordance with -..Section:07840- FIRESTOPPING. - 2. :Pack sleeves in exterior walls or waterproofed walls above inside earth.or finished, floors with oakum to within %inch of each wall face, and finish both sides with - Type 1 C (one part) sealant. See Section 07900. a. Mechanical modular seals may be used in lieu of packing and sealant for sleeves and core drilled holes. 3. Pack sleeves in exterior concrete slabs with oakum to full depth, and within Y2 inch of top of sleeve and finish the remainder with sealant. See Section 07900. a. Sealant Types: 1) . Piping Conveying Materials up to 140 degrees F other than Motor - Fuel Dispensing System Piping: Type 1 C (one part). 2) Motor Fuel Dispensing System Piping: Type 1C (2 part). b. Mechanical modular seals may be used in lieu of packing and sealant for _ sleeves and core drilled holes. E. Weld metal collars of Type C and D sleeves to the upper surface of the metal deck. Seal voids under the metal collar as recommended by the manufacturer of the metal deck. 3.7 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING PLATES i_ A. Install plates for exposed uninsulated piping passing thru floors, walls, ceilings, and exterior concrete slabs as follows: 1. In Finished Spaces: a. Piping 4 Inch Size and Smaller: Solid or split, chrome plated cast brass b. Piping Over 4 Inch Size: Split, chrome plated cast brass 2. Unfinished Spaces(Including Exterior Concrete Slabs): Solid, unplated cast iron PLUMBING PIPING 15410P-6 17 Cronin Road _ 3. Fasten plates with setscrews 4. Plates are not required in pipe shafts or furred spaces 3.8 PIPE AND FITTING SCHEDULE A. Where options are given, choose only one(1)option for each piping service. No deviations from the selected option will be allowed. B. Domestic Water(Above Ground): 1. Three(3) inch and Under: Type L hard drawn copper tube,with cast copper alloy or wrot copper solder type fittings, and joints made up with Type 3 solder, or mechanically extracted joints made up with brazing alloy. C. Drainage (Sanitary)Above Ground: 1. Exposed Piping Serving Food Service Equipment, Except Piping Installed within Cabinets, and not Exposed to View: Polished, chrome plated grade A brass pipe with cast brass fittings, and threaded joints D. Drainage Piping (Below Ground): i 1. Option No. 1: Service weight, coated, cast iron bell and spigot pipe and fittings, with calked joints 2. Option No. 2: Service weight, coated, cast iron bell and spigot pipe and fittings, with rubber ring push-on joints E. .`Natural Gas Piping: -' 1. 'Inside Building: Standard weight Schedule 40 black steel pipe,with 150 lb malleable iron fittings, and threaded joints F. Vent Piping: Same materials that are used for piping system to which vent is connected I END OF SECTION NO. 1541013 i i PLUMBING PIPING 15410P-7 17 Cronin Road E SECTION 15440P-PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 15140P: Pipe Hangers and Supports B. Section 15260P: Piping Insulation C. Section 1541OP: Plumbing Piping D. Section 15992P: Cleaning and Testing 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards: 1. The materials specified in;this Section shall meet. or exceed the applicable requirements of FS WW P-541 unless specified otherwise. 2. Fixture and fittings designated for use by the handicapped shall conform with ANSI A 117.1. B. Each fixture carrier shall be listed by number in the current issue of the manufacturer's Fixture Support.Selection Guide as being recommended for the support of the appropriate fixture. . 1.3 .._ ...SUBMITTALS: _ - A. Product Data: Catalog sheets,specifications, roughing dimensions,installation instructions for each item specified. 1. Deliver cut out data for countertop fixtures to the Owner's representative. I 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Each fixture and fitting shall be plainly and permanently marked with the manufacturer's name or trademark. Model numbers indicated in this specification are Kohler unless noted otherwise. B. Acid resistant surfaces-shall be plainly and permanently marked with the manufacturer's label or symbol indicating acid resistance. 1.5 MAINTENANCE j A. Special Tools: Furnish the-following.tools labeled with names and locations to be used. - Store them at the site where directed. 1. Keys for stops(fumished with stops) 2. Tools for Vandal Resistant Fasteners: Two(2)for each type and size 'I PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440P-1 17 Cronin Road PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 SINK(CSK-1) A. Elkay model LR1919, 19'/2" x 19" outside dimensions, 16" x 13W inside dimensions, 18 gauge self-rimming stainless steel single hole sink, 5W depth. B. Elkay model (1) LKAD35 strainers C. Elkay model LK434OFCRC polished chrome, single lever, ADA sink faucet D. Engineering Brass Company 1'/2" 17 gauge polished chrome drainage pipe and offset"P" trap; locate trap parallel to rear of cabinet or wall E. Engineering Brass flexible supplies and wheel handle angle stop valves,wall escutcheon PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FIXTURE INSTALLATION A. Install the Work of this section in accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation - instructions. B. Install.fixtures level and at proper height; tighten connections; install hold-down bolts, cap ..nuts and cover plates,where required. C. Countertop Fixtures: 1. Anstall fixture with securing devices supplied. 2. "Set fixture on bedding of sealant, tighten securing devices and remove excess - sealant. 3.2 - CLEANING, FLUSHING AND ADJUSTMENT A. Clean fixture and trim. Remove grease and dirt polish surfaces but leave stickers g and P warning labels intact. B. Flush supply piping and traps; clean strainers. C. Adjust stops for proper delivery; adjust metering faucets for proper timing. END OF SECTION NO. 15440P i PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440P-2 17 Cronin Road i SECTION 15951 -CLEANING AND TESTING PART GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Perform factory testing of factory fabricated equipment in complete accordance with the agencies having jurisdiction. 2. Perform field testing of piping systems in complete accordance with the local utilities and other agencies having jurisdiction and as specified. 1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection: During test Work, protect. controls, gages and accessories, which are not designed to.withstand test pressures. Do not utilize permanently installed gages for field testing of systems. 1.3 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING i A. Transmit written notification of proposed date and time of operational tests to the Owners - representative at least five (5)days in advance of such tests. B. Perform cleaning and testing Work in the presence of the Owner's representative. C. Pressure test.piping systems inside buildings, at the roughing-in stage of installation, before :-piping is enclosed by construction Work, and at other times as directed.-'Perform.:test operations in sections as required and directed, to progress the Work in a satisfactory - manner and not delay the general construction of the building. Valve or cap-off sections of piping to be tested, utilizing valves required to be installed in the permanent piping systems, or temporary valves or caps as required to perform the Work. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Test Equipment and Instruments: Type and kind as required for the particular system under test B. Test Media(air, gas, water): As specified for the particular piping or system under test C. Cleaning Agent (chemical solution, steam, water): As specified for the particular piping, apparatus or system being cleaned PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PRELIMINARY WORK A. Thoroughly clean pipe and tubing prior to installation. During installation, prevent foreign matter from entering systems. Prevent if possible and remove stoppages or obstructions from piping and systems. CLEANING AND TESTING 15951 P-1 17 Cronin Road B. Thoroughly clean compressed air, control air, refrigerant pipe and similar systems prior to pressure or vacuum testing. 3.2 PRESSURE TESTS -PIPING A. Piping shall be tight under test and shall not show loss in pressure or visible leaks, during test operations or after the minimum duration of time as specified. Remove i p p e piping, which is not tight under test; remake joints and repeat test until no leaks occur. B. Water Systems: 1. Domestic water(potable cold, domestic hot) inside buildings: a. Before fixtures,faucets,trim and accessories are connected, perform hydrostatic test at 125 psig minimum for four(4) hours. b. After fixtures,faucets,trim and accessories are connected, perform hydrostatic retest at 75 psig for four(4) hours. C. Gas Piping: Before concealment, perform air test of duration and pressure as required by the local gas company. However, for gas piping designed for pressures of from four (4) _ inches to six (6) inches water column, air test at fifteen (15) inches Hg for one (1) hour, without t out drop in pressure. Test gas piping with air only. Check points for leaks with soap suds. D. Drainage, Vent, Piping (Inside Buildings): Perform tests before fixtures are installed. Test by filling the entire system with water, and allowing too stand for three (3) hours, with no noticeable loss of water. Test joints under a minimum head of ten (10)feet of water, except the uppermost section. Test the uppermost section to overflowing. 3.3 `:DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS A. Disinfect potable water pipe and equipment installed in the Work of this Contract. 1. Completely fill the piping, including water storage equipment if installed, with a water solution containing 50 mg/L available chlorine, and allow stand for twenty-four (24) hours. Operate all valves during this period to assure their proper disinfection. 2. After the retention period, discharge the solution to an approved waste and flush the system thoroughly with water until substantially all traces of chlorine are removed. Drain and flush water storage equipment if installed. B. Connect plumbing fixtures and equipment and place the system into service. Prevent recontamination of the piping during this phase of the Work. END OF SECTION NO. 15951 P CLEANING AND TESTING 15951 P-2 17 Cronin Road